100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TWO MODULARS FOR EACH OF THREE ...€¦ · JEFFCO PUBLIC SCHOOLS Adams...

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 19, 2016

TWO MODULARS FOR EACH OF THREE SCHOOLS JEFFCO PUBLIC SCHOOLS Adams Elementary School Rooney Ranch Elementary School West Jefferson Elementary School OWNER: Jefferson County Public Schools 809 Quail Street, Bldg. #4 Lakewood, Colorado 80215 Contact: David Curnow ARCHITECT: Mellin & Associates Architects, P.C. 5570 East Yale Ave. Denver, Colorado 80222 Contact: James Mellin PLUMBING ENGINEER: BCER Engineering 5420 Ward Road, Suite 200 Arvada, Colorado 80002 Contact: Mark Johnson ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: BCER Engineering 10807 New Allegiance Drive, Suite 400 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80921 Contact: Chris Wren TECHNOLOGY ENGINEER: BCER Rimrock Technology 10807 New Allegiance Drive, Suite 400 Colorado Springs, Colorado 80921 Contact: Travis McNair

M&A TABLE OF CONTENTS

TWO MODULARS FOR EACH OF 3 SCHOOLS TOC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Two Modulars for Each of Three Schools for

Jefferson County Public School District

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS April 19, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1-3

VOLUME 1 OF 1 DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID 00 21 13 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 00 30 00 AVAILABLE INFORMATION 00 41 00 BID FORMS 00 43 13 BID SECURITY FORM (Bid Bond) 00 43 36 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM 00 52 13 AGREEMENT FORM-Stipulated Sum 00 55 00 NOTICE TO PROCEED CHECKLIST & NOTICE TO PROCEED 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND FORMS 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 22 00 UNIT PRICES 01 23 00 ALTERNATES 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 62 00 PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01 78 36 WARRANTIES 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS



DIVISION O2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 51 30 ASPHALT PAVING 02 90 00 LANDSCAPING 02 93 00 LAWNS AND GRASSES

DIVISION O3 – CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION O9 – FINISHES

09 90 00 PAINTING

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 00 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 22 05 33 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 50 10 ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 26 05 19 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 26 05 32 CONDUIT 26 05 34 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 FUSES 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

27 00 10 COMMUNICATION SERVICES 27 05 00 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX 27 05 10 LIST OF ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (DATA AND VOICE) 27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL CABLE TESTING 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE AND EQUIPMENT ROOMS 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE RISER CABLING



27 15 00 HORIZONTAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING 27 16 00 COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS 27 16 50 VIDEO PROJECTOR CABLING MOUNTING 27 51 13 PAGING SYSTEMS (MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM) 27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SOUND SYSTEMS 27 53 13 CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 – FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION

28 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL SECURITY SYSTEM 28 16 00 SECURITY DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION & ALARM

DIVISION 31 – SITE WORK

31 11 00 SITE PREPARATION 31 23 00 EARTHWORK

DIVISION 32 – ASPHALT AND CONCRETE PAVING

32 12 00 ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 00 EXTERIOR CONCRETE FLATWORK

M&A INVITATION TO BID

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 00 11 16 -1

Section 00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BID

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1

INVITATION TO BID

Sealed Base Bid proposals (single copy) will be received by Jefferson County School District R-1 in the Main

Conference Room at the office of Facilities Planning and Design/Construction Management, 809 Quail Street,

Building #4, Lakewood, Colorado 80215 until:

TIME: 2:00 p.m. M.D.T.

DATE: May 03, 2016

PROJECT: TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES

(All Three School Locations within Jefferson County School District)

1. Bidders shall submit their Base Bid, Add Alternates and Unit Prices on the provided Bid

Proposal Form. The Bid Proposal form shall be completely filled out with the inclusion of

the add alternates and unit prices bid items. The Bid Security bond shall be submitted with the

Bid proposal.

Immediately following the submittal of the Bid Proposals at 2:00 p.m. M.D.T. both the Base Bid Proposals,

and any Add Alternates and Unit Prices Bid Proposals will be publicly opened.

Bids will be received from the following pre-qualified General Contractors:

Himmelman Construction

12560 W. Cedar Drive, Lakewood, Colorado 80228

Contact: Barry Himmelman

Phone: 303-790-1984 Fax: 303-790-1988

Email: [email protected]

JCM Inc.

6114 Meadowbrook Drive, Morrison, Colorado 80465

Contact: Cory Jackson

Phone: 303-697-5700 Fax: 303-697-5700

Email: [email protected],

SCS Construction, Inc.

3440 Youngfield Street, Suite 360, Wheat Ridge, Colorado 80033

Contact: Shawn Squire

Phone: 303-431-4429 Fax: 303-431-2443

Email: [email protected]

For the Project: TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES

Bids received after the closing time will be returned unopened. Immediately after said closing time, all bids

received will be publicly opened and read aloud in the presence of all interested parties.

Beginning: On April 19, 2016 at 2:00 p.m., a CD of the complete set of Construction Documents pdfs will be

available from the office of the architect:

Mellin & Associates Architects, P.C.,

M&A INVITATION TO BID

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 00 11 16 -1

5570 East Yale Ave.,

Denver, Colorado 80222.

(303-681-2846).

(Additional hardcopy sets of the construction documents can be available, at contractor’s non-refundable cost,

at Ken’s Reproductions, 720-493-9904.)

Hardcopy sets of the Construction Documents including all plan drawings and specifications, will be available

after April 19, 2016 at 2:00 pm for examination at the office of the architect.

Each bid must be submitted on a form, a specimen copy of which is enclosed in these documents. Loose

copies of the Bid Proposal and Bid Bond Forms will be provided for General Contractors who receive

Construction Documents. Do not use the Bid or Bond Forms bound in the Project Manual. Each bid must be

accompanied by a Proposal Guarantee in the amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the total bid price in

the form of a Bid Security Bond issued by a company rated not lower than A- in Bests Insurance Guide, latest

edition, cashier’s check , or certified check drawn on an acceptable bank and payable without qualifications to

Jefferson County School District No. R-1.

All bids must be sealed and marked in a manner prescribed in the documents. The School District reserves the

right to reject any and all bids, to waive all irregularities, and to accept any bid deemed to be in it’s best

interest.

A mandatory pre-bid meeting for pre-qualified General Contractor bidders will be held @ 10:00 am on

Wednesday, 04-20-16, starting at Adams ES, then on to Rooney Ranch ES and West Jefferson ES.

Adams ES, 6450 West 95th

Place, Westminster, Colorado 80030

Rooney Ranch ES, 2200 South Coors Street, Lakewood, Colorado 80228

West Jefferson ES, 26501 Barkley Road, Conifer, Colorado 80433

For Questions: Bidders may submit a Request for Information to the architect no later than April 26,

2016 by 2:00 pm via email only to: James Mellin at [email protected] Responses to the Request

for Information will be transmitted to all bidders by April 28, 2016 at 2:00 pm.

Further information will be found in the “Instructions to Bidders” in the Contract Documents. Attendance by

subcontractors is highly recommended but not required.

END OF SECTION 00 11 16

M&A INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 00 21 13-1

Section 00 21 13 – INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS


INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

Refer to the following Jefferson County School District, R-1document.


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Jefferson County School District No. R-1, State of Colorado, hereinafter called the "Owner", has advertised for bids to be submitted for the construction work specified in the advertisement. Proposals to be entitled to consideration shall be in accordance with the following: 1. EXAMINATION OF SITE and DOCUMENTS

Each Bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and shall completely inform himself relative to construction hazards, procedure, labor, and all other conditions and factors, local and otherwise, which would affect prosecution and completion of the work and its cost. Such considerations shall include, without limitations, the arrangement and condition of existing structures and facilities; the procedure necessary for maintenance of uninterrupted, safe operation, use and occupancy of existing facilities; the availability and cost of labor; and facilities for transportation, handling and storage of materials and equipment. All such factors shall be properly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid. Each bidder shall so fully examine the plans and specifications and acquaint himself with their requirements and with the conditions surrounding the construction on the site that he shall be fully familiar with and informed of all facilities, difficulties, and problems associated with or which might be incurred in the prosecution of the work. In case of disagreement between drawings and specifications or within either document itself, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be figured in the bid (see GC. 6.04). It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to direct the attention of the Architect and Owner in writing and at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to the time set for the opening of the bids, any seeming inconsistencies, ambiguous requirements, omissions, or any other matter which seems to require explanation, and to request clarification. The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facie evidence of compliance with this requirement and as an acknowledgment that the Bidder has received all the required documents and has visited the site. There will be no subsequent financial adjustment for lack of such prior information. 2. INTERPRETATION

No oral interpretations will be made by anyone to any Bidder as to the true meaning or requirements of any part of the drawings, specifications or other proposed Contract Documents. Every request for an interpretation shall be made in writing and addressed and forwarded to the Architect and the Owner not later than seventy-two (72) hours before the date fixed for opening of bids. The person submitting the request shall be responsible for its prompt delivery. Every interpretation made to a Bidder will be in the form of an addendum to the Contract Documents, which, if issued, will be sent as promptly as is practicable to all persons to whom the drawings, specifications, and other proposed Contract Documents have been issued. All such addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents and their receipt shall be acknowledged in the Bid Proposal. The Owner will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed Contract Documents.

JCSD R-1 Revised 8-06 1 of 7

3. BID FORMS

Bid forms will be supplied by the Owner. Proposals shall be made upon the forms provided therefor.

Attention is directed to the fact that the Contract Documents contain one complete set of bidding and contract forms; these are sample forms included for the information of Bidders. They are not to be detached from the Contract Documents, filled out or executed.

Special attention is directed to the Form of Bid Bond included in the bidding documents. Additional copies of this form may be secured from the Architect, but the use of this particular form is not mandatory. Any similar standard form of a recognized responsible surety which contains the same stipulations and guarantees, the same execution of the contract and indemnification of the Owner in case of default, will be acceptable. 4. PREPARATION OF BID FORMS

All proposal forms must be prepared in single copy and in conformity with and be based upon and submitted subject to all requirements of the Contract Documents. They must be fully completed with all blanks appropriately filled in. Each bid shall be legibly written or printed in ink on the separate form provided. No alterations in bids, or in the printed forms therefor, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, the Owner may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. No alteration in any bid, or in the form on which it is submitted, shall be made after the bid has been submitted.

It will be the Bidder's responsibility to secure any and all addenda from the Architect. The Bidder will be required to acknowledge receipt of all addenda. Owner reserves the right to reject any bid which is received which has not been based upon all addenda issued by the Architect.

No Bidder may submit more than one bid. Multiple bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association.

The Bidder is required to bid on all alternates and complete all blanks on the bid form. If alternates are called for on a type or method of construction as to which the Bidder does not desire to bid, he shall insert the words "NO BID". In case the Bidder desires to bid on an alternate, he shall set forth in the space provided therefor, the amount to be added or deducted from the base bid or in the event that the Bidder does not desire to make a change from the base bid, he shall so indicate by using the words "NO CHANGE". In the selection of alternates, the Owner reserves the right to select or reject any or all alternates in the proposal if, in the judgment of the Board of Education, or its designees, the best interest of the School District will be so served.


5. BID PERFORMANCE GUARANTIES

Bid security (single copy) in the form of a cashier's check drawn on an acceptable bank or bid bond in the amount of at least ten (10%) percent of the bid price, payable without condition or qualification to Jefferson County School District No. R-1, shall accompany each bid, as evidence of good faith and as a guarantee that if awarded the contract, the Bidder will execute the Contract and give bond as required. The Bidder assumes all responsibility for furnishing acceptable bid security.

Bid security in the form of a bond will be accepted only if from a regularly established firm licensed to write such surety in the State of Colorado and which is rated not lower than A- in Best's Insurance Guide, latest edition, or have a Best's Financial Rating of X.

The bid security of each unsuccessful Bidder will be returned when the Construction Agreement is fully executed. The bid security will be voided but retained by the Owner, if, after the Notice of Contract Award, the Bidder shall enter into a Contract and file a satisfactory performance bond, labor and material payment bond, and certificates of required insurance, all within ten (10) calendar days after the date such notice is given by the Owner. The bid security of the second and third lowest responsible Bidders may be retained for not to exceed forty-five (45) days after opening, pending the execution of the Construction Agreement and submission of bond by the successful Bidder.

This bid security may be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages, if the bid is accepted and a contract thereon is awarded but the successful Bidder fails to enter into a contract in the form prescribed with legally responsible sureties, within ten (10) calendar days after date of Notice of Contract Award is given by the Owner.

The Owner shall require the Bidder to whom a Contract is awarded to furnish to the Owner both Performance and Labor and Material Payment bonds in the amount of one hundred (100%) percent of the Contract price, covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder, and the Bidder will further provide warranties as required by the specifications or General Conditions.

The bonds shall be executed on the forms included with the Contract Documents (forms shall not be removed from the Contract Documents; Bidders shall obtain original copies of the bond forms from the Owner). Accompanying each bond form shall be a "Power of Attorney" authorizing the attorney in fact to bind the surety company and certified to include the date of the bond.


6. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

The low three (3) bidders shall within twenty-four (24) hours following the bid opening notify the Owner in writing of the entire list of subcontractors and suppliers of labor and material whose quotations he has used in preparation of his bid and whose services he proposes to use in construction of the project. The list must be complete showing all sections in the Construction Documents. Failure to submit such a list may preclude the bid from further consideration by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to either disclose or not disclose the subcontractor list of the successful Bidder.

Each Bidder shall identify and fully disclose on such list all those subcontractors and

suppliers proposed for the work with which the Bidder is connected either directly or indirectly as part owner, participant in profits and losses or in any other manner financially or economically. 7. PERMITS AND FEES

Each contractor shall secure and pay for the legal permits and inspection fees required for the execution of his work. The Owner is exempt from paying certain fees and it will be the contractor's responsibility to acquaint himself with the laws and regulations governing said fees. Attention is directed to the requirements of the General Conditions regarding obtaining permits. 8. TAXES

The Owner is exempt from the collection and payment of state sales and use taxes on any materials, supplies or other equipment used or installed in the work. Some cities and municipalities may charge a local sales or use tax for materials, supplies or equipment picked up by the contractor in that city or municipality for use at a job site outside of that city or municipality. In such cases the contractor, subcontractors and suppliers should have all building materials, supplies and equipment delivered to the job site by common carrier, by conveyance of the seller or by mail in order to be exempt from the local sales or use taxes. The contractor's bid proposal and any agreed upon variations thereof shall include the cost of any such taxes. For state sales and use taxes, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor and each subcontractor to complete and file an "Application for Exemption Certificate" with the Colorado Department of Revenue and submit copies of such Certificate to the Owner upon award of the contract and prior to commencing any work. 9. PREFERENCE FOR LOCAL MATERIALS, LABOR AND RESIDENT BIDDERS

Preference is hereby given to materials, supplies and provisions produced, manufactured or grown in Colorado, quality being equal to articles offered by competitors outside of the state. Each contractor shall comply with the provisions of Colorado Revised Statutes, Sections 8-17-101 and 102, and 8-18-101 and 103 (as amended) giving preference to Colorado labor and materials in the performance of the work.

Preference shall also be given to resident bidders in accordance with provisions of Colorado Revised Statutes, Section 8-19-101 and 102 (1985).


10. SIGNATURE OF BIDDERS

Each Bidder shall sign the bid form and bid bond using his usual signature and giving his full business address. If the Bidder is an individual, he must sign in individual capacity. Bids by partnerships shall be signed with the partnership name followed by the signature and designation of one of the partners or other authorized representative. Bids by corporations shall be signed with the name of the corporation followed by the signature and designation of the president or other person authorized to bind the corporation and attested to by the secretary with corporate seal. Bids by joint ventures shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The names of all persons signing should also be typed or printed below the signature.

A bid by a person who affixes to his signature the word "president", "secretary", "agent", or

other designation without disclosing his principal may be held to be the bid of the individual signing. When requested by the Owner, evidence of the authority of the person signing shall be furnished. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS

Bid Documents shall be enclosed in two envelopes (outer and inner), or one opaque envelope, each of which shall be sealed and clearly labeled "BID DOCUMENTS" and identified with the description of the work to which the proposal applies; the name of the project; the name and address of the Bidder; and the time of opening bids; all in prominent lettering so as to guard against opening prior to the stipulated time. No responsibility shall attach to any employee of the Owner for the premature opening of any bid not prominently identified. The Bidder shall be responsible for placing his firm name and the name and number, if applicable, of the project and the time of the bidding on the outside of such bid envelope.

The Bid Documents shall be submitted at the time and location as noted in the Invitation to Bid. Bids received after the specified time of closing will be returned unopened. 12. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

Any Bidder may withdraw his bid if written request for withdrawal signed in the same manner and by the same person who signed the Bid Form is received by the individual of the School District requesting the bids prior to the time established for the opening of the bids.

No Bidder may withdraw his bid for forty-five (45) days after the scheduled time set for the opening thereof, or before award of the Contract, unless said award is delayed for a period exceeding forty-five (45) calendar days. 13. MODIFICATIONS

No oral, telephonic, or telegraphic modifications will be considered.


14. ACCEPTANCE OF BIDS

The Owner reserves the right to accept the bid which in its judgment is the most responsible and best bid or to reject any and all bids and alternatives and to waive or disregard irregularities or informalities in any bid as it may deem to be in the best interest of the School District. The Board of Education or its designees may consider as irregular any bid on which there is an alteration of, or departure from, the bid form. All proposals received after the specified time of closing shall be returned unopened.

Final determination of compliance with specifications will rest with the Owner. 15. TIME OF COMPLETION

It is to be understood that time is of the essence for this Contract and the contractor will be required to perform the work within the allowable time set forth in the Contract. In this connection, attention is directed to the provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, if any, relative to delays, extensions of time, and liquidated damages. The successful Bidder-contractor shall prepare and submit for the Owner's approval, within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, a Preliminary Construction Schedule or Schedules that will indicate the time of performance and completion of the various portions of the work and the dates on which the Owner may expect to be allowed to occupy portions of the building. A Detailed Construction Schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to the submission of the first request for payment. No partial payment on account of work performed shall be made until such Detailed Construction Schedule has been approved by the Owner.

The Owner and the Contractor shall agree mutually on any changes in either the schedule or the rate of performance of the work which might either favorably or adversely affect such schedule dates. Unless otherwise specifically agreed in writing, no additional compensation or fee shall be paid by the Owner for any completion of all or any portions of the work earlier than scheduled. 16. APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

Each Bidder shall familiarize himself with all state and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations which might in any manner affect the work to be done; the materials to be supplied; the taxes, permits and fees to be paid; or the labor to be employed in and about the work. Any claim of misunderstanding or ignorance on the part of any successful Bidder will not in any way excuse such Bidder from the necessity of full compliance with every such law, code, ordinance, or regulation. All state laws, codes and regulations and local ordinances, which are applicable, shall be complied with including but not limited to those specified in these documents. 17. EVIDENCE OF COMPETENCY

Bidders shall submit within three (3) days, if requested by the Owner such evidence of the Bidder's competency and practical knowledge to do the particular work covered by his proposal and of the Bidder's financial responsibility, resources, experience, organization and equipment to complete the proposed work. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in the rejection of


consideration of such bid. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the evidence or information submitted by such Bidder does not demonstrate fully that the Bidder is qualified to properly carry out the terms of the contract.

In determining the Bidder's qualifications, the following factors, among others, will be considered: work previously completed by the Bidder; the qualifications of the proposed subcontractors for their work; Bidder references; and whether the Bidder (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously; (c) has the financial resources to meet all obligations incident to the work; (d) has appropriate technical experience; and (e) has adequate, competent, experienced staff and supervisors who will be committed to the work until completion.

Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former work and that no just claims have been prosecuted or are pending against such work. No bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged on any work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this work or other work in progress. 18. INSURANCE

Throughout the life of the contract, the Contractor will be required to carry the types and amounts of insurance named in the General Conditions. 19. CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE

Any successful Bidder may be required by the Owner to obtain the necessary and applicable Contractor's License from all appropriate governmental authorities and if required, shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar provisions required of the subcontractor have been obtained and approved. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


M&A INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 00 30 00 - 1

SECTION 00 30 00 –AVAILABLE INFORMATION

1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Each Bidder shall be fully familiar with the following documents, which have been prepared for the

Owner by the Architect and his separate consultants, and are available for review at the Architect’s

office. Bidders should become familiar with the potential constraints and special coordination

necessary to avoid disturbing asbestos containing materials. Even though abatement is not part of the

scope of work, work in existing building can pose significant issues of coordination, scheduling,

containment, construction utilities, and restrictions on the building use. The AHERA Management

Plan is available to anyone for review during regular working hours. Copies of the Plan are available

for review in the Jefferson County School District No. 1’s Environmental Services Department.

A. Construction Documents prepared by: Mellin & Associates Architects, P.C.

5570 East Yale Ave.

Denver, Colorado 80222

Dated: January 23, 2015

B. In preparing his bid, each Bidder shall consider and evaluate the data contained in the above

documents.


M&A BID PROPOSAL FORM


SECTION 00 41 00 - BID FORMS JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1

TO: Board of Education Jefferson County School District No. R-1 c/o Facilities Planning and Design 809 Quail Street, Building #4 Lakewood, CO 80215

FROM:______________________________________________________________________________

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: The undersigned Bidder acknowledges examination of the following:

A. Contract Documents Drawings dated: April 19, 2016 Project Manual dated: April 19, 2016 Schedule restrictions outlined in Supplementary General Conditions

B. Project Site/Existing Conditions C. Receipt of Addenda Numbers:________,________,_______,

AGREEMENTS: The undersigned Bidder agrees to the following:

A. To hold bid open for 45 calendar days from date of Bid Opening. B. To accept provisions of the Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of the Bid Security C. To enter into and execute the Construction Agreement within ten (10) calendar days of

award, if awarded on the basis of this bid, including identified Bonds and Insurance. D. To accomplish the work in compliance with the Contract Documents. E. To pay the Jefferson County School District, No. R-1 liquidated damages according to the

terms, amount(s) and date(s) defined in the Supplementary Conditions. F. The Jefferson County School District No.R-1 reserves the right to reject any or all bids and

to waive informalities. G. The Jefferson County School District No.R-1 reserves the right to award separate or single

contracts. H. The Jefferson County School District No. R-1 reserves the right to award the contract on the

basis of either cost or schedule.



BASE BID: For all work as described in the Construction Documents dated: April 19, 2016 for the Project: TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES . LUMP SUM OF_________________________________________________________________________Dollars. ($_______________________________)

ADD ALTERNATES:

For all work as described in the Construction Documents, Spec Section 01 23 00, 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERATES, Add Alternate #01: None at this time LUMP SUM OF_________________________________________________________________________Dollars. ($_______________________________)

SCHEDULE:

a. The undersigned Bidder agrees to complete all project work: including Alternates by August 01, 2016. (month, day, year).

b. The Jefferson County School District, No. R-1 has identified the Stipulated Completion date(s) in the Supplementary Conditions. The bidder agrees to make adjustments in the work and schedules necessary to achieve completion no later than the Stipulated Completion date(s) for the sum of:

ADD/DEDUCT ______________________________________________Dollars ($________________)

ATTACHMENTS:

A. Bid Security B. List of Subcontractors (required within 24 hours of bid opening)

Dated this __________day of _____________________, 2016

ATTEST:

The Bidder Address County of Incorporation State of Incorporation



Phone Email By Type/print name here Secretary Signature

SIGNATURES: If submitted by a corporation, the Bid Form should be signed by an officer (i.e., President or Vice President) and attested to by the secretary and properly sealed. If the bid is being submitted by an individual or a partnership, the Bid Form shall so indicate and be properly signed. (Date)


M&A BID SECURITY FORM (Bid Bond)


SECTION 00 43 13 –BID SECURITY FORM (Bid Bond)

Refer to the following “Bid Security Form (Bid Bond),” from Jefferson County School District No. R-1,

per the current edition.


JCSD R-1Revised 9-94 1 of 1

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that of , as Principal, and , a Corporation dulyorganized under the laws of the State of , and authorized to transact business inthe State of Colorado, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOLDISTRICT NO. R-1, Lakewood, Colorado, as Obligee, in the full and just sum of ten percent (10%) ofthe Principal's total bid price, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well andtruly to be made, the Principal and the Surety bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal for the construction of , and

WHEREAS, the Obligee has required that said proposal be accompanied by a Proposal Guaranteein an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the Principal's total bid price in fulfillment of whichrequirement this Bid Bond is made, executed, and delivered.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaidPrincipal shall be awarded the Contract, the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into aformal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditionsof the contract and the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, thenthis obligation shall be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the differencein money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligeelegally contracts with another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former; inno event shall the Surety's liability exceed the penal sum hereof. The Surety, for value received, herebystipulates and agrees that the obligation of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired oraffected by any extension of the time within which the Obligee may accept such bid, and said Surety doeshereby waive notice of any such extension.

Signed, sealed, and delivered .(Date)

(SEAL)

Witness to the Principal

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

This Bond must be accompanied by a current Power of Attorney

THIS BOND will be acceptable only if issued by an insurer rated not less than A- in Best's InsuranceGuide, or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least Class X.

M&A PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM


SECTION 00 43 36 –PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM

Refer to the following “Request for Approval of Subcontractors/Vendors Form” from Jefferson County

School District, R-1.


TO: BOARD OF EDUCATION

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT No. R-1

FROM:

PROJECT DISCRIPTION:

Date

Date

Date

$0.00

Name:Address:

Contact:Phone: Fax:E-Mail

Name:Address:

Contact:Phone: Fax:

Name:Address:


Name:Address:


Name:Address:


In accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, approval is requested for use of the following

subcontractors / vendors for work performed or equipment / materials supplied under this contract:

IDENTIFY TYPE OF WORK - EQUIPMENT - MATERIAL CONTRACT

AMOUNT

Department of Facilities Planning & Design and Construction Management

NAME AND ADRESSSpec. Section No. Description

APPROVAL

SUBMITTED BY:

RECOMMENDED BY:

809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215

VERIFIED BY:

Signature of Contractor

Signature of Architect / Consultant / Engineer


REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS / VENDORS

DATE:

LOCATION:

PROJECT I D #:

Signature of P M Jefferson County Schools

Subcontractors / Vendors Total Value:

REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS 200604_1 1 OF 2

IDENTIFY TYPE OF WORK - EQUIPMENT - MATERIAL CONTRACT

AMOUNTNAME AND ADRESS

Spec. Section No. Description

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:Address:


Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:

E-Mail

Name:

Address:

Contact:

Phone: Fax:E-Mail

REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS 200604_1 2 OF 2

M&A AGREEMENT FORM-Stipulated Sum FORM


SECTION 00 52 13–AGREEMENT FORM-Stipulated Sum

Refer to the following “Construction Agreement Form” from Jefferson County School District,

R-1.


[Project Name, Project ID] Page 1 of 5 Rev 201310

CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [DAY] day of [MONTH] [YEAR] by and

between the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1, State of Colorado,

(hereinafter designated as the "Owner"), and

[Contractor]

[Address]

[Address]

(incorporated in the State of [STATE]), of the County of [COUNTY] , State of [STATE],

(hereinafter designated as the "Contractor"), in connection with the construction of:

[SCHOOL]

[Address

[Address]

[PROJECT DESCRIPTION ]

Complete with all work appurtenant thereto.

In consideration of the compensation to be paid to the Contractor and of the mutual

agreements herein contained, the parties agree as follows:

1.0 SCOPE OF THE WORK

The Contractor will furnish all tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, superintendence,

insurance, transportation and other construction accessories, services and facilities specified or

required to be incorporated in and form a permanent part of the completed work. In addition, the

contractor shall provide and perform all necessary labor in a first class and workmanlike manner and

in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Bid Proposal and the requirements,

stipulations, provisions and conditions of the Contract Documents as defined in the attached General

Conditions, said documents forming the contract and being as fully a part thereof as if repeated

verbatim herein; perform, execute, construct and complete all things mentioned to be done by the

Contractor and all work included in and covered by the Owner's official award of this contract to the

Contractor, such award being based on the acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's bid, or part

thereof.

2.0 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The contract Documents shall consist of this written Agreement, which Agreement shall

incorporate by this reference all of the instruments set out in Article 1 of the General Conditions as

fully as if they were set out in this Agreement in full, all of which documents and instruments are

incorporated by the signature of the parties hereto.


3.0 TIME OF COMPLETION

The contractor agrees to commence work under this Agreement no later than _[DAY MONTH

YEAR] and to fully complete all work by no later than [DAY MONTH YEAR].

4.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

The contractor understands and agrees that the completion of the entire project within the

time provided is an essential feature of this Agreement and that the Owner will sustain substantial

damages, the amount of which is not possible to accurately determine at this time, if the work is not

so completed. The Contractor, therefore, agrees to proceed with due diligence, taking all precautions

and making all necessary arrangements to insure the completion of the work within the prescribed

time. The Contractor further agrees that his failure to finally and fully complete the work within the

time allowed shall be considered as a breach of the Agreement and entitle the Owner to collect

liquidated damages for the delay in completion in accordance with the General Conditions of the

Contract in the sum of $[AMOUNT] per calendar day.

5.0 CONTRACT SUM

The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for performance of the work encompassed by this

Agreement, and the Contractor will accept as full compensation for Base Bid and (Alternates) for the

lump sum of:

[DOLLAR AND CENTS AMOUNT IN WORDS]__$[NUMERIC DOLLAR AMOUNT]

subject to adjustment as provided by the Contract Documents, to be paid by progress payments in

cash or its equivalent in the manner provided for in the Contract Documents. The amount of money

appropriated by the Owner for the Project is equal to or in excess of the contract sum.

6.0 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the

Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner shall make such inspection, and when the work is found to

be acceptable under the Agreement and the Agreement fully performed, including the satisfactory

completion of all punch list items, the Architect shall promptly so certify to the Owner, over his own

signature, stating that the work provided for in this Agreement has been completed in accordance

with the Contract Documents and is accepted by him under the terms and conditions therefore, and

that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said final certificate, is due and

payable. Before issuance of the Owner's Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit evidence

satisfactory to the Owner that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the

work has been or will promptly be paid.

7.0 ALTERATIONS

The following alterations were made in this Agreement before it was signed by the parties:

N/A


8.0 REPRESENTATIONS

The Contractor shall not extend the credit or faith of the Owner to any other persons or

organizations.

9.0 ASSIGNMENT

The Contractor shall not assign any of his rights or obligations under this Agreement without

the express written consent of the Owner. Upon any assignment even though consented to by the

Owner, the Contractor shall remain liable for the performance of the work under this Agreement.

10.0 PARTIAL INVALIDITY

If any provisions of this Agreement are in violation of any statute or rule of law of the State

of Colorado, then such provisions shall be deemed null and void to the extent that they may be

violative of law, but without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof.

11.0 WAIVER

No waiver of any breach of any one of the agreements, terms conditions or covenants of this

Agreement by the Owner shall be deemed or imply or constitute a waiver of any other agreement,

term, condition or covenant of this Agreement. The failure of the Owner to insist on strict

performance of any agreement, term, condition or covenant, herein set forth, shall not constitute or

be construed as a waiver of the Owner's rights thereafter to enforce any other default; neither shall

such failure to insist upon strict performance be deemed sufficient grounds to enable the Contractor

to forego or subvert or otherwise disregard any other agreement, term, condition or covenant of this

Agreement.

12.0 ENTIRE AGREEMENT

The within Agreement, together with the Contract Documents as defined in Article 2.00

herein, constitute the entire agreement of the parties hereto. No modification, change, or alteration

of the within Agreement shall be of any legal force or effect unless in writing, signed by all the

parties hereto.

13.0 COUNTERPARTS

This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts and each such counterpart shall be

deemed an original.

14.0 GOVERNING LAW

Venue for any and all legal actions regarding or arising out of the transaction covered herein

shall be solely in the District Court in and for Jefferson County, State of Colorado. This transaction

shall be governed by the laws of the state of Colorado.


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK


15.0 ATTORNEYS' FEES

In the event it becomes necessary for either party to enforce any provisions or breach of this

Agreement by commencing litigation, the prevailing party in such action shall be entitled to collect,

as part of any judgment entered, its reasonable expert witness and attorneys' fees and costs.

16.0 NOTICES

Any notices required or permitted under this Agreement or which any party elects to give

shall be in writing and delivered either personally to the other party's authorized agent set forth

below (or as changed by written notice), or by depositing such notice in the United States first class

mail, postage fully prepaid, to the person at the address set forth below, or to such address as either

party may later designate in writing. Any notice given by mail herein provided shall be deemed

given when deposited in the United States Mail:

OWNER: CONTRACTOR:

Timothy J. Reed, Executive Director Name and Address

Facilities & Construction Management

Jefferson County School District, R-1

809 Quail Street, Bldg. 4

Lakewood, Colorado 80215

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the day and year first

above written, and shall extend to and bind the parties, their successors, assigns and personal

representatives

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT

NO. R-1, STATE OF COLORADO

ATTEST:

_________________________________ By: _________________________________

Timothy J. Reed, Executive Director

Facilities & Construction Management

[Contractor]

ATTEST:

_________________________________ By: _________________________________

_________________________________

Print Name and Title

[Address]

[Address]

(SEAL)

M&A NOTICE TO PROCEED & NOTICE TO PROCEED CHECKLIST


SECTION 00 55 00–VARIOUS FORMS INCLUDING:

NOTICE TO PROCEED CHECKLIST,

STANDARD INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FORM,

SCHEDULES OF VALUES,

ASBESTOS SIGN-OFF,

JOB SITE INFORMATION SHEET,

CRIMINAL RECORDS CHECK CERTIFICATION,

CONTRACTOR ILLICIT DISCHARGE REPORTING FORM,

Refer to following “Notice to Proceed Checklist” for required items.

Notification letter is issued by Jefferson County School district R-1, upon receipt of documentation

requested in Notice of Award.


LOCATION:

PROJECT I D #:

Document Checklist Required for Notice to Proceed Transmitted

1. Construction Agreement Executed

2 . Performance Bond (District Form) ( 1 required)

3 . Labor and Material Bond (District Form) ( 1 required)

4 . Insurance Certificates; Workers Comp., Liability, Auto

(District to be listed as "Additional Insured" or listed as "Certificate Holder")

5 . Preliminary Construction Schedule

6 . Request for Approval of Subcontractors / Vendors (District Form)

( 1 required) ( Remember to Sign)

7 . Schedule of Values For Contractor Payments Detailed Estimate

AIA G703 ( 1 required) (Remember to sign)

8 . Asbestos Sign Off Sheet ( District Form) (Remember to Sign)

9 . Job Site Information Sheet (District Form)

10. Criminal Records Check Certification (District Form)

11. Contractor Illicit Discharge Reporting Form (District Form)

District Project Manager Sign-Off:

Date All Documents Received:

Signature

JEFFERSON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215 / (303) 982-2584

DEPARTMENT OF CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

NOTICE TO PROCEED CHECKLIST

NOTICE TO PROCEED DOCUMENT CHECKLIST 200703221 1

No. Standard Insurance Requirements for Goods and Services (1) Colorado Workers' Compensation insurance - Statutory (coverage A) (2) Employer's liability insurance - $1,000,000 (coverage B) (3) Commercial automobile liability insurance covering claims for injuries to

members of the public and/or damages to property of others arising from the use of motor vehicles, with a $2,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage liability. Coverage should apply to any auto.

(4) Commercial liability insurance covering claims for injuries to members of the public or damage to property of others (including Products and Completed Operations) arising out of any negligent act or omission of the Contractor or any of its employees, agents, or subcontractors. The policy shall be an occurrence form, with the following limits: $2,000,000 Each Occurrence, premises and operations $2,000,000 Products and completed operations $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising injury $2,000,000 General Aggregate (aggregate limits must be maintained by contract-the District to be advised of erosion of limits) $2,000,000 liability assumed under insured contract, including defense costs. $50,000 fire damage, any one fire. $5,000 medical payments (any one person)

(5) The District must be named as an Additional Insured on the automobile and general liability coverage's. For construction contracts, also request that the Commercial General Liability "Additional Insured" provision extend to completed operations.

(6) Professional liability insurance - (architects and engineers) with limits of $2,000,000/$2,000,000 aggregate. Since aggregates are standard on these policies, the higher limit is recommended. " Claims made" policies should be required to be ongoing by contract or contain an extended reporting provision of at least (2) years.

(7) The policies must contain a waiver of subrogation on behalf of the District. (8) All certificates must state that the carrier will provide the District with a

minimum of (30) day's notice of cancellation or non-renewal of the policies. (9) Nothing in contract or insurance requirement waive or intend to waive the

monetary limitations or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided by the Colorado governmental Immunity Act, 24-10-101 et seq., as from time to time amended, or otherwise available to the District or its officers, employees, agents and volunteers.

(10) All insurance carriers must have an AM Best rating of A-VIII or better. (11) Depending on the potential for direct/indirect loss, projects with a dollar value

less than $250,000, $1million limits of liability may be acceptable. Non-Standard Risks That Require Special Handling Requirements for non-standard risk projects will be evaluated by Risk

Management and Director of CM. It is not the size of the project, but the potential for direct and indirect loss. Examples: Waste management and other pollution related exposures Asbestos abatement Boiler maintenance Elevator maintenance Projects outside Colorado Design professionals (i.e. Software developers) Bus charters *Contact Risk Management *For large projects obtain the policies.

Approved 1/03/2005

PAY PERIOD: TO DATE: 1/24/2015

B C D E G H I J

TOTAL THIS PAYMENT $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 #DIV/0! $0.00

PROJECT I D:

APPLICATION NO:

Jefferson County School District No. R-1Department of Facility Planning & Design and Construction Management

ESTIMATE FOR PARTIAL PAYMENT

CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTORS JOB No.

TOTAL

PREVIOUS

PAYMENTS

A F K

CONTRACTOR

IDDESCRIPTION

SCHEDULED

AMOUNTACTIVITY ID

ACTIVITY

TYPE

TOTAL

COMPLETED &

STORED TO

DATE

(E+H)

% COMPL.BALANCE TO

COMPLETETOTAL THIS

PAYMENT (F+G)

CURRENT PAYMENT

CURRENT

COMPLETED

CURRENT

STORED

SCHEDULE OF VALUES COVER SHEET 200604_1.xls 1 of 1

Address:

Prime Contractor / Vendor:

Signature:

Date:

Location:

Project I D:

Project Description:

(Prime Contractor / Vendor)

(Address)

ASBESTOS SIGN OFF SHEET

JEFFERSON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS

Any incident involving the disturbance of asbestos containing materials and any

questions will be reported to the Environmental Services Department at (303) 982-2350.

809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215 / (303) 982-2584

Department of Construction Management

I am aware that it is my responsibility to inform my employees and any and all

subcontractors and their employees of the presence of asbestos and the availability of

the Management Plan.

I have been informed that asbestos containing materials have been identified as

present in this facility and the AHERA Management Plan for this school has been made

available to me.

Project Manager:(Prime Contractor / Vendor)

ASBESTOS_SIGN OFF SHEET 200604_1

LOCATION: PROJ. DESCRIPTION:

DATE:

SCHOOL PRINCIPAL: PHONE No.:

E-MAIL:

BUILDING ENGINEER: PHONE No.:

JEFFCO CONST. MANAGER: WORK PHONE:

PAGER:

EMERGENCY No.:

E-MAIL:

JEFFCO DESIGN COORDINATOR: WORK PHONE:

EMERGENCY No.:

PRIME CONTRACTOR: PHONE No.:

JOB SITE:

FAX:

E-MAIL:

PROJ. MANAGER: PHONE No.:

Cell No:

FAX:

EMERGENCY No.:

SUPERINTENDENT: PHONE No.:

Cell No:

FAX:

EMERGENCY No.:

ARCHITECT:

PHONE No.:

PROJ. ARCH.: FAX:

EMERGENCY No.:

E-MAIL:

PROJECT START DATE:

PROJECT COMPLETION DATE:

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT No. R-1809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215


JOB SITE INFORMATION SHEET

Job Site Information Sheet 200604_14/2006

Criminal Records Check Certification 2014

Criminal Records Check Certification

I, , certify that:

Name of Contractor

1. I have carefully read and understand the General Conditions of the Contract, Article

10.4, regarding the Criminal Records Check required by Jefferson County School

District, R-1.

2. Due to the nature of the work I will be performing for the District, my employees

May have contact with the students in the District.

3. None of the employees who will be performing the work have been convicted of a

violent or serious felony as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract,

Articles 10.4 and 61.2. This determination was made by a background check

through the Department of Justice or the Colorado Bureau of Investigation.

(https://www.cbirecordscheck.com)

I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.

Executed at , Colorado, on

Date

Signature

Typed or Printed Name

Title

Address

https://www.cbirecordscheck.com/

Revised 1/24/2015 (RegFiles/CWA/Stormwater/Illicit Discharges) Jeffco Schools Environmental Services

1

Stormwater Management Program Contractor Illicit Discharge Reporting Form

Illicit discharges to storm systems must be reported by calling Jeffco Public Schools Environmental Services as soon as possible upon discovery (the same day). This form must be completed and submitted within 48 hours of discovery of an illicit discharge. Use the information in this form to collect the appropriate information for reporting discharges by phone. Illicit discharges are any release of water or other materials to a stormwater sewer or other stormwater conveyance system, including releases to bodies of surface water, canals, irrigation ditches, etc.. For the purposes of Jeffco release reporting, also report measurable deposition or transport of muddy water or soils from the project site activities onto roadways or areas beyond the project site boundaries. Document and immediately rectify causes of any incidences of soil tracking from the project site, but it is not necessary to call-in reports for minor tracking, if rectified. Contain and/or appropriately divert (via approved method of disposal/deposition) all operational wastewater generated (Example: When using water hoses or power washers, prevent release of waste water to stormwater systems).

Report DANGEROUS conditions IMMEDIATELY.

REPORT ILLICIT DISCHARGES BY PHONE:

♦ During Work Hours call Environmental Services @ (303) 982-2349 or contact the Project Manager @ (303)982-2584.

♦ After Hours, or if you can not reach Environmental Services call Security at (303) 232-8688.

♦ Fire Department – 911 (for discharges of flammable materials into sewers or streams). Also notify Environmental Services.

Provide completed form by email to [email protected] or hard copy to Jeffco Environmental Services, 809 Quail St., Building 4, Lakewood, Colorado 80215.

School or complex name: Location municipality/city Name of person reporting the discharge:

Print Name Signature

Telephone/cell ____________________________________________________

Contractor Information

a. Firm Name b. Address c. Representative d. Telephone:


2

Name of Jeffco Project Manager (or building Facility Manager): Please provide as much of the following information as possible. 1) Date & time illicit discharge occurred and/or was discovered: 3) Location of inlet(s) where discharge occurred. 4) Type of illicit discharge entering inlet: 5) Estimated amount of materials discharged: 6) How long has discharge been occurring? 7) Possible source of illicit discharge: 8) Actions taken to stop/limit illicit discharge: 9) Location of nearest outfall/outlet and receiving body of water if known: 10) Did discharged materials reach an outfall? __________ Estimate how much:


3

11) Did discharged materials leave Jeffco Schools property? 12) What is the status of the discharge now and what pollutant containment efforts were

implemented?

13) Date and time of call to report discharge: 14) Department and/person to whom illicit discharge was reported: 15) Were other agencies contacted (municipality, state, fire department)? If so, provide date and time of call and the name and contact number of agency: Additional information (optional):


4

For questions regarding wastewater management and hazardous materials disposal contact the director of Jeffco Environmental Services (303) 982-2350. Thank you!

M&A PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORMS


SECTION 00 61 13 –PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORMS

Refer to following Jefferson County School District R-1forms.


JCSD-R-1 1Revised 9-94


PERFORMANCE BONDBond No.

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that , as Principal (the"Principal"), and , a corporation organized and existingunder the laws of the State of , and authorized to transact business in the State ofColorado, as Surety (the "Surety"), jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, personalrepresentatives, successors, and assigns to the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1,1829 Denver West Drive, Building 27, Golden, Colorado 80401, as Obligee (the "Owner"), in the principalamount of ($ ) as adjusted by approved changeorders (not to exceed 10 percent of the principal amount of this Bond unless expressly approved by theSurety, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld) and interest as provided by law (collectivelyreferred to herein as the "Penal Sum"), for the performance of the Construction Agreement between thePrincipal and the Owner, dated , 20 , for the following (Project): together with the obligations of the Contract Documents, as defined in the Construction Agreement, all ofwhich documents are collectively referred to herein as the "Contract" and are incorporated by this reference.

The condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall at all times duly, promptly, andproperly perform all the terms and conditions of the Contract and any authorized modifications thereofduring the original term of the Contract, any extensions thereof that may be granted by the Owner, andduring the term of any guarantee or warranty required under the Contract, the Principal and Surety shallhave no obligation under this Bond, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.

The Surety for value received agrees that no extension of time, change in, addition to, or otheralteration or modification of the terms of the Contract or work to be performed thereunder, or any otherforbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other shall in any way release or affectthe Surety's liability or obligation on this Bond, and the Surety hereby waives notice of any such extensionof time, change, addition, modification, alteration, or forbearance.

Whenever the Owner terminates the Contract in accordance with the terms thereof, the Surety shall,within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notice of such termination, notify the Owner in writing of itselection to complete the Contract in accordance with its terms, or notify the Owner that the Surety electsnot to complete the Contract. If the Surety fails to give the written notice so required within such fifteen(15) calendar day period, then it will be deemed to have elected not to complete the Contract. Should theSurety elect to complete the Contract, then it shall, within fifteen (15) additional calendar days followingwritten notice of such election, obtain a contractor, subject to approval by the Owner in writing, tocomplete the original Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions and thereafter proceed with thework with due diligence and make available as the work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost ofcompletion less the balance of the Contract price.


The Surety may not engage the Principal to complete the Contract, without the prior written consentof the Owner, which consent may be withheld in the Owner's sole discretion. If the Surety elects tocomplete the Contract, then it shall be entitled to receive the balance of the Contract price, less (i) anyamounts paid by the Owner to the Principal; (ii) costs incurred by the Owner in correcting any defectivework; (iii) any additional legal, design professional, and other costs incurred by the Owner resulting fromthe Principal's default; and (iv) liquidated damages caused by delayed performance or nonperformance ofthe Principal. Any progress payments, less retainage, due but not paid at the date of termination shall bepaid to the Surety so long as the Surety has agreed to indemnify the Owner for the amount thereof and noother claims have been made to such funds by subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the Contractor applicable law.

In the event the Surety elects not to complete the Contract, the Owner may then have the workcompleted by such means and in such manner, by contract with or without public bidding, or otherwise, asit may deem advisable. The Surety in such event shall at all times make available, as work progresses underthe Contract between the Owner and its new contractor, sufficient funds, not to exceed the Penal Sum, topay the cost of the completion of the Contract pursuant to its terms, together with the other amounts setforth in (i) through (iv) above, but in no event shall the Surety be responsible for the payment of any sumsto the Owner until the Owner has paid in full its total obligation under the terms of the original Contract, pluschange orders, less deductions and claims chargeable by law or by the Contract, if any, and less theretainage which will be disbursed as provided by the Contract Documents and applicable law.

The procedures set forth herein shall apply should there be a default and termination or a successionof defaults and terminations in fulfilling the terms and conditions of the work under the original Contract.

In the event there are negotiations between the Principal and/or the Surety and the Ownersubsequent to the date of termination, each party shall appoint an authorized representative with authorityto represent it during the negotiations. All written communications and official discussions between theparties shall be conducted by these authorized representatives. Any notice which any party desires or isrequired to provide another shall be in writing and shall be effective upon receipt when delivered ortransmitted by personal delivery, certified (return receipt) mail, or express mail service to the addresses setforth herein.

Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competentjurisdiction in the location in which the work is located and shall be instituted before the expiration of three(3) years from the date on which final payment under the contract is made; provided, however, that thisperiod may be extended by one (1) additional year by the Owner's giving written notice to the Surety withinthe three (3) year period of a potential claim. Any judgment recovered hereunder by the Owner shallinclude interest at the legal rate, together with reasonable attorneys' fees and costs.


No right action shall accrue under this Bond to or for the use of any person or entity other than theOwner or its successors and assigns.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have signed this Performance Bond as of the day of , 20 .

ATTEST:By: (Principal)

(SEAL) Address: ATTEST:

By: (Surety)

(SEAL) Address: Claims Telephone No.:

Claims Telecopier No.:

Best's Rating: Best's Financial Rating: Date:

This Bond will be acceptable only if issued by an insurer rated no less than A-, Best'sInsurance Guide, or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least class X. The fully executed bond form mustbe accompanied by a current Power of Attorney.

END OF PERFORMANCE BOND

1 of 2Revised 9-94


LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

Bond No.

(This Bond is issued simultaneously with a Performance Bond in favor of the Owner conditioned on the full andtimely performance of the Contract.)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that , as Principal (the"Principal"), and , a corporation organized and existing underthe laws of the State of , and authorized to transact business in the Stateof Colorado, as Surety (the "Surety"), jointly and severally bind themselves, their heirs, personalrepresentatives, successors, and assigns, to the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1,1829 Denver West Drive, Building 27, Golden, Colorado 80401, as Obligee (the "Owner"), for the use andbenefit of it and the claimants as defined below, in the principal amount of ($ ) as adjusted by approved change orders (not to exceed 10percent of the principal amount of this Bond unless expressly approved by the Surety, which approval shall notbe unreasonably withheld) and interest as provided by law, for the payment of all amounts which become dueunder the Contract described below.

The Principal and the Owner have entered into a written Construction Agreement dated , 20 , together with related "Contract Documents" as defined therein (all of whichare collectively referred to as the "Contract" and incorporated herein by this reference), for the followingProject:

The condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall at all times promptly make paymentof all amounts, claims, or demands lawfully due to all persons, firms, associations, or corporations supplyingor furnishing to the Principal or its subcontractors labor or materials, supplies, or equipment which are used,provided, or performed in the prosecution of the work provided for in the Contract and any and all dulyauthorized modifications of the Contract that may hereafter be made, then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise, the Surety shall pay the full value of all such claims or demands and shall indemnify and hold theOwner harmless from all payments which the Owner may be required to make under the Contract orapplicable law in excess of the Contract price not exceeding the amount of this obligation, together with interestas provided by law, as well as attorneys' fees and costs incurred by the Owner in the resolution of any claim. All such subcontractors, laborers, and materialmen shall have rights under the within Bond as are set forth inthe statutes and laws of the State of Colorado.

Further, each and every claimant, who institutes a lawsuit for compensation or payment under the termspayment under the terms hereof, as part of any court award, shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys' fees andcosts.

2 of 2Revised 9-94

The undersigned Surety for value received hereby agrees that no extension of time, change in, additionto, or other modification of the terms of the Contract or work to be performed thereunder, or of thespecifications, or of the Contract Documents, shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond and the Suretyhereby waives notice of any such extension of time, change, addition, or modification.

Any notice which any party desires or is required to provide another shall be in writing and shall beeffective upon receipt when delivered or transmitted by personal delivery, certified (return receipt) mail, orexpress mail service to the addresses set forth herein.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Principal and Surety have executed this Bond, this day of , 20 .

ATTEST: By:

(Principal)

(SEAL) Address:

ATTEST:By: (Surety)

(SEAL) Address:Claims Telephone No.:Claims Telecopier No.:

Best's Rating: Best's Financial Rating: Date:

This Bond will be acceptable only if issued by an insurer rated no less than A-, Best's Insurance Guide,or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least class X. The fully executed Bond form must be accompanied bya current Power of Attorney.

END OF LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

M&A GENERAL CONDITIONS


SECTION 00 72 00 –GENERAL CONDITIONS

The following “General Conditions of the Contract,” from Jefferson County School District No. R-1, are

per the current edition.


JCSD General Conditions of the Agreement

Revised January 2011


LAKEWOOD, COLORADO

__________________________________________________________________________

G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S O F T H E C O N T R A C T

___________________________________________________________________________

ALPHABETICAL INDEX TO THE ARTICLES PAGE #

ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT .................................................................................. 34

ACCESS TO WORK .................................................................................................................... 11

APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS ............................................................................................ 29

ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND INSPECTIONS ......................................................................... 26

ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................................................................. 32

BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS, STAKES, AND MEASUREMENTS .................................. 10

BLASTING ................................................................................................................................... 31

CASH ALLOWANCES ............................................................................................................... 27

CHANGED CONDITIONS .......................................................................................................... 16

CHANGES IN THE WORK......................................................................................................... 13

CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST OR ADDITIONAL TIME AND WAIVER OF

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 14

CLEANING UP ............................................................................................................................ 28

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS ................................................ 21

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................... 1

CONTRACTORS' MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................... 32

CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT GUARANTEE AFTER COMPLETION ..................................... 35

CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION ............................................. 12

CORRECTION OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 16

CUTTING, PATCHING, AND EXCAVATING ......................................................................... 28

DAMAGE TO UTILITIES ........................................................................................................... 30

DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 1

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 4

EMPLOYEES ................................................................................................................................. 7

END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 40

EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT, AND INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 2

EXPEDITING MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 37

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ...................................................................................................... 16

HISTORICAL DATA ................................................................................................................... 31

INDEMNIFICATION ................................................................................................................... 33

INSURANCE ................................................................................................................................ 22

ITEMS COVERED BY CONTRACT PRICE ............................................................................... 2

LABOR DISPUTES ..................................................................................................................... 38

LABOR, WORKMANSHIP, AND SCHOOL SECURITY ......................................................... 38

LIENS ........................................................................................................................................... 33

LIMITATION OF ACTIONS AND VENUE ............................................................................... 36


Revised January 2011

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION ................................................... 34

MATERIALS, LABOR, FACILITIES, AND STORAGE ............................................................. 6

MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES, ETC. ......................................................................... 37

OCCUPANCY .............................................................................................................................. 30

ORAL STATEMENTS ................................................................................................................... 2

OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT WORK ............................................................................ 18

OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT ................................................................... 18

PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................... 19

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS ............................................................................ 24

PREFERENCE FOR COLORADO LABOR, MATERIALS, AND RESIDENT BIDDERS ..... 37

PROJECT SIGN ........................................................................................................................... 31

PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ........................................................................... 10

REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................................... 2

RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR ................................................. 25

ROYALTIES AND PATENTS ...................................................................................................... 9

SALES AND USE TAX ............................................................................................................... 29

SEPARATE CONTRACTS ......................................................................................................... 32

SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES ........................................................................................... 5

SOIL TEST REPORT ................................................................................................................... 36

STATUTES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS ............................................................... 29

SUBCONTRACTS ....................................................................................................................... 25

SURVEYS, PERMITS, LAWS, REGULATIONS, AND TAXES ................................................ 9

TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE ............................................................................................ 31

TESTING OF BUILDING SYSTEMS ......................................................................................... 31

USE OF PREMISES ..................................................................................................................... 28

WARRANTIES ON PORTIONS OF THE WORK ..................................................................... 35

WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING .............................................................................................. 33


Revised January 2011 1

GC 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1 The work shall be accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents which

shall be included in this Contract and shall consist of the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to

Bidders, Bid Security, Proposal, Notice of Contract Award, Insurance Policies and

Certificates, Notice to Proceed, Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond,

Construction Agreement, the General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary General

Conditions, drawings and specifications, tests and engineering data, approved change orders,

Contractor's Requests for Payment, Architect's Certificates, and all addenda issued by the

Owner or Architect prior to the awarding of the Contract.

GC 2. DEFINITIONS

Words, phrases, and other expressions used in these Contract Documents shall have meanings as

follows:

2.1 "Contract" or "Contract Documents" shall include the items enumerated above under

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

2.2 "Owner" shall mean the Jefferson County School District No.R-1, named and

designated as such in the Contract Documents acting through its duly authorized

representative.

2.3 "Contractor" shall mean the corporation, company, partnership, firm, entity, or

individual named and designated as such in the Contract Documents which has entered

directly into this Contract with the Owner for the performance of the work covered thereby,

and any persons or entities acting on its behalf.

2.4 "Subcontractor" shall mean and refer to a corporation, partnership, entity, or

individual having a direct contract with the Contractor or another subcontractor for

performing work and/or furnishing labor or material which is incorporated into the work at

the request of the Contractor or other subcontractor.

2.5 "Architect" shall mean the architects or engineers designated, appointed, or otherwise

employed or delegated by the Owner, or its duly authorized representatives, acting within the

scope of the particular duties entrusted to them in each case.

2.6 "Notice to Contractor" shall be deemed to have been duly served if made in writing

and delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the

corporation for whom it is intended, or if sent by registered or certified mail to the last

known business address.

2.7 "The work" shall mean the equipment, supplies, materials, labor, and services to be

furnished under the Contract and the carrying out of all obligations imposed or required by

the Contract Documents.

2.8 "The project" is the total construction designed by the Architect of which the work

performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.

2.9 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

2.10 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Colorado.

2.11 The date of completion of a project is the date when construction is certified by the

Architect to be finally completed in accordance with Contract Documents, as modified by

any change orders agreed to by the parties and when the Owner has fully accepted the project



for the use for which it was intended. Such date will be set forth on a Letter of Acceptance

issued by the Owner.

2.12 "Drawings" or "plans" shall mean all (a) drawings furnished by the Owner and/or

Architect as a basis for the award of Contract; (b) supplementary drawings furnished by the

Owner and/or Architect to clarify and to define in greater detail the intent of the Contract

drawings and specifications; (c) drawings furnished by the Owner to the Contractor during

the progress of the work; and (d) engineering data and drawings submitted by the Contractor

during the progress of the work, provided such drawings are acceptable to the Architect.

2.13 "Specifications" are the written technical information concerning materials,

components, systems, and equipment as indicated on the drawings or plans and which state

the quality, performance, characteristics, and installations to be achieved by application of

construction methods.

GC 3. ORAL STATEMENTS

3.1 It is understood and agreed that the written terms and provisions of the Contract

Documents shall supersede all oral statements of representatives of the Owner, and oral

statements shall not be effective or be construed as being a part of this Contract.

GC 4. REFERENCE STANDARDS

4.1 Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or association, or to

codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or

tentative standard adopted and published at the date of the Contract Documents unless

specifically stated otherwise.

GC 5. ITEMS COVERED BY CONTRACT PRICE

5.1 Unless otherwise specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall accept the

compensation stated in the Construction Agreement as full payment for furnishing all the

materials, transportation, apparatus, temporary structures, equipment, services, fuel, energy,

light, water, labor, and tools, all risks and losses of every kind or description connected with

the prosecution of the work, and all other things necessary for the complete and proper

execution of the work contemplated by or reasonably implied from the Contract Documents,

within the time limits indicated therein.

GC 6. EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT, AND

INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

6.1 Execution. The Contract Documents shall be signed in multiple copies as directed by

the Owner. Within ten (10) days of Notice of Contract Award, the Contractor shall submit to

the Owner a minimum of three (3) fully executed original sets of the Construction

Agreement; Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond with original Power

of Attorney; and certificates of required insurance coverage. The date of the Contract for

purposes of these documents shall be the date of the Notice of Contract Award letter. The



Owner will execute the Construction Agreement, assemble all copies, and distribute the

Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not commence the work until it receives the

Notice to Proceed.

6.2 Correlation. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that it has visited

the site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed,

and correlated its observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

6.3 Intent. The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labor and materials,

tools, equipment, construction equipment, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other

facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work.

Materials or work described in words which as applied have a well-known technical or trade

meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.

6.3.1 The organization of the specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, as the case

may be, and the arrangement of drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the

work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any

trade.

6.3.2 It is intended that even though work is not covered under any heading, division,

section, article, branch, class, or trade of the specifications, it shall nevertheless be

supplied if it is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable

therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results.

6.3.3 The specifications and drawings are intended to supplement but not necessarily

duplicate each other. Any work exhibited in the one and not in the other shall be

executed as if it had been set forth in both, so that the work will be constructed according

to the complete design as determined by the Architect.

6.4 Interpretation. Should anything necessary for a clear understanding of the work be

omitted from the specifications and drawings, or should the requirements appear to be in

conflict, the Contractor shall secure written interpretations or instructions from the Architect

before proceeding with the work affected thereby. It is understood and agreed that the work

shall be performed according to the true intent of the Contract Documents.

6.4.1 Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, and drawings,

the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. The precedence of the

Construction Documents is in the following sequence:

6.4.2 Addenda to the drawings and specifications take precedence over the original

Construction Documents.

6.4.3 In the drawings, the precedence shall be drawings of larger scale over those of

smaller scale and noted materials over graphic indications.

6.4.4 Any work mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings or shown

on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications shall be of like effect as if shown

or mentioned in both. The Contractor shall examine the specifications and drawings and

check all dimensions and notify the Architect and the Owner of any discrepancies

between the specifications and drawings and any deficiencies, omissions, or errors before

any work is commenced.

6.4.5 In the event of any conflict between the Contract Agreement including the General

Conditions and the Specifications, the Contract Agreement including General Conditions

shall control. In the event of any conflict between the General Conditions and the

Contract Agreement, the Agreement shall control.



GC 7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

7.1 Copies Furnished. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the

Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications

reasonably necessary for the execution of the work.

7.2 Ownership of Drawings. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished

by the Architect are the property of the Architect and the Owner, whether the work for which

they are made be executed or not, and are not to be used on other work except by written

agreement with the Architect and the Owner.

7.3 Drawings and Specifications Available on the Site. The Contractor shall maintain at

the site for the Owner and the Architect one copy of all drawings, specifications, addenda,

approved shop drawings, change orders, and other modifications, in good order and marked

to record all changes made during construction. The Contractor shall also keep on the site all

applicable standards, codes, manufacturer's or other specifications referenced in the Contract

Documents. The drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be

delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the work.

7.4 Figured Dimensions to Govern. Dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings

shall be accurately followed. No work shown on the drawings, the dimensions of which are

not indicated, shall be executed until necessary dimensions have been obtained from the

Architect.

7.5 Contractor to Check Drawings and Schedules. The Contractor shall check all

dimensions, elevations, and quantities shown on the drawings furnished to them by the

Architect, and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancy between the drawings and the

conditions on the ground, or any error or omission in drawings, or in the layout as given by

stakes, points, or instructions, which they may discover. Before ordering any material or

doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building and shall be

responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on

account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the

drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for

consideration before proceeding with the work. The Contractor will not be allowed to take

advantage of any error or omission in the drawings or Contract Documents. Full instructions

will be furnished by the Architect should such error or omission be discovered, and the

Contractor shall carry out such instructions as if originally specified.

7.6 Detail Drawings and Instructions. The Architect shall furnish with reasonable

promptness, additional instructions by means of drawings or otherwise, necessary for the

proper execution of the work. All such drawings and instructions shall be consistent with the

Contract Documents, true developments thereof, and reasonably inferable therefrom. The

work shall be executed in conformity therewith, and the Contractor shall do no work without

proper drawings and instructions.

7.7 Project Record Drawings. The Contractor shall maintain a Contract set of drawings

at the site with all changes or deviations from the original drawings neatly marked thereon in

a contrasting color. The Contractor shall also maintain a Contract set of specifications at the

site, noting therein by appropriate section, the names, models, and other distinguishing

characteristics of the products actually incorporated into the work. This set of drawings and

specifications shall be updated daily as the job progresses and shall be made available to the

Owner and Architect for inspection at all times. Upon completion of the work and before

final payment, this Project Record set of drawings and specifications shall be delivered to the



Architect. The accuracy of the Project Record Drawings shall be verified monthly as part of

the monthly payment application process.

GC 8. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

8.1 Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,

performance charts, brochures, manufacturer's literature, and other data which are prepared

by the Contractor or any subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor, and which

illustrate some portion of the work. The District encourages the submission of shop drawing,

product data and other submittals in electronic format.

8.2 Samples. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate

materials, finishes, equipment, or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the

work will be judged.

8.3 Subcontractor. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor to prepare, stamp

with his approval, and submit to the Contractor with reasonable promptness and in orderly

sequence so as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other subcontractor, all

shop drawings and samples on all shop fabricated items and on all matters, required by the

Contract Documents or subsequently by the Architect as covered by modifications. Shop

drawings and samples will properly identify specified items. At the time of submission, the

subcontractor shall inform the Contractor and the Architect in writing of any deviation in the

shop drawings or samples from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions

will be allowed only in accordance with the provisions of GC 37 hereinafter.

8.3.1 The Contractor shall also require each subcontractor to prepare and transmit

sufficient sets of prints of all shop drawings which are specially drawn for this project,

including detailed fabrication and erection drawings, setting drawings, diagrammatic

drawings, material schedules, and samples to the Contractor to meet the project

construction schedule and the subcontractors' Contract schedule, or shall present, in

writing, valid reasons for any delay.

8.3.2 All shop drawings for all equipment in a given system shall be submitted at one time,

each complete set in a separate brochure. Complete maintenance/warranty data are to be

submitted to the Contractor and Architect for review and for submission to the Owner at

the completion of the work and prior to final project acceptance.

8.3.3 Each sheet of shop drawings shall identify the project, subcontractor, and fabricator

or manufacturer and the date of the drawings. All shop drawings shall be numbered in

sequence and each sheet shall indicate the total number of sheets in the set.

8.3.4 The shop drawings shall indicate types, gauges, and finish of all materials. Sufficient

data in each set of shop drawings shall be included to permit a detailed study of the

system submitted and its conformance to the Contract Documents and design intent.

8.3.5 The Contractor will review, approve, stamp, and then submit the prints and samples

to the Architect for approval with copies to the Owner. After review, the Architect will

then return the prints to the Contractor with the Architect's appropriate comments. Those

returned for correction shall be corrected and resubmitted. Upon receiving the approved

prints from the Architect, the Contractor will make requested sets of prints for

distribution to appropriate subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, and suppliers who

require them for coordination of their work.



8.4 Verification. By approving and submitting shop drawings and samples, the

Contractor thereby represents that they have determined and verified all field measurements,

field construction criteria, dimensions, elevations, quantities, materials, catalog numbers, and

similar data, as shown on the drawings and specifications furnished by the Architect, or will

do so, and that they have checked and coordinated each shop drawing and sample with the

requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.

8.5 Architect Review. The Architect will review and approve shop drawings and samples

with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for conformance with the

design concept of the project and with the information given in the Contract Documents.

The Architect's approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in

which the item functions. On the completion of the work, the Architect shall be furnished

two corrected copies of all shop or setting drawings showing the as-built condition of the

work. The Architect, after review, shall submit one of these copies to the Owner.

8.6 Corrections. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and

shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples

until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted

shop drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Architect on previous

submissions.

8.7 Contractor's Responsibility. The Architect's approval of shop drawings or samples

shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of

the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Architect in writing of such

deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific

deviation, nor shall the Architect's approval relieve the Contractor from responsibility for

errors or omissions in the shop drawings or samples.

8.8 Architect Approval Required. No portion of the work requiring the submission of a

shop drawing or sample shall be commenced until such submittal has been approved by the

Architect. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings

and samples.

8.8.1 All material finishes and samples will be approved at one time. The Contractor shall

submit all items requiring approval of finishes, color, material, etc., with sufficient lead

time to allow simultaneous consideration and preparation of complete finish Color

Schedule. No approvals of single items will be considered.

GC 9. MATERIALS, LABOR, FACILITIES, AND STORAGE

9.1 Contractor's Responsibility. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide

and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, machinery, transportation, and other

facilities necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. The Contractor

shall provide and pay for all the temporary facilities required to supply all the power, light,

water, and heat needed by him and the subcontractors for their work and shall install and

maintain all such facilities in such manner as to protect the public and workmen and conform

with any applicable laws and regulations. If temporary heat and/or protection is required for

the expeditious prosecution of the work and before the permanent heating apparatus is

available for use, the temporary heating apparatus shall be installed and operated in such a

manner that the finish work and/or construction will not be damaged thereby.



9.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall pay for all the power, light, and water

used by him and the subcontractors, without regard to whether such items are metered by

temporary or permanent meters. The cutoff date on permanent meters shall be either the

agreed date of full occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project,

whichever shall be the earlier date. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall

remove all such temporary facilities from the site.

9.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both

workmanship and materials shall be of the highest quality. The Contractor shall furnish

satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Samples shall be furnished,

when specified, and the work shall be in accordance with those samples which have been

approved.

9.3 Facilities and Storage. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, in a neat and

sanitary condition, adequate temporary toilet facilities for the use of any and all employees

engaged on the work, in strict compliance with the requirements of all applicable codes,

regulations, laws, and ordinances. In no event may toilet facilities of any existing building at

the site of the work be used by employees of the Contractor or subcontractors. Upon

completion of the work, all such temporary facilities shall be removed from the site.

9.3.1 The Contractor shall provide suitable temporary facilities and shall maintain on

premises watertight storage shed or sheds, tool houses for storage of building materials

and tools which may be damaged by weather. The Contractor shall allow space for the

erection of sheds and provide similar facilities for storage by subcontractors of their

materials and tools. Storage of materials shall be confined to the site. These facilities

shall further provide for protection against theft and damage of building materials and

tools. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all such temporary

facilities from the site.

9.3.2 The Contractor shall provide adequate, weatherproofed, heated, and well-lighted

office space at the site of the work, for the use of the Architect and the Owner and their

representatives.

9.3.3 All of the foregoing facilities shall be of a quality and placed in locations acceptable

to the Architect and the Owner.

GC 10. EMPLOYEES

10.1 Qualifications. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall at all times enforce strict

discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ on the work any

person considered by the Architect or the Owner to be unfit or not skilled in the work

assigned to him. The Contractor shall also keep its employees and those of its subcontractor

from socializing upon the site of the work after normal work hours and from fraternizing at

any time with staff, students, parents, and other persons who are at the school or the site of

the work.

10.2 Drug-Free Zone. The Jefferson County School District No. R-1 is a drug-free zone.

In furtherance of this standard, the Contractor shall establish and maintain a safe and efficient

work environment for all employees, free from the effects of alcohol, controlled substances,

and illicit drugs. The manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of alcohol,

controlled substances, and illicit drugs is prohibited on or adjacent to the project site and all

of the Owner's property at all times. Illicit drug use is the use of illegal drugs and the abuse



of alcohol and other drugs, including anabolic steroids. Controlled substances are drugs

specifically identified and regulated under state or federal law and include, but are not

limited to, opiates, narcotics, cocaine, amphetamines and other stimulants, depressants,

hallucinogenic substances, and marijuana. The Contractor will strictly enforce this

prohibition among his own employees and his subcontractors and their employees at all

times. The Contractor and subcontractors shall require all of their employees to undergo

drug and alcohol testing if an employee is involved in an accident on the site which may have

been caused by human error which could be drug or alcohol related or when a supervisor has

reasonable suspicion or notice that the employee shows signs of possible intoxication, use, or

is under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or controlled substances. Employees who violate

these prohibitions will be subject to disciplinary action by their employers up to and

including termination and may be denied access to the site of the work. Violation of this

provision shall also constitute sufficient grounds for termination of the Contract or any

subcontract without damages or penalty to the Owner.

10.3 Equal Employment. During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees

not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed,

color, sex, national origin, disability, or age. The Contractor will take affirmative action to

ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment,

without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, disability, or age. Such action

shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or

transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other

forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor

agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment,

notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The

Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of

the Contractor; state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment

without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, disability, or age.

10.4 Criminal Record Verification. Successful bidder will be required to complete a

criminal records check on all employees who work on the project. Employees who have

been convicted of a felony, including crimes that require registration on the

National Sexual Offender Registry will not be allowed to work on the project. The

contractor must complete and submit the district’s Criminal Records Check Certification

form prior to starting work. Each individual contractor will be responsible to adhere to any

Federal, State or Local privacy and confidentiality requirements.

10.5 Responsibility for Employees. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for

the acts and omissions of all his employees. The Contractor shall further be responsible for

the acts and omissions of all subcontractors, their agents and employees, and all other

persons acting on behalf of the Contractor or subcontractors as set forth herein.

GC 11. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS

11.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. They shall defend all suits or

claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner harmless from loss on

account thereof. If the Contractor has information that the process or article specified is an

infringement of a patent, they shall be responsible for such loss unless they promptly gives

such information to the Architect.



GC 12. SURVEYS, PERMITS, LAWS, REGULATIONS, AND TAXES

12.1 Surveys. As provided by the Owner, the Contractor shall obtain from the Architect a

copy of all surveys describing property lines, elevation benchmarks, physical characteristics,

and utility locations.

12.2 Permits and Licenses. The State building permit will be secured and paid for by the

Owner. Any other permits, governmental fees, and licenses necessary for the proper

execution and completion of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor.

Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be

secured and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise specified. The Owner is exempt from

paying any fee for any building permit issued by any building departments located in

Jefferson County. However, the Contractor shall secure such permit from proper

governmental agency if requested by Owner, in which case the cost of any such fee shall be

verified and paid by the Owner.

12.2.1 The Owner will negotiate and provide for all electrical, gas, water, and sewer mains

for Contractor's connections. The Contractor is to arrange with the utility company for

actual connection, make necessary connections, and pay for all inspection fees and

permits in connection therewith as required by any governmental agency. In addition, the

Contractor will furnish any material or items as required to complete all connections.

12.2.2 The Contractor shall coordinate and call for all inspections as required by the State of

Colorado, Division of Oil and Public Safety, State Plumbing, State Electrical, local Fire

Authority or authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) over the work.

12.2.3 All other required permits shall be taken out and paid for by the Contractor or

respective subcontractor as required by the governing public agency. The Contractor

shall call and pay for all inspections required by the State, Fire Department or public

agencies as required.

12.3 Laws and Regulations. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all

laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and

specified. If the Contractor observes that the drawings and specifications are at variance

therewith, they shall promptly notify the Architect in writing and any necessary changes shall

be adjusted as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs

any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, and

without such notice to the Architect, they shall bear all costs arising therefrom and to correct

same.

12.4 Taxes. The Owner is exempt from paying any State sales or State use taxes on any

materials, supplies, or other equipment used or installed in the work. To effectuate this

exemption, the Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Exemption from the Colorado

Department of Revenue and file copies with the Owner before making any purchases or

commencing work. No amounts paid to the Contractor pursuant to this agreement shall

include reimbursement for such taxes.



GC 13. BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS, STAKES, AND

MEASUREMENTS

13.1 Benchmarks. The Contractor shall properly stake out the work and provide and

rigidly set benchmarks and batter boards as necessary for the proper performance of the

work. The Contractor shall remain responsible for their maintenance and their accuracy. A

permanent benchmark, approved as to location and type by the Architect, from which all

grades are to be taken, shall be established near the site of the work by the Contractor. From

this benchmark the Contractor shall ascertain all grades and levels to the building as needed.

The Contract Documents shall include all necessary information to establish the benchmark.

13.2 Preservation of Monuments and Stakes. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all

monuments, benchmarks, property markers, reference points, and stakes. In case of his

destruction thereof, the Contractor will be charged with the expense of replacement and shall

be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or

benchmarks which must be removed or disturbed shall be protected until properly referenced

for relocation. The Contractor shall furnish materials and assistance for the proper

replacement of such monuments or benchmarks.

13.3 Measurements. Before ordering any material or performing any work, the Contractor

shall verify all measurements at the project and shall be responsible for the accuracy of same.

No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed because of any difference between actual

dimensions and the measurements indicated in the drawings or specifications.

13.3.1 Any discrepancies shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner for consideration

before proceeding with the work.

GC 14. PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND STORMWATER

MANAGEMENT

14.1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide

all necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to all employees on the project and

all other persons who may be affected thereby; all the work and all materials and equipment

to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody, or

control of the Contractor or any of their subcontractors; and other property at the site or

adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and

utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

14.2 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety

and Health Administration (OSHA) and all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of

any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect

them from damage, injury, or loss. The contractor shall erect and maintain all necessary

safeguards for the safety and protection of workmen, owners, and users of adjacent facilities

and the public and shall post danger signs and other warnings against hazards created by such

features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, elevator shafts, hatchways,

scaffolding, window openings, stairways, excavations, and falling materials; and shall

designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the

prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless

otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Architect.



14.3 The Contractor shall be liable for and shall promptly repair, remedy, indemnify, and

pay for all damage or loss to any person or property caused in whole or in part by the

Contractor, any subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or

by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, except damage or loss proximately

caused by faulty drawings or specifications or to the acts or omissions of the Owner or

Architect and not attributable to any fault or negligence of the Contractor.

14.4 In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property,

the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect or Owner, is

hereby permitted to act, at their own discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury; and

they shall so act, without appeal, if so authorized or instructed. Any compensation, claimed

by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement.

Notification of and report of such emergencies shall be made immediately to the Owner and

Architect.

14.5 The contractor is responsible for securing and paying for the State Stormwater

Management Permit and/or local Stormwater Management Permit as may be required. The

contractor is responsible to ensure that all the requirements of either the State or local

Stormwater Management Permit are strictly followed during construction. The contractor

shall review and follow the Owners Illicit Discharge reporting procedures in the event of an

occurrence.

14.6 The Owner may engage a civil engineer to prepare an erosion control plan as part of

the over all contract documents. The contractor can use or modify the contract document

plan as necessary in their preparation of the Stormwater Management Permit application.

However, this does not relieve the contractor from preparing their own site specific plan for

application submission if no plan is provided in the contract documents.

14.7 The Owner or designated owners representative may inspect the Stormwater

Management plan, project site and BMP’s and communicate noted deficiencies for corrective

measures at any time during the construction project. The contractor shall be fined up to

$250 dollar per day in addition to any Federal, State or local fines until deficiencies are

corrected. The contractor shall coordinate all inspections required by the State or authority

having jurisdiction (AHJ).

14.8 The Owners final acceptance of the project and contractor de-mobilization, does not

relieve the contractor of their responsibilities and duties as required in the permit (i.e.

maintain BMP’s, regular and post event inspections as defined in the permit, etc.) while it is

still open. Final acceptance of ground areas including permanent stormwater structures shall

only occur after the required vegetation and stabilization has been established. The

contractor is required to conduct monthly inspections of the site and BMP’s during this

warranty period and make corrective changes to the BMP’s or add BMP’s as needed.

14.9 The contractor will notify the Owner in writing when they believe all vegetation and

stabilization has reached the contract requirements and they want to close the Stormwater

Management Permit. The Owner must be allowed the opportunity to review the site and

approve the contractors request to close the permit. The contractor can not apply to close the

Stormwater Management permit without the Owners written approval. It is the contractor

responsibility to remove and dispose of all BMP’s after the Stormwater Management Permit

has been closed.



GC 15. ACCESS TO WORK

15.1 Access. The Architect, the Owner, and their representatives shall at all times have

access to the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide

proper facilities for such access so that the Architect may perform his functions under the

Contract Documents.

15.2 Inspection. If the specifications, the Architect's instructions, laws, ordinances, or any

public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give

the Architect timely notice of its readiness for checking by the Architect or inspection by

another authority, and if the inspection is by another authority, of the date fixed for such

inspection. All required certificates of inspection shall be secured by the Contractor. If any

work should be covered up without approval or consent of the Architect, it must, if required

by the Architect, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense.

15.2.1 Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered,

the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If work is found to be in accordance with

the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and

replacement. If such work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract

Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost.

15.3 Testing. Materials incorporated into the project will be subject to routine tests as

required to ensure their compliance with the specifications. Such tests may include, but shall

not necessarily be restricted to, the following: Concrete: primary mix design, slump tests,

cylinder compressions tests, and air entrainment tests; Steel: tensile tests; Welds: field

inspection and x-ray examination; Soils: sub-soil investigation, physical analysis, and

compaction tests; Asphalt pavement: physical analysis and compaction tests; and

Roofing-Samples cut from in-place built-up roof.

15.3.1 Any other basic materials for which standard laboratory test procedures have been

established may also be included if doubt as to their quality should arise.

15.3.2 Any testing of the above nature will be done at the discretion of the Owner who will

bear all costs, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor

shall be held responsible for providing samples of sufficient size for test purposes and for

cooperating with the Owner or his representative in obtaining and preparing samples for

tests. All tests will be in accordance with standard test procedures and will be performed

by persons or firms selected by the Owner.

GC 16. CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION

16.1 During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall ensure that a competent

superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner,

are on the project site at all times while work is in progress. The superintendent shall not be

changed by the Contractor except with the consent of the Owner and the Architect unless the

superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in its employ.

In the event the superintendent ceases to be in the Contractor’s employ and a new

superintendent is selected for the Owner’s project, that superintendent will meet with the

approval of the Owner. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence, and

all directions given to superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The

Architect and Owner shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the superintendent

or their assistants.



16.2 The superintendent shall remain on-site full-time through the actual date of final

completion, the completion of all punch list items, until the date of the Owner’s Letter of

Acceptance.

16.3 The Contractor shall provide full-time, qualified, and efficient supervision of the

work, using competent skill and attention. The superintendent shall be knowledgeable and

completed training in Stormwater Management & Erosion Control and OSHA construction

safety. The superintendent shall be knowledgeable of all building codes that govern the

construction of the project. The superintendent shall direct, schedule, and coordinate the

work. The superintendent is responsible for determining and supervising all temporary and

permanent erection and construction sequences, techniques, means and methods. The

superintendent shall coordinate the work to ensure that all parts fit together properly and in

accordance with the Contract Documents. The superintendent shall carefully study and

compare all Contract Documents and other instructions and shall at once report to the

Architect and the Owner any error, inconsistency, or omission which they may discover.

16.4 The superintendent shall see that the work is carried out in accordance with the

Contract Documents and in a thorough and first-class manner in every respect.

16.5 The Contractor shall provide engineering, surveying, and coordination to accurately

establish all lines, levels, and marks necessary to facilitate the operations of all concerned in

the Contractor's work. Contractor shall lay out the work in a manner satisfactory to the

Architect, making permanent records of all lines and levels required for excavation, grading,

and foundations, and for all other parts of the work. Contractor shall determine the

commencement and certify the proper completion of the various stages of construction.

GC 17. CHANGES IN THE WORK

17.1 Change Orders. The Owner may, at any time, by a written change order directed

through the Architect, without notice to the sureties and without invalidating the Contract,

make changes in the drawings and/or specifications of this Contract within the general scope

thereof; order extra work; or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the

work. If such changes cause an increase or decrease in the amount due under this Contract,

or in the time required for its performance, an equitable adjustment shall be made on the

change order, and the Contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. Any claim of the

Contractor for adjustment under this clause must be asserted in writing within ten (10) days

from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the notification of change. No change order or

other form of order or directive by the Owner or Architect requiring additional compensable

work to be performed, which causes the aggregate amount payable under the Contract

Documents to exceed the amount appropriated for the original Construction Agreement shall

be issued unless the Contractor is given written assurance by the Owner that lawful

appropriations to cover the costs of the additional work have been made.

17.2 Minor Changes. In giving instructions, the Architects shall have authority to make

minor changes in the work, which do not involve extra cost, and which are not inconsistent

with the purposes of the building. Otherwise, except in an emergency endangering life or

property, no extra work or change shall be made unless in pursuance of a written order from

the Owner signed or countersigned by the Architect, or a written order from the Architect

stating that the Owner has authorized the extra work or change. No claim for an addition to



the Contract sum shall be valid unless ordered or authorized in the manner set forth in this

paragraph.

17.3 Price Differential. The cost or credit resulting from a change in the work shall be

determined in one or more of the following ways:

17.3.1 By estimate, with a detailed cost breakdown as set forth in subparagraph 17.3.3.

below, and acceptance in a lump sum, with a maximum combined mark-up to the Owner,

for the Contractor and all affected subcontractors, not to exceed a total of fifteen percent

(15%). Overhead, profit and additional fee on work performed by others shall be limited

to the percentages set forth below, and shall include insurance premiums not itemized

above, cost of office supervision and assistants, incidental job burdens, and general office

expense. The base for applying percentages shall not include the social security tax.

Such percentages are as follows:

17.3.1.1 To subcontractors and/or to the contractor for work performed with its own

forces, an overhead of 5.0% and a profit of 5.0%.

17.3.1.2 On proposals involving both increases and decreases in the amount of the

contract, the overhead, profit and fee will be allowed on any net increase only.

17.3.2 By unit prices named in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon.

17.3.3 If the parties are unable to agree on one of the above methods, then the

amount shall be determined by force account under the following formula:

17.3.3.1 The actual cost of all direct labor performed (including foremen employed

continuously on the work, but not the salary, or any part thereof, of the Contractor's

superintendent) and the actual materials furnished for and used in such work, less all

available cash, trade, or other discounts;

17.3.3.2 Rental for the use of such items of equipment as have an individual value in

excess of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000); provided that the amount of such rental

charge and the length of time and probable cost of the use of such equipment shall

have been authorized in writing by the Owner;

17.3.3.3 All proportionate sums paid for royalties, permits, and inspection fees;

17.3.3.4 All proportionate premiums for Public Liability Insurance, Worker's

Compensation, and other proper and necessary insurance, as well as all applicable

payroll taxes;

17.3.3.5 Either a predetermined lump sum, fixed fee, or a fee of fifteen percent (15%),

which fee shall be applied to the total of paragraphs 17.3.3.1, 17.3.3.2, and 17.3.3.3 .

only, and shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for all costs and

expenses, including all overhead and profit, which are not otherwise enumerated

above. Subcontractors, if employed by the Contractor on this part of the work, will

receive such portion of the Contractor's fee as may be agreed and paid to them by the

Contractor.

17.3.3.6 The Contractor shall keep and present, in such manner as the Owner may

direct, an accurate accounting of all of the foregoing costs, together with all

supporting vouchers and other documentation, all subject to audit by the Owner.



GC 18. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST OR ADDITIONAL TIME AND

WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

18.1 Claims for Extra Cost or Time. If the Contractor claims that any instructions by

drawings or otherwise, after the date of the Contract, involve extra costs under this Contract

which were not included in the original bid, or requires an extension in the Contract time, he

shall give the Owner and the Architect written notice thereof no later than seven (7) calendar

days after the receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute the

work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, and the procedure shall then be as

provided for changes in the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change

in the Contract amount or Contract time must be authorized by change order.

18.2 Delays and Extensions of Time. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the

progress of the work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by any employee

of either, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the

work, or by unavoidable casualties, or by any cause which the Owner determines may justify

the delay, then the completion date shall be extended by change order for such reasonable

time as the Owner may determine.

18.2.1 If unusually severe weather conditions are a basis for a claim for additional time, the

weather experienced at the project site during the time of completion for the Project must

be found to be a greater magnitude than the anticipated adverse weather for the Denver

metro area during any given month. Such claim shall be documented by the contractor

by data substantiating that weather conditions were unusually sever in comparison to the

thirty (30) year average established by the climatologically data, U.S. Department of

Commerce, for the Denver area and could not have been reasonably anticipated. The

unusually sever weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the Project by

preventing work on Critical Path scheduled activities for fifty-one (51%) or more of the

Contractor’s scheduled workday. The delay must be beyond the control and without the

fault or negligence of the contractor. If the unusually severe weather delay days

encountered exceed the thirty (30) year average, either a time extension for an equitable

number of days or costs for schedule recovery will be considered by the Owner.

18.2.2 If unusually adverse weather conditions are a basis of a claim for additional time, the

weather experienced at the Project site during the time of completion for the Project must

exceed the schedule based on the National Oceanic and atmospheric Administration

(NOAA) for the Denver Area and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time

evaluations. All subsequent monthly updates of the Contractor’s project schedule will

incorporate these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities.

Actual adverse weather delays must prevent work on critical path schedule activities for

fifty-one (51%) or more of the contractor’s scheduled workday. The number of actual

adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even

if adverse weather occurred in the previous months), be calculated chronologically from

the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the actual

cumulative number of adverse weather delay days encountered exceed the number of

anticipated above, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather calendar days,

either a time extension for an equal number of day or costs for schedule recovery will be

considered by the Owner.

18.2.3 All requests for extension of time shall be subject to the Owner's approval and shall

be made in writing to the Owner no more than seven (7) days after the occurrence



causing the delay; otherwise they shall be waived. Any request for extension of time for

a change in the work or for any occurrence allegedly causing a delay as provided for

herein must be substantiated by demonstrating the effect of the change or occurrence on

the critical path of the Construction Schedule.

18.2.4 If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written

interpretations or detail drawings shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be

allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpretations or drawings until fifteen (15)

days after demand is made for them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable.

18.2.5 Should the time for completion of the Contract be extended, the Owner reserves the

right to occupy any part of the structure upon written notice to the Contractor from the

Architect or the Owner, but only after the Architect has made a thorough inspection

accompanied by the Contractor's superintendent to note any defects in workmanship or

materials which are the responsibility of the Contractor. Any such partial occupancy

shall not be deemed a waiver of any provision for liquidated damages for delay in final

completion.

18.2.6 When the whole or a portion of the work is suspended for any reason, each

Contractor shall properly cover over, secure, and protect all work as may be susceptible

to damage from any cause.

18.3 This Article does not exclude the recovery of damages by the Owner for delay under

other provisions of the Contract Documents.

18.4 Waiver of Consequential Damages. Except as may otherwise be provided in the

agreement and/or General Conditions for liquidated damages, the Contractor and the Owner

waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to the

contract, including, without limitation, all consequential damages due to the Owner’s

termination of the contract.

GC 19. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

19.1 If the Contractor becomes aware of the presence of hazardous materials in any form

at the project site including, but not limited to, asbestos or other toxic substances they shall,

prior to commencement of any portion of the Work, provide notice to the District of the

presence, location, and condition of any known or suspected materials that are discovered.

Such notice shall be in writing and shall be submitted no more than twenty-four (24) hours

after such materials are discovered.

19.2 In the event of such discovery not previously identified by the Owner, the Contractor

shall not proceed with the Work until they have received written authorization from the

District. If the Contractor proceeds with the Work without said authorization, they do so at

their own risk.

19.3 In the event such materials are identified or encountered during the course of the

Project, the District, at its expense, shall take all reasonable actions to properly and safely

deal with such materials.

19.4 The Contractor acknowledges that the Contractor, its employees and agents, have the

responsibility of being fully informed of the District’s Management Plan as it relates to the

buildings located at the Project site and shall consult with the District about how such plan

addresses suspected or active asbestos containing material areas within such buildings. The

contractor assumes responsibility for notification to workers of existing asbestos conditions.



Notification shall be made on approved EPA forms and includes posting of notices in

accordance with OSHA, EPA and State Health Department guidelines.

19.5 All MSDS documents required by Federal and State law shall be kept available on

site in the contractor’s trailer or office.

19.6 All hazardous material and waste shall be secured, contained (secondary containment

as necessary), labeled properly and used or disposed of in accordance with local, State and

Federal regulations.

19.7 The contractor shall be responsible for spill containment, clean up and any other

associated costs resulting from an illicit discharge of hazardous materials or waste. The

contractor shall review, understand and follow the Districts illicit discharge reporting

procedures.

GC 20. CHANGED CONDITIONS

20.1 The Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, notify the

Owner and the Architect in writing of: (1)sub-surface or latent physical conditions at the site

differing materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or (2)unknown physical

conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily

encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the

Contract Documents. The Owner and the Architect shall promptly investigate the conditions,

and if the Owner finds that such conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or

decrease in the cost of, or the time required for, performance of the work, an equitable

adjustment shall be made and the Contract modified in writing accordingly. Any claim of the

Contractor for adjustment hereunder shall not be allowed unless Contractor has given notice

as above required, shall be subject to the Owner’s approval and shall be made in writing to

the Owner no more than seven (7) calendar days after the identification of the conditions;

otherwise they shall be waived.

GC 21. CORRECTION OF WORK

21.1 Correction of Work Before and After Completion. The Architect or Owner has the

authority to condemn work which is defective or does not conform to the Contract

Documents. The Contractor, following written demand, shall promptly correct all work

rejected by the Architect or Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract

Documents whether observed before or after final completion and whether or not fabricated,

installed, or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected work,

including the cost of the Architect's and/or Owner's consultant's additional services. If the

Contractor proceeds to build in or cover the item which has been rejected, they shall be

totally responsible for the cost of removal and replacement of said item and removal and

replacement of all necessary work surrounding or covering the item in order to produce a

first-class job.

21.2 Tests to Determine Conformance. Whenever in the opinion of the Architect or the

Owner, tests are essential to assure the professional evaluation of the work which is subject

to being rejected or condemned, the necessary number of tests will be performed by the

consultants designated by the Owner. The recommendation of this consultant is final and all

parties to the Contract will comply with the methods and extent of the corrections submitted



in writing to the Owner and the Architect by the designated consultant. The cost of the tests

will become the Contractor's responsibility when corrections of any nature are recommended

by the consultant to the investigated work; otherwise, the Owner will pay for all tests

performed. Should such special testing, inspection, or approval be caused by the Contractor's

failure to follow the requirements of the Contract Documents or of required tests under GC

15 testing indicating conditions not in conformance with the Contract Documents, the costs

of such additional testing, inspection, or approval shall be borne by the Contractor, regardless

of the results.

21.3 Removal of Rejected Work. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the

premises all work rejected by the Architect or Owner as failing to conform to the Contract

Documents whether physically in place or not. Thereafter, the Contractor shall promptly

replace and re-execute such work in accordance with the Contract and without expense to the

Owner. The Contractor shall further bear the expense of making good all work of other

subcontractors found to be defective or destroyed or damaged by such removal or

replacement.

21.3.1 If the Contractor does not remove such rejected work within a reasonable time, fixed

by written notice from the Owner through the Architect, the Owner may remove it and

may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay

the expenses of such removal within ten (10) days' time thereafter, the Owner may, upon

ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale. In such

case, the Owner shall account to the Contractor for the net proceeds thereof, after

deducting all the costs and expenses that should have been borne by the Contractor,

including compensation for additional Architect or consultant services. If the net

proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne, the

difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate change order shall be

issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover

such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

21.4 Correction of Work After Final Payment. Neither the final estimate nor payment nor

any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for

faulty materials or workmanship and, unless otherwise specified, they shall remedy any

defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom,

which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final completion and

acceptance. This warranty shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other remedies

available to the Owner.

21.5 Failure to Correct the Work. If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or

nonconforming work, the Owner may correct it and otherwise proceed against the Contractor

for the cost thereof in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions.

21.6 Deductions for Uncorrected Work. If the Owner deems it inexpedient to correct work

that has been damaged or is defective or has not been completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents, an appropriate deduction from the Contract price shall be made and

reflected by a change order, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be

paid by the Contractor.

21.7 Additional Obligations. The obligations of the Contractor to correct the work shall be

in addition to, and not in limitation of, any other obligations imposed upon them by law,

special guarantees, warranties, or other rights of the Owner.



GC 22. OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT WORK

22.1 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any

provision of this Contract, the Owner, after three (3) working days' written notice to the

Contractor, may, without prejudice to any other remedy they may have, make good such

deficiencies and may deduct the reasonable cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter

due the Contractor. In the event such work is performed by the Owner, the Owner's

employees, or by persons other than the Contractor at the Owner's request, the Owner shall

not be liable to the Contractor for inconvenience expense or subsequent cost of removal of

such work. The amount to be deducted as cost of doing the work shall include the cost of the

Architect's additional services made necessary by such default. If the payments then or

thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay

the difference to the Owner.

GC 23. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT

23.1 With Cause. If the Contractor should fail to perform the work with reasonable and

due diligence or refuse to supply sufficient skilled works or materials of the proper quality, or

should the contractor be adjudged a bankrupt; or it should make a general assignment for the

benefit of its creditors without approval of the Owner; or if a receiver should be appointed on

account of its insolvency; or if it should refuse or should fail, except in cases for which

extension of time is provided; or if it should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors

or for material or labor; or disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Architect or

Owner; or otherwise be guilty of a material violation of any provision of the Contract; then

the Owner, when in its sole opinion sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may,

without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor, and his surety,

if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take

possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the

work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall

not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finally completed and

accepted by the Owner. If the unpaid balance of the Contract sum shall exceed the expense

of completing the work, including compensation for additional architectural, managerial,

consultant, and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such

expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the

Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner, as herein provided, and the damages incurred

through the Contractor's default, shall be determined by the Owner.

23.2 Without Cause. Should conditions arise which in the Owner's opinion make it

necessary or advisable to discontinue work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may

terminate the Contract in whole or in part without cause or fault by the Contractor by giving

seven (7) calendar days' written notice to the Contractor. The notice shall specify the date

and extent to which the Contract is terminated. Upon any such termination, the Owner shall

take possession of the site and all or any part of the materials and equipment delivered or

en route to the site. In the event of termination under this paragraph the Contractor shall be

equitably paid for all work properly completed, based upon the approved Schedules of

Values.



GC 24. PAYMENT

24.1 Schedule of Values. Payments will be made on the valuation of the work done.

Before any Request for Payment will be considered, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect and the Owner a complete, itemized schedule of the values of the various parts of

the work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract and separating material costs from other

costs. Such schedule shall include as costs the material costs of all subcontractors under such

Contractor and the costs of all materials to be taken from the Contractor's or subcontractors'

own stocks of material. The schedule shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner

and, if required, supported by such evidence as to its correctness as the Architect or the

Owner may direct. Each item on the schedule of values shall include its proper share of

overhead and profit. This schedule will be used for the estimates and payments provided for

in these General Conditions. Along with such schedule the Contractor shall submit a

schedule of values of estimated monthly application amounts for the course of the work to

assist the Owner in arranging payment.

24.2 Payments to Contractors. Partial payments will be made as the work progresses

within fifteen (15) days of the Owner’s receipt of the Application for Payment of Contractor,

which is properly completed and has been approved by the Architect. If the Owner has an

issue with or does not approve the Application for Payment of Contractor, the Owner will

notify the contractor in writing. Request for Payment shall be submitted to the Architect on a

regularly established monthly schedule approved by the Owner. The Owner reserves the

right to withhold payments at any time regardless of the Architect's recommendations. The

Request for Payment shall be based on the same items as are shown in the schedule of values

itemizing the material used and work performed for which payment is claimed. In preparing

estimates, material delivered and properly stored on the site and preparatory work done may

be taken into consideration.

24.2.1 If payments are made on account of materials not incorporated in the work, but

delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at some other location that is bonded and

insured and agreed upon in writing, such payments shall be conditioned upon submission

by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures which will establish the

Owner's interest, including applicable insurance and transportation to the site.

24.2.1.1 Off site stored material must be made available for inspection by owner,

architect, consultants and/or contractor prior to pay applications being approved.

24.2.1.2 Material must be clearly identified as property of owner, and stored in a

manner as to be easily distinguished from general inventory. This may include the

actual development of an area that can be fenced off from other inventory.

24.2.1.3 Request for payment will include all applicable invoices, a bill of sale and a

certificate of insurance which states the dollar amount of the stored material. All

dollar amounts on invoices, the bill of sale and the insurance certificates shall match

exactly the amount being billed for on the application.. The insurance certificate

must also name the owner as additionally insured.

24.2.1.4 When requested by owner or architect, general contractor will set up the

inspection meeting and general contractor will be present at inspection.

24.2.1.5 Payment applications for shop drawings will be allowed, but not approved for

payment until the shop drawings have been submitted to architect, approved by both

architect and owner and all corrections have been completed..



24.2.2 Payments will be made in the full value of the work performed and material stored

less ten percent (10%) of such value which shall be retained until completion and

acceptance of all work, unless otherwise agreed by Owner, and less the aggregate of any

previous payments. Upon the certified completion of fifty percent (50%) of the work, as

determined by the Architect and the Owner, and if satisfactory progress is being made in

the work, in the sole opinion of the Owner, then no retainage shall be made from further

monthly payments, subject to any retainages made by the Owner from the final payment.

The full Contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the work

and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the Owner. Upon satisfactory completion

and final acceptance of each separate building or portion of the building or other division

of the Contract upon which agreement has been reached as to its separate price, the

Owner may make payment in full, including retained percentages thereon less deductions

as determined by the Owner. Before such payment is made, the Owner shall determine

that satisfactory and substantial reasons exist for the payment and shall require written

approval from any surety furnishing bonds for the work. Partial and final payments by

the Contractor to their subcontractors shall be made in the same manner as provided

herein between the Owner and the Contractor.

24.2.3 Under any Contract exceeding Eighty Thousand Dollars ($80,000), pursuant to which

sums are withheld to assure satisfactory performance, the Contractor may withdraw the

whole or any portion of such sums withheld if the Contractor deposits acceptable

securities with the Owner in an amount at all times at least equal to the amount

withdrawn. All such withdrawals shall be on the Owner's approved forms and shall

require that the acceptable securities be endorsed in favor of the Owner, authorizing the

Owner to negotiate the acceptable securities and to receive the payments due.

24.2.4 The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all work, materials, and

equipment covered by a Request for Payment, whether incorporated in the project or not,

will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear

of all liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances; and that no work, materials, or

equipment covered by a Request for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor

or by any other person performing the work at the site or furnishing materials and

equipment for the project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an

encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or

such other person. This provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from

the sole responsibility for all materials and work upon which payments have been made

or the restoration of any damaged work or as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require

the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract.

24.3 Certificates for Payments. No Request for Payment shall be submitted to the Owner

until and unless it has been certified by the Architect. No Certificate for a progress payment,

nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the project by the

Owner shall constitute an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

24.4 Payments Withheld. The Owner may withhold payment or the Architect may decline

to issue a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, or the Architect may withhold or

nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate previously issued, because of subsequently

discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, for such an amount or to such extent as may

be necessary in the opinion of either to protect the Owner from loss on account of:



24.4.1 Defective work not remedied;

24.4.2 Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;

24.4.3 Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or material or

labor;

24.4.4 A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid;

24.4.5 Damage to another contractor;

24.4.6 Failure of the Contractor to prosecute any portion of the work in a timely manner or

in compliance with any approved schedules;

24.4.7 Failure of the Contractor to submit on a timely basis any documentation required by

the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, monthly schedule status updates,

schedule of values, or request for approval of subcontractors.

GC 25. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS

25.1 The Contractor shall submit, prior to Notice to Proceed in a format acceptable to the

Owner, a construction schedule for the project. This schedule shall start with the date of the

Notice of Contract Award, and the completion date shall be the date specified in the

Construction Agreement. The schedule shall portray fully a timetable representing the

various activities in the schedule of values and shall include submittal schedule and long lead

material activities. The contractors schedule shall include activity dependencies and logic to

clearly indicate the projects Critical Path activities. The time shown between the starting and

completion dates of the various activities within the schedule shall represent one hundred

percent (100%) completion of each activity. Additional detailed schedules of separate

activities of work may be requested at the Owner's discretion. No Request for Payment will

be accepted by the Owner until this schedule has been submitted as required herein. This

schedule shall be revised at a minimum every month during the progress of the work or when

the actual progress, in the opinion of the Architect or the Owner, varies materially from the

last monthly schedule status update. At each weekly Owner, Architect, Contractor meeting

the contractor is required to present a 3 week short interval schedule detailing the up coming

work.

25.2 The Contractor shall submit with their “Application of Payment for Contractor” the

monthly statused schedule reflecting the work in place. The monthly statused schedule shall

depict progress and percentage of completion of activities consistent with the values and

amounts contained in the “Application of Payment for Contractor”. The contractors

subcontractors shall be supplied copies of the accepted schedule. Failure to submit a

monthly statused schedule update shall be deemed cause to reject Requests for Payment.

25.3 The Contractor shall schedule all work so as to reduce to a minimum any disruption

in the use of the existing facilities and interruptions of utility service of any type. Where

electrical or mechanical work performed under this Contract will necessitate interruptions of

service to existing facilities, the Contractor shall furnish and install temporary service to such

facilities or perform such work at such times when said existing utilities are not in normal

use. This Contractor shall bear the cost of all overtime or inconvenience resulting therefrom.

25.4 During the course of construction the Contractor shall maintain free and unimpeded

all required exits from the building. Barricades shall be so erected that traffic is separated

and protected from the construction. Such exits shall not be closed at any time for any reason



while the building is occupied or at any time when the building is unoccupied except after

written approval is given by the Owner and proper warning and directional signs are posted.

GC 26. INSURANCE

26.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, without interruption, throughout the term

of the Contract and for a period of one (1) year following the date of Final Acceptance of the

Work, such insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out of

or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by

himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,

or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. All such insurance shall be subject to

the approval of the Owner for adequacy of protection, and, to the extent available, shall

include a provision preventing cancellation without thirty (30) days' prior notice to the

Owner in writing.

26.2 Liability Insurance Requirements. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his

own expense, liability insurance as hereinafter specified. The liability insurance required is

as follows:

26.2.1 Contractor's General Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance issued to the

Contractor and protecting him from all claims for personal injury, including death and

occupational sickness and disease, and all claims for destruction of or damage to property

arising out of or in connection with any operations under his Contract, whether such

operations be by himself or by a subcontractor under him, or anyone directly or indirectly

employed by the Contractor or by a subcontractor under him, or by anyone for whose acts

any of them may be liable.

26.2.1.1 All such insurance shall be written with a limit of liability of not less than

$2,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury, including death, at any time

resulting therefrom, and property damage and employer's liability up to $2,000,000.

26.2.1.2 All such insurance shall be written on a comprehensive policy form and shall

specifically cover all blasting operations, elevators, products, completed operations,

explosions, collapse, subsidence, and underground damage. Certificates evidencing

the issuance of such insurance, addressed to the Owner, shall be filed with the Owner

within ten (10) days after the date of the Notice of Contract Award.

26.2.2 The policy shall name Owner as additional insured and shall be endorsed to be

primary and non-contributory for Owner. Coverage shall not exclude contractual or

products and completed operations liability, nor liability for explosions, collapse or

underground risks. Coverage shall remain in force for a period of One (1) year from the

date of Final Acceptance of the Work. The parties hereto understand and agree that the

additional insured Owner is relying on and does not waive or intend to waive by this

Contract any provision hereof, including the provision of this section, the monetary

limitations, or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided by the Colorado

24-10-101 et seq., as from time to time amended,

or otherwise available to the Owner.

26.3 During the term of the Contract and for a period of one (1) year following the date of

Final Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall not cancel or refuse to renew the liability

insurance required above without the written approval of the Owner, which approval may be

withheld at the sole discretion of the Owner. With each Request for Payment submitted by



the Contractor, the Contractor shall submit an updated and current certificate of insurance or

other evidence, to the reasonable satisfaction of the Owner, evidencing the liability insurance

coverage required herein. The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately upon receipt of

any notice from the insurer of any cancellation, termination, or non-renewal of the policy.

26.4 Worker's Compensation Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain at his own

expense, until completion of the work and final acceptance thereof by the Owner, Worker's

Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provisions, covering the obligations

of the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the State of Colorado and

Employer's Liability of not less than $100,000 per occurrence and $100,000/disease for each

employee. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certificate giving evidence that the

Contractor is covered by the Worker's Compensation Insurance herein required, each

certificate specifically stating that such insurance includes occupational disease provisions.

All such certificates shall be furnished within ten (10) days after the date of the Notice of

Award.

26.5 Builder's Risk Completed Value Insurance. The Owner shall pay for and maintain

Builder's Risk Completed Value Insurance, insuring property of every kind and description to

be incorporated into the work, including materials and supplies, used or to be used, as part of

or incidental to the construction operations. The insurance shall exclude the Contractor's and

its subcontractors' equipment, tools, and machinery, or any other items of any description that

are not incorporated into the work. Faulty workmanship shall also be excluded. The

Builder's Risk Insurance shall provide coverage against physical loss or damage caused by

fire, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, and "extended coverages." The insurance

shall include a minimum deductible of $5,000. The Contractor shall pay costs not covered

because of such deductibles. The Builder's Risk Insurance shall remain in effect until

12:00 noon on the day following the date of the final acceptance of the entire project,

whether or not the project or some part thereof is occupied in any manner prior to such final

acceptance.

26.5.1 A loss insured under the Owner's Builder's Risk Insurance shall be adjusted by the

Owner and made payable to the Owner on behalf of the Contractor and its subcontractors

as their interests may appear. The Contractor shall pay subcontractors their just portions

of any insurance proceeds received by the Owner and paid to the Contractor.

26.5.2 Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, in writing, all monies received shall be applied

toward rebuilding or repairing the destroyed or damaged work.

26.5.3 The Contractor and his subcontractors and suppliers waive all rights against the

Owner for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by the Builder's

Risk Insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to

the work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by

the Owner on their behalf. The Contractor shall require similar waivers of his

subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees of any of them.

26.6 Comprehensive Automobile Liability. The Contractor shall pay for and maintain

Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, including owned, non owned, and hired

vehicles in the following amounts:

26.6.1 Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $2,000,000

26.7 Insurance Companies. The Owner will accept the policies written only by sureties

legally authorized in the State of Colorado and rated in Best's Insurance Guide (latest

edition), not lower than A- or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least X.



GC 27. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

27.1 The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the Notice of Contract Award, furnish

bonds to the Owner in the full amount of the Contract price, covering both the faithful

performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations for labor and materials arising

thereunder, on such forms as the Owner may prescribe and with such sureties as he may

approve. Such bonds shall be duly executed by a qualified surety, conditioned upon the true

and faithful performance of the Contract, and shall provide that if the Contractor or his

subcontractors fail to duly pay for any labor, materials, or other supplies used or consumed

by such Contractor or their subcontractors in the performance of the work contracted to be

done, the surety will pay the same in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in the bond,

as adjusted by approved change orders, and together with interest as provided by law. The

Performance Bond shall additionally guarantee that the Contractor shall remedy any

omissions, correct any and all defects, and adjust and make operable all component parts of

the work falling under the requirements of his Contract which may be called to his attention

within a period of twelve (12) months following the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

27.2 The premium for all bonds shall be paid by the Contractor and included in the bid

price in the Bid Proposal. The Owner will accept and approve bonds written by sureties

legally authorized to write such bonds in the State of Colorado, provided such surety

companies are rated in Best's Insurance Guide (latest edition), not lower that A- or have a

Best's Financial Rating of at least X. If, at any time a surety on such a bond becomes

irresponsible or loses its right to do business in the State of Colorado, the Owner may require

another surety acceptable to the Owner, which the Contractor shall furnish within ten (10)

days after receipt of written notice to do so.

27.3 Subcontractors pre-qualified by the Owner, prior to bidding, that enter into a

subcontractor agreement with the Contractor for any portion of the work, shall provide the

Contractor with Performance and Payment Bonds in accordance with the Contract

Documents on the basis of their subcontract scope of work to the Contractor.

27.4 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on

behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

GC 28. SUBCONTRACTS

28.1 The Contractor shall, within twenty-four (24) hours following the bid opening,

provide to the Owner the entire list of subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials

whose quotations it has used in preparation of its bid. The Contractor shall, before awarding

any subcontracts, re-verify to the Owner and Architect in writing on the standard form

"Request for Approval of Subcontractors" the names of subcontractors proposed for the

project. Any deviation from the original subcontractor and supplier list will not be allowed

unless justification is submitted in writing to the Owner by the Contractor that the

subcontractor or supplier is deemed unfit or unable to perform the specified work, is

unwilling to enter into a subcontract, or is not in compliance with the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall not employ any subcontractors that the Owner or Architect may, within

a reasonable time, object to as incompetent, unfit, or otherwise undesirable. Substitutions of



subcontractors listed in the executed proposal form may not be made without written

approval of the Owner.

28.2 If, before or after the execution of the Contract, a change of any subcontractor on

such list is required by the Architect or by the Owner prior to the award of the relevant

contract, the contract sum may be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned

by such change and an appropriate change order shall be issued.

28.3 The Owner shall, on request, furnish to a subcontractor, wherever practicable,

evidence of the amounts certified on his account. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully

responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of persons

either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons

directly employed by him.

28.4 The Contractor, at the conclusion of the work and before final payment is made, shall

furnish to the Owner a listing, giving names, contact persons, addresses, and telephone

numbers of all subcontractors and material suppliers who furnished labor and materials on

the project with identification of the services rendered and materials provided.

28.5 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any direct contractual

relation between any subcontractor and the Owner.

GC 29. RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR

29.1 The Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor by a written agreement and require

in his contracts that every subcontractor be bound by the terms of the Construction

Agreement, the General Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary General Conditions,

the drawings and specifications as far as applicable to his work, including the following

provisions of this Article, unless specifically noted to the contrary in a subcontract approved

in writing as adequate by the Owner.

29.2 The subcontractor agrees with the Contractor:

29.2.1 To be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Construction Agreement, General

Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary General Conditions, the drawings and

specifications, and any other Contract Documents, and to assume toward him all the

obligations and responsibilities that he, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner;

29.2.2 To preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract

with respect to the work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting

thereof will not prejudice such rights;

29.2.3 To perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

29.2.4 To submit to the Contractor applications for payment in such reasonable time as to

enable the Contractor to apply for payment as specified in the General Conditions;

29.2.5 To make all claims for extras, for extensions of time, and for damages for delays or

otherwise, to the Contractor in the manner provided in the General Conditions of the

Contract and the Supplementary General Conditions for like claims by the Contractor

upon the Owner, except that the time for making claims for extra cost is one week.

29.3 The Contractor agrees:

29.3.1 To be bound to the subcontractor by all the obligations that the Owner assumes to the

Contractor under the Agreement, General Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary

General Conditions, the drawings and specifications, and by all the provisions thereof

affording remedies and redress to the Contractor from the Owner.



29.3.2 To pay the subcontractor not later than fourteen (14) calendar days immediately

following the payment of each certificate issued under the schedule of values described in

these General Conditions, the amount allowed to the Contractor on account of the

subcontractor's work to the extent of the subcontractor's interest therein.

29.3.3 To pay the subcontractor, upon the payment of Certificates, if issued otherwise than

as above, so that at all times his total payments shall be as large in proportion to the value

of the work done by him as the total amount certified to the Contractor is to the value of

the work done by him.

29.3.4 To pay the subcontractor to such extent as may be provided by the Contract

Documents or the subcontract, if either of these provides for earlier or larger payments

than the above.

29.3.5 To pay the subcontractor a just share of any insurance payment received by the

Contractor, applicable to work performed by such subcontractor.

29.4 The Owner may require the Contractor to submit verified documentation evidencing

that full and timely payments have been made to the subcontractors and suppliers and/or that

legal justification exists for withholding payments. In addition, the Owner may contact the

subcontractors and suppliers directly to obtain verification that payments have been made as

required by law or the Contract Documents.

29.5 Nothing in this Article shall create any obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or

to see to the payment of any sums to any subcontractor, nor shall it form the basis for any

action by the subcontractor against the Owner on any contractual theories.

29.6 The Contractor shall arrange for the foreman of each subcontractor (mechanical,

electrical, masonry, plastering, painting, etc.) on the job to meet with the Architect at the job

prior to any work being started by this particular subcontractor so that all phases of the

subcontractor's work can be thoroughly discussed and the quality of materials and

workmanship expected can be completely understood and agreed upon.

GC 30. ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND INSPECTIONS

30.1 Authority. The Architect shall be the Owner's representative during construction and

until the expiration of the warranty period. He shall have authority to act on behalf of the

Owner only to the extent expressly provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise in

writing. The Architect, with written approval of the Owner, shall have authority to stop the

work whenever such stoppage may be necessary in his reasonable opinion to ensure the

proper execution of the Contract.

30.2 Decisions. The Architect shall be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the

conditions of the Contract and the judge of its performance, although the Owner shall retain

the final authority in decisions regarding such matters. The Architect shall, within a

reasonable time, make recommendations on all claims of the Contractor and on all other

matters relating to the execution and progress of the work. All such decisions shall be

subject to review by the Owner. The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic

effect, after consultation with the Owner, shall be final, if within the terms of the Contract

Documents.

30.3 Inspections. The Contractor shall provide timely notice to the Architect when

inspections are desirable or required by the terms of the Contract Documents or the



Architect's Agreement with the Owner. Such notice shall be given in order to allow for the

following reviews and inspections, among others:

30.3.1 Reviewing and approving shop drawings samples and other submissions for

conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the

information given in the Contract Documents;

30.3.2 Inspection of bearing surfaces of excavations before footings are poured;

30.3.3 Inspection of reinforcing steel after installation and before concrete is placed;

30.3.4 Inspection of structural and architectural concrete before, during, and after pouring;

30.3.5 Evaluation of all laboratory reports;

30.3.6 Inspection of structural steel after erection and prior to its being covered or enclosed;

30.3.7 Inspection of mechanical work following its installation and prior to its being covered

and enclosed;

30.3.8 Inspection of electrical work following its installation and prior to its being covered

or enclosed; and

30.3.9 Inspection of exposed surfaces for compliance with the Construction Documents.

GC 31. CASH ALLOWANCES

31.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract sum all allowances stated in the Contract

Documents. These allowances shall cover the net cost of the materials and equipment

delivered and unloaded at the site, and all applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling costs

on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the

original allowance shall be included in the Contract sum and not in the allowance. The

Contractor shall cause the work covered by these allowances to be performed for such

amounts and by such persons as the Owner or Architect may direct, but they will not be

required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. If the cost, when

determined, is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract sum shall be adjusted

accordingly by change order which will include additional handling costs on the site, labor,

installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses resulting to the Contractor from any

increase over the original allowance.

GC 32. USE OF PREMISES

32.1 The Contractor shall confine their apparatus, the storage of materials, and the

operations of workers to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, and the Contract

Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with their materials. The

Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that

will endanger its safety. The Contractor shall enforce all Owner instructions and other

regulations regarding signs, advertisements, fires, and smoking and shall not allow the

possession or consumption of alcohol or drugs on the premises by their personnel or any

subcontractor personnel.



GC 33. CUTTING, PATCHING, AND EXCAVATING

33.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of the work that may be

required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received

by work of the subcontractors shown upon, or reasonably implied by, the drawings and

specifications for the completed structure.

33.2 Any cost caused by defective or improperly timed work shall be borne by the party

responsible therefor. The Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or

otherwise altering the work and shall not cut or alter the work of any subcontractor except

with the consent of the Architect.

33.3 Each subcontractor shall leave all chases, holes, or openings straight, true, and of

proper size in their own work, or cut the same in existing work as may be necessary for the

proper installation of their own or another subcontractor's work, consulting with the

Architect and the Contractor regarding proper location and size of same. In case of their

failure to leave or cut same in the proper place, they shall cut them afterward at their own

expense. No excessive cutting will be permitted, nor shall any piers or other structural

members be cut or modified in the field without the written consent of the Architect. After

such work has been installed, they shall carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point

up same as directed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. Each section of this

specification shall include all cutting, patching, and excavating for that trade division unless

specifically stated to the contrary.

GC 34. CLEANING UP

34.1 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulations of waste

material or rubbish caused by their employees or work, and shall remove all rubbish as often

as is necessary or as directed by the Owner or the Architect. At the completion of the work,

he shall remove all his rubbish from and about the building, and all his tools, scaffolding, and

surplus materials and shall wash all glazing and window frames inside and outside

throughout the building, removing all stains, paint, etc., on same. Care shall be taken not to

scratch the glazing in this clean up.

34.2 All doors and wall coverings shall be left thoroughly clean and finished; all walls and

ledges shall be dusted; all plumbing fixtures shall be cleaned; all hardware shall be free of all

labels, paint, stains, dust, dirt, and the like; all marks, stains, fingerprints, other oil, and dirt

shall be removed from painted, decorated, or natural finish work and the building will be

ready for occupancy except for being further equipped by the Owner. In case of dispute, the

Owner may perform such cleaning up as may be required and charge the cost to the

Contractor.

GC 35. STATUTES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS

35.1 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal and

state statutes, rules, regulations, and directives of the State Department of Labor, Safety

Inspection Branch, or any other governmental body having jurisdiction over the work to be

performed. Should any of the provisions of the Contract Documents be in conflict therewith,

then that portion which is in conflict shall be considered stricken and the applicable statute,



ordinance, regulation, or ruling substituted therefor. All such cases of apparent conflict

coming to the attention of any party shall immediately be called to the attention of the

Owner. The Contractor shall strictly observe and comply with all federal and state laws

pertaining to the employment and payment of labor.

GC 36. SALES AND USE TAX

36.1 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to ascertain whether a sales or use

tax may be collectible on the purchase of building materials, supplies, and equipment used

for this project by the Contractor. Some cities and municipalities will charge a sales or use

tax on building materials, supplies, and equipment "picked up" and/or used within that city or

municipality by a contractor. Whenever possible, the Contractor shall have building

materials, supplies, and equipment for this project delivered to the construction site by

common carrier, conveyance by the seller, or by mail to avoid city or municipal sales and use

taxes for which refunds will not be made. The Owner is exempt from the payment of any

State sales and State use taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment used upon this project

by the Contractor and subcontractors. For the purpose of exercising such exemption, the

Contractor and all their subcontractors shall apply for and obtain a Certificate of Exemption

for the work from the Colorado Department of Revenue. A copy of such Certificates shall be

filed with the Owner before any materials are purchased or any work commenced hereunder.

GC 37. APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS

37.1 The Contractor will be held to have used in his base proposal and to furnish under the

Contract those items of equipment and/or materials which are specifically identified in the

specifications by a manufacturer's name, model, or catalog number. Items of equipment of

the Contractor's choice may be offered as alternates to the items named in the specifications

by submitting with the proposal and on the form provided, identifying data on the articles

proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid

if the bidder's alternate is accepted. Prior approval by the Architect is not required on items

submitted as alternate bids. After execution of the Contract, substitution of equipment and/or

materials of makes other than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be

approved by the Owner so long as the equipment or material proposed for substitution in the

opinion of the Owner is just as suitable as equipment and/or materials named in the

specifications so far as performance, construction, efficiency, and utility are concerned. A

request for substitution shall ordinarily be required to be based upon one or more of the

following grounds for justification: the submitted material is no longer available, a

substitution will improve lead time, quality will be improved (documented detail required),

or the Owner will incur substantial savings. All requests for substitution must be submitted

in writing with supporting documentation by or through the Contractor to the Architect for

initial review, before being submitted to the Owner for evaluation and final approval. In the

absence of the Owner's written approval, no substitution of materials or methods will be

allowed for any items specified in the Contract Documents.

37.2 In case of a difference in price, occurring as a result of an approved substitution, the

Owner shall receive all benefit of the difference in cost involved in the substitution. All



approved substitutions will be documented by the issuance of a formal change order as

provided in these General Conditions.

GC 38. OCCUPANCY

38.1 The Contractor, upon the Owner's written request, shall allow the Owner to occupy

portions of the work and to place and install, subject to reasonable restrictions, as much

equipment and furnishings during the progress of the work as is possible without interfering

with the progress of the work. Such occupancy and the placing or installing of equipment

and furnishings shall not in any way evidence the completion of the work or signify the

Owner's acceptance of the work, or any part of it. Equipment includes such things as kitchen

equipment, etc. Furnishings include such things as lockers, benches, desks, etc. Prior to

occupancy, when practicable, the Architect shall make a thorough inspection accompanied by

the Contractor's superintendent to note any defects in workmanship or materials which are

the responsibility of the Contractor. The provisions of the Article shall not be in limitation of

the Owner's rights set forth in GC 18, claims for extra cost or additional time, herein.

GC 39. DAMAGE TO UTILITIES

39.1 The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect existing utilities on and off

the site and avoid damage thereto. The Contractor shall repair or replace or have repaired or

replaced at their own expense any damage to streets, water, sewer, light, power, cable, or

telephone lines, damaged by reason of their work.

39.2 The location and extent of underground utilities and cables and conduit as indicated

on the drawings are not guaranteed. This information is shown only for such use as bidders

and Contractors may choose to make of it. All Contractors shall check with all public

utilities companies for locations and shall comply with their regulations regarding their

utilities in performing the work.

39.3 Active underground utilities shall be adequately protected from damage and if

damaged shall be immediately repaired. Removal or relocation of same shall be done only as

indicated on the drawings. If they are in use, they shall be maintained in continuous service.

If not indicated on the drawings or not known to exist, the Contractor shall report discovery

of such lines to the Architect and shall not proceed further until directed to do so.

39.4 Inactive or abandoned utilities, whether or not they are indicated on the drawings,

shall be recorded as to location and depth and shall be removed for a distance of not less that

three (3) feet from outside line of all concrete work unless otherwise required by regulations.

Ends shall be capped or plugged. There will be no adjustment of Contract amount for work

due to inactive or abandoned utilities.

GC 40. PROJECT SIGN

40.1 If required by the specifications, the Contractor shall provide a project sign. No other

advertising is permitted on the project site.



GC 41. BLASTING

41.1 No explosives of any nature except for those normally employed in powder actuated

tools, .38 caliber or smaller, shall be employed or used on any site except with the express

and specific prior written approval of the Architect and the Owner and any appropriate

governmental authorities, in each instance. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of need

for such approval three (3) days prior to the proposed use of such explosives.

GC 42. HISTORICAL DATA

42.1 In addition to warranties, guarantees, operating instructions, etc., elsewhere specified,

the Contractor, at the conclusion of the work and before final payment is made, shall furnish

a listing, giving principal's names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all subcontractors

and material suppliers who furnished labor or materials on the job with identification of the

services rendered. There shall be provided one (1) copy for the Architect and two (2) copies

for the Owner. All copies shall be delivered to the Architect for review and distribution.

GC 43. TESTING OF BUILDING SYSTEMS

43.1 The Contractor shall submit a written plan prior to completion and acceptance,

consistent with the Contract Documents and applicable codes, for the testing of all building

systems. All testing shall be of the complete system, before covering, or of individually

separable larger portions of the system and shall be performed in the presence of the

appropriate consultant and representative of the Owner. A written report shall be filed in the

office of Construction Management, Jefferson County School District No. R-1, recording

each test, and signed by such consultant.

GC 44. TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE

44.1 Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any mechanical device, machinery,

apparatus, equipment, or any work or material supplied under the Contract before final

completion and written acceptance by the Architect shall not be construed as evidence of the

Architect's or Owner's acceptance of same or the commencement of any warranty periods.

44.2 The Owner has the privilege of such temporary or trial usage, for such reasonable

time as the Owner and the Architect deem proper. The Contractor shall make no claim for

damage or injury to or breaking of any parts of such work which may be caused by weakness

or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective materials or workmanship. If the Contractor

so elects, they may, without cost to the Owner, make such trial usage. However, trials shall

only be conducted with the Architect's prior approval and under their observation.

44.3 When heating, air conditioning, ventilating, exhaust, or other items of electrical or

other equipment are installed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor installing such

equipment to operate it for a satisfactory period of time as required by the Architect for

proper testing of the equipment and instructing the Owner's operating personnel. All items of

equipment, testing meters, testing instruments, and incidentals required for proper testing and

for instructing the Owner's operating personnel, shall be provided by the Contractor

responsible for providing and installing the equipment.



GC 45. ASSIGNMENT

45.1 Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without

the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become

due to them hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner.

GC 46. SEPARATE CONTRACTS

46.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The

Contractor shall afford such other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and

storage of their materials and the execution of their work. The contractor shall properly

connect and coordinate their work with the work of other contractors.

46.2 If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the

work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner

through the Architect any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper

execution and results. His failure to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the

other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work, except as to defects

which may develop in the other contractor's work after the execution of his work.

46.3 To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work, the Contractor shall measure

work already in place and shall at once report to the Owner through the Architect any

discrepancy between the executed work and the drawings.

GC 47. CONTRACTORS' MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

47.1 The entire project may be covered by more than one contract and in such case there

will of necessity be a certain overlapping of contracts. Each contractor shall, therefore, take

due notice of the work called for in contracts other than their own. Should the Contractor

cause damage to any separate contractor on the work, the Contractor agrees, upon due notice,

to settle with such other separate contractor by agreement, if they will so settle. If such other

separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so

sustained, the Owner may notify the Contractor, who shall, at the Owner's option, defend

such proceedings at the Contractor's expense or reimburse the Owner for the expenses

incurred in defense, and, if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor

shall pay or satisfy it and pay all costs and expenses thereby incurred by the Owner.

GC 48. LIENS

48.1 It is hereby mutually understood by and between the parties hereto that no Contractor,

subcontractor, materialman, vendor, laborer, mechanic, or other person, can or will contract

for or in any other manner have or acquire any lien upon the building or works covered by

this Contract, or the land upon which the same is situated.



GC 49. WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

49.1 In addition to all other requirements of the Contract Documents, if the work involves

an addition to an existing building, the Contractor shall erect and maintain during the

progress of the work, suitable dustproof partitions to protect such building and the occupants

thereof. If necessary, in the Owner's or Contractor's judgment or pursuant to manufacturer's

directives or recommendations in order to protect occupants from noxious fumes, odors, or

hazardous substances, the Contractor may be required to provide additional ventilation

and/or work different or extended hours to avoid disruption to other activities within the

existing building.

49.2 If any portions of an existing building are to be remodeled or repaired, such portions

shall be adequately partitioned off with dustproof partitions and well ventilated. All

remodeling work shall be scheduled and submitted to the Owner and Architect for approval.

The various contractors shall schedule their work jointly, in order that each may accomplish

their work within such existing building in an orderly fashion during regular school vacation

periods, where possible, or in such a manner as to permit full use of the building and without

impairment of any existing facilities.

GC 50. INDEMNIFICATION

50.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the

Owner and the Architect and their agents and employees harmless from and against all

claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting

from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss, or expense

(a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of

tangible property, including the work itself and including the loss of use resulting therefrom,

and (b) only to the extent that it is caused in whole or in part by any negligent or intentional

act or omission or breach of contract of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

This specific indemnification by the Contractor is in addition to and not in lieu of other

remedies which may be available to the Owner.

50.2 The obligations of the Contractor under this Article shall not extend to and will be

reduced by the liability of the Architect or the Architect's Consultants to the extent directly

attributable to and proximately caused by (A) the negligent preparation or approval of

drawings or specifications, or (B) errors or omissions in written directions or instructions

given by the Architect or the Architect's Consultants.

GC 51. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION

51.1 It is understood and agreed that completion of the entire project within the time stated

in the Contract Agreement is a matter of vital necessity to the Owner, that the Owner will

suffer substantial damages if the entire project is not completed within that time, and that it

would not be possible to accurately determine the amount of such damages. In view of these

facts, the Contractor agrees to pay the Owner liquidated damages in the sum $1,000 per

calendar day or the amount as modified in any supplemental general conditions, if any, which

elapses between the date stated in the Construction Agreement, as extended by any



extensions of time under the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract, and the

date when the entire project is finally accepted within the meaning of the acceptance and

Final Payment provision of the General Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor shall

fail to pay such liquidated damages promptly upon demand therefor, the surety on his

performance bond shall pay such damages. Also, the Owner may withhold all or any part of

such liquidated damages from any payments due the Contractor. No changes in the work

shall extend the time for completion unless set forth on a properly approved change order.

GC 52. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

52.1 Within a reasonable time after final completion of the work and before final

acceptance thereof, a final inspection shall be made by the Architect accompanied by the

Owner to determine whether the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract

Documents. A written Report of Inspection and detailed "punch list," certified as to contents

and date of inspection, shall be completed by the Owner and the Architect and delivered or

mailed to the Contractor.

52.2 All prior Requests for Payment shall be subject to correction in the final Request for

Payment. When all work, including the punch list, has been certified by the Architect as

finally and satisfactorily completed, and approved by the authorized representative of the

Owner, it shall be deemed accepted as of the date of the issuance of the Owner's Letter of

Acceptance.

52.3 Upon submission of the final Request for Payment, the time of final settlement for the

work shall be established and shall, thereafter, be advertised by two (2) publications of

notice, the last of which shall appear at least ten (10) days prior to the time of final

settlement. Final payment and settlement shall be made at the time of final settlement as

advertised, or as soon thereafter as appropriate and practicable, in the judgment of the

Owner, after resolution of claims and set-offs.

52.4 Neither the final payment nor any part of any sums withheld shall become due until

the Contractor delivers to the Owner verified documentation showing full payment for all

labor, materials, supplies, and equipment expended upon or incorporated in the work under

the Contractor's Contract with the Owner. If any unpaid claim for such labor, materials,

supplies, or equipment is filed with the Owner before payment in full of all sums due the

Contractor, the Owner shall withhold from the final payment sufficient funds, if available, to

provide for the payment of such claim, until the same shall have been paid or withdrawn.

Such payment or withdrawal shall be evidenced by filing with the Owner a receipt in full or

an order authorizing withdrawal signed by the claimant or their duly authorized agent or

assignee. Such funds shall ordinarily not be withheld longer than ninety (90) days following

the date fixed for final settlement with the Contractor, as set forth in the published Notice of

Contractor's Settlement, unless an action has been commenced within that time to enforce

such unpaid claim and a Notice of Lis Pendens has been filed with the Owner.

52.5 If any claim for such labor, materials, supplies, or equipment remains unsatisfied after

all payments are made by the Owner to the Contractor, the Contractor shall refund to the

Owner all sums which the latter may for any reason be compelled to pay to satisfy such

claim, including all costs and attorneys' fees incurred by the Owner as a result of the

Contractor's default in such respect.



52.6 The making and acceptance of the final payment shall not constitute a waiver of any

claims by the Owner, including, among other things, those arising from unpaid claims, from

faulty work which appears before or after final payment, or from any failure to comply with

any requirements of the Contract Documents.


furnish a listing, giving names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all subcontractors and

material suppliers who furnished labor or materials on the project with identification of the

services rendered or materials provided.


furnish to the District a list itemizing all kitchen equipment with associated cost that was

installed in the Project.

GC 53. WARRANTIES ON PORTIONS OF THE WORK

53.1 The Contractor shall, in case of work performed or materials or equipment provided

for which warranties are required by the Contract Documents, secure the required warranties

and deliver copies thereof to the Architect and the Owner upon completion of the work. All

such warranties shall commence from the date set forth in the Letter of Acceptance and will

not in any way reduce the Contractor's responsibilities under his Contract. Whenever

guarantees or warranties are required by the specifications for a longer period than one year,

such longer period shall govern.

GC 54. CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT GUARANTEE AFTER

COMPLETION

54.1 The Contractor expressly warrants and guarantees that the project will be constructed

in a first-class, workmanlike manner; that it will be safe, free from structural and

workmanship defects and defects in materials; and that the improvements will be suitable

and fit for occupancy and for the purpose for which they were intended.

54.2 Neither the Architect's approval of the final Request for Payment nor payment of any

Request for Payment or of any sum previously withheld from the Contractor shall relieve the

Contractor of responsibility for the warranty and guarantee hereunder or for faulty materials

or workmanship, and, unless otherwise agreed, they unconditionally agrees to remedy any

defects due thereto, and pay for any damages resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a

period of one (1) years from the date set forth in the Letter of Acceptance of his work.

54.3 The Owner, the Architect, and the Contractor together shall make one (1) complete

inspection of the work after the work has been accepted by the Architect and the Owner. The

inspection shall be made approximately eleven (11) months after the final acceptance of the

work. The Architect shall make a written report of the inspection, certified as to contents and

date of inspection, and forward the report by mail to the Owner and the Contractor within

seven (7) days after completion of the inspection. The Contractor shall immediately initiate

such remedial work as may be necessary to correct any deficiencies or defective work shown

by this report, and shall complete all such remedial work within 30 calendar days in a manner

acceptable to the Owner.

54.4 If the Contractor fails to promptly correct all deficiencies and defects shown by the

report, the Owner may do so, after giving the Contractor ten (10) days' written notice of



intention to do so. The Owner shall be entitled to collect from the Contractor all costs and

expenses incurred in correcting such deficiencies and defects, as well as all damages

resulting from such deficiencies and defects. The guarantee and warranties of the Contractor

provided for herein are in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to the

Owner.

GC 55. LIMITATION OF ACTIONS AND VENUE

55.1 Any actions against the Contractor, his subcontractors, suppliers, or others providing

materials or services for the project, brought to recover damages for injury to person, damage

to property, including loss or damage to the property or the project itself, or defects in

materials caused by the design, manufacture, supplying, planning, supervision, inspection,

construction, or observation of construction of the project shall be brought within six (6)

years after such claim for relief arises and the nature and extent are fully discovered.

55.2 In no case shall such an action be brought more than ten (10) years after the final

completion and acceptance of the project; provided, however, that in any case where the

cause of action arises during the tenth year, such action shall be brought within six (6) years

after such cause of action arises and the nature and extent are fully discovered by the Owner.

55.3 All claims and disputes arising out of and relating to this Agreement shall be resolved

by litigation. Venue shall lie exclusively in the Jefferson County District Court, State of

Colorado.

GC 56. SOIL TEST REPORT

56.1 The Owner may arrange for a separate consultant to conduct field and laboratory soil

investigations on the site and to prepare a report of the findings. Such reports, if

accomplished, will be available for review by the Contractor in the Architect's office. Such

data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Contract

Documents. The data contained in any such document prepared for the Owner by a separate

consultant is believed to be reliable; however, the Owner and Architect do not guarantee its

accuracy or completeness. All applicable subcontractors shall be fully familiar with the

contents of such reports, if prepared, and shall consider and evaluate them in the performance

of their contracts.

GC 57. EXPEDITING MATERIALS

57.1 Each Contractor shall, immediately after receipt of Notice of Contract Award and

approval of his list of subcontractors and material suppliers, place orders for all equipment,

materials, and supplies required for the work. He shall, when requested, submit to the

Architect evidence that such orders have been placed. The Contractor shall exercise due

diligence in seeing that all equipment, materials, and supplies are delivered well in advance

of the time they are needed on the job; and they shall properly store and protect same at their

expense and in accordance with these General Conditions, either at the site or elsewhere as

approved by the Architect.



GC 58. MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES, ETC.

58.1 Except as otherwise specifically required by the Project Technical Specifications at

the completion of the project, all loose keys for hose bibs, adjustment keys and wrenches for

door closers and panic hardware, keys for electric switches, electrical panels, and all other

equipment shall be identified and accounted for and turned over to the Architect for

transmittal to the Owner.

GC 59. PREFERENCE FOR COLORADO LABOR, MATERIALS, AND

RESIDENT BIDDERS

59.1 In compliance with Colorado Revised Statutes Sections 8-17-101 and -102 (1973),

preference shall be given to Colorado labor in the several classifications of skilled and

common labor, and not less than eighty percent (80%) of each type or class of labor in the

several classifications of skilled and common labor employed shall be Colorado labor. The

term "Colorado labor" means any person who is a resident of the State of Colorado at the

time of employment, without discrimination as to race, creed, color, sex, age, religion,

national origin, or disability, except when age or sex is a bona fide occupational

qualification.

59.2 In compliance with Colorado Revised Statutes Section 8-18-101 (1973), if any of the

work includes a contract for commodities and services, preference shall be given to a resident

bidder (as defined in GC 59 below) against a nonresident bidder equal to the preference

given or required by the state in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.

59.3 In compliance with Colorado Revised Statutes, Sections 8-19-101 and -102 (1985),

preference shall be given to resident bidders against nonresident bidders from a state or

foreign country equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in

which the nonresident bidder is a resident. The term "resident bidder" means a person,

partnership, corporation, or joint venture which is (a) authorized to transact business in

Colorado and which maintains its principal place of business in Colorado; or (b) authorized

to transact business in Colorado, which maintains a place of business in Colorado, and which

has paid Colorado unemployment compensation taxes in at least seventy-five percent (75%)

of the eight (8) quarters immediately prior to bidding on the work.

GC 60. LABOR DISPUTES

60.1 Notwithstanding any other provision contained elsewhere herein and superseding any

contrary term expressed herein, the Contractor agrees that in the event of any picket or other

form of labor dispute at the construction site, whether such dispute or picket is in connection

with the Contractor, subcontractor, or any other person or entity on the construction site, the

Contractor will continue to perform the work required herein without interruption or delay.

In the event the Contractor fails to continue the performance of the work included herein,

without interruption or delay, because of such picket or other form of labor dispute, the

Owner may terminate the services of the Contractor after giving seventy-two (72) hours'

written notice of intent to do so. The terminated Contractor may then be replaced at the

discretion of the Owner and all extra costs involved in doing so shall be payable by the

terminated Contractor.



60.2 During the performance of the work required by the Contract Documents, the

Contractor and his subcontractors and their employees, agents, or suppliers, will use such

entrance or entrances to the construction site as may be designated from time to time by the

Owner. Further, the Contractor and his subcontractors, their employees and agents, shall

perform the work at such times of the day and days of the week as may be designated by the

Owner from time to time.

GC 61. LABOR, WORKMANSHIP, AND SCHOOL SECURITY

61.1 All work performed under this contract shall be performed in a professional and

skillful like manner. The District may require that the Contractor immediately remove from

the construction site any employee the District or on-site school personnel deem to be

incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.

61.2 The Contractor shall not utilize, in the performance of this contract, any laborer or

employee who has been convicted of a violent crime or a crime of such nature (i.e. child

related offenses) as to categorize the person as being unsuitable for working around school

children, or has engaged in such conduct, in the last five years, as to be similarly categorized.

Suitability shall be determined by performance of security/background checks (as are

necessary in light of the potential of contact with school students, staff, property, or sensitive

records maintained at school sites) by the Contractor on all laborers and employees utilized

in the performance of the work.

61.2.1 When there is reasonable doubt regarding a particular person’s suitability, a request

may be made through the District for an approval/opinion prior to the individual

beginning work. The Contractor shall submit copies of all security/background checks

performed within twenty-four (24) hours of a request by the District for such information.

The District may request copies of these security/background checks up to twelve (12)

months after completion of the specific project (site work). Failure to complete or

submit any required security/background check requested by the District, may result in

immediate cancellation of work in process and/or removal from the active vendor and

bidders list for up to one year.

61.3 The Contractor, its laborers and employees shall not fraternize or otherwise

communicate with the students except in cases of safety and like necessities.

61.4 The Contractor shall not allow any laborer or employee to wear objectionable

clothing or caps with other than company logo, (objectionable clothing will be determined by

the District personnel), or use profanity in any manner while on school property.

61.5 The Contractor shall ensure that its laborers and employees fully comply with all

school policies/regulations pertaining to restrictions that may affect anyone on school owned

property. Examples of these current policies/regulations are:

61.5.1 Each worker shall participate in the contractors approved identification program.

61.5.2 Maintain professional worker like attire (see GC 61).

61.5.3 Controlled substances (i.e. tobacco, alcohol, illegal drugs, dangerous substances) are

not allowed on the school/construction site. (Board Policy)

61.5.4 Possession of any weapon, including a pocketknife, which is not directly used as a

tool for the work in progress is not allowed on the school/construction site.

61.5.5 Verification of Criminal Records for all employees who work on site per GC 10.



61.6 Removal of a specific person(s) from a project as a result of any condition mentioned

above will not relieve the Contractor from timely performance of work completion and will

not be considered grounds for a request for additional funds or time extension to complete

the project.

61.7 The contractor shall take over and assume all responsibility for the entire premises,

provide and maintain all protection as required by the governing laws, rules, regulations and

ordinances. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage caused by its

workers to the property of the District and shall make good any loss, damage, or injury

without cost to the owner, subject to the Builder’s Rick Coverages.

61.7.1 Except as otherwise provided in the General Conditions, the Contractor shall be

solely responsible for the safety of its work, materials, equipment, tools, etc., on the site

and shall, if it deems it necessary or expedient, employ at its own expense the services of

a competent security service. The District disclaims all responsibilities for the safety of

the work, materials, equipment, tools, etc., or for any damage, which may be done to

same due to theft, or any other cause until such time as the owner formally accepts the

completed work.

61.7.2 The Contractor shall take special precautions against fire and shall comply fully with

the requirements of city, county, and insurance authorities including stipulation as

outlined below:

61.7.2.1 Combustible refuse shall be removed from the site and disposed of daily in a

manner approved by the governing authorities.

61.7.2.2 Private and public streets, sidewalks, roads, etc., shall be protected and

maintained during the course of work, and any damage to same shall be repaired by

the Contractor at its own expense.

61.7.2.3 Gas line and Boiler work.

61.7.2.4 The Contractor will not do any work on gas lines on or near the building

while the building is occupied.

61.7.2.5 No work on the boilers, furnaces, or gas lines will be done without prior

notification and approval of the Construction Management department.

61.7.2.6 Boilers and furnaces will not be turned on or off by any Contractor without

prior notification and approval of the Construction Management department.

61.7.2.7 When boilers or furnaces are to be turned on or off, the District Maintenance

department will be notified and the appropriate personnel will be dispatched to carry

out the necessary procedures.

61.7.2.8 The Contractor will be required to accept full responsibility of the keys as

issued for access. The contractor will be financially liable for the replacement of lost

keys as well as the re-keying of the building to which the keys belong. Contractor

agrees to report lost or stolen keys immediately to the District Security office. Keys

are NOT TO BE DUPLICATED under any circumstances, and Contractor

understands that keys must be surrendered immediately upon request.

61.8 Illegal Aliens. The Contractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal

alien to perform work under this Contract, or enter into a contract with a subcontractor that

fails to certify to the Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or

contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this public contract.

61.8.1 The Contractor has verified or attempted to verify through participation in the United

States Citizenship and Immigration Services’ Basic Pilot Employment Verification



Program (hereinafter referred to as the “Basic Pilot Program”) that the Contractor does

not employ any illegal aliens. If the Contractor has not been accepted into the Basic Pilot

Program prior to entering into this Contract, the Contractor shall apply to participate in

the Basic Pilot Program every three months until the Contractor is accepted or the

Contract for services has been completed, whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall not

use the Basic Pilot Program to undertake pre-employment screening of job applicants

while the Contract is being performed.

61.8.2 If the Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a subcontractor performing work

under this Contract knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien, the Contractor

shall:

61.8.2.1 Notify the subcontractor and the Owner within three days that the Contractor

has actual knowledge that the subcontractor is employing or contracting with an

illegal alien; and

61.8.2.2 Terminate the subcontract if within three days of receiving actual notice the

subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien, except

that the Contractor shall not terminate the subcontractor if during such three days the

subcontractor provides information to establish that the subcontractor has not

knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien.

61.8.3 The Contractor shall comply with any reasonable request by the Department of Labor

and Employment (hereinafter referred to as the “Department”) made in the course of an

investigation that the Department is undertaking pursuant to C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102(5).

61.8.4 If the Contractor violates the provisions of this section GC 61, the Owner may

terminate the contract for breach and the Contractor shall be liable for actual and

consequential damages.

GC 62. END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

4821-6632-7816, v. 1

M&A SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS


SECTION 00 73 00 –SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the “General Conditions of the Contract,” Jefferson County School District No. R-1, current edition date. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. Revised Articles, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs, and Clauses shall have the same numerical designations occurring in the General Conditions. Added Articles, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs, and Clauses will follow in numbered sequence.

G.C. 51.00 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION

Add the following: The Bid Form contains a blank to fill in for the Completion Date. Bidders are required to fill in the blank for Completion Date. The Completion Date included on the Bid Form will be included as criteria in the Award of the Contract by the Owner. The following Liquidated Damages provisions apply to this particular project: TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES. The Owner desires the work to be fully completed by: August 01, 2016, , the Stipulated Completion Date. The contractor agrees to pay the Owner liquidated damages in the sum of: $ 500. per school, per calendar date for delay in completion beyond the Stipulated Completion date. This date becomes the start date for liquidated damages base on Provisions of Acceptance within the meaning of the acceptance and Final Payment provision of the General Conditions of the Contract.

The Stipulated Completion Date applies to the entire project, with or without alternates or unit prices, whichever is the greater quantity of work.

Limits to Construction Schedule: Adams ES, Rooney Ranch ES and West Jefferson ES

1. Work may not commence until June 01, 2016. 2. Work in areas noted “coordinate with other contractors” may commence only

according to written schedules coordinated through the Owner. 3. All work shall be at final completion by August 01, 2016.


M&A SUMMARY OF WORK


SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Project is titled: TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF THREE SCHOOL

SITES. 1. Project Location: Three Elementary School Locations.

Adams ES: 6450 West 95th Place, Westminster, Colorado 80030

Rooney Ranch ES: 2200 South Coors Street, Lakewood, Colorado 80228 West Jefferson ES: 26501 Barkley Road, Conifer, Colorado 80433 2. Owner: Jefferson County School District No. R-1.

B. Contract Documents, dated: April 19, 2016 were prepared for the project by: Mellin & Associates Architects, P.C. and it’s consultants. C. The Work consists of:

1. Site and Related Utility work associated with two incoming modulars at three school sites. (Refer to drawings for each school site and related set of project specifications for both school sites for all related information.)

D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.

E. Compliance with all applicable codes and ordinances. F. Structural, Mechanical Plumbing, Electrical, Fire Alarm, and IT/Data Coordination. 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The Work will be conducted in two phases:

1. Construction: A. Start Construction: June 01, 2016 B. Final Completion: August 01,2016

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have partial use of the

site as the work relates to each phase.


M&A UNIT PRICES


SECTION 01 22 00 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections: The following Section contain requirements that relate to this

Section: Division 00 41 00 Bid Form: Label corresponding unit prices on Bid Form

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per

unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,

overhead, profit, and applicable taxes. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that

requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections.

C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place

that involves use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor.

D. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. Specification

Section referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE

None at this time END OF SECTION 01 22 00

M&A ALTERNATES


SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing

Alternates. Indicate price for each of the listed alternates on the Bid Form. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form

for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the

Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and

fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and

similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party

involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this

Contract. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section.

Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate.

M&A ALTERNATES


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:

Add Alternate #1: None at this time. END OF SECTION 01 23 00

M&A CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


SECTION 01 26 00 – CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and

processing contract modifications, including field orders, Architect’s supplemental instructions, directives, interpretations. All items must be by written direction, only. RFIs by contractor are required and must be written only.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction

Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for administrative procedures

governing Applications for Payment. 3. Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for

handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 4. General Conditions 17. of the Contract. 5. Division 1, Section 01 62 00 Product Options.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the

Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time on Architect's Supplemental Instruction form.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Architect will issue a detailed description of

proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not

consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 20 days of receipt of a proposal request, submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change to the Architect for the Owner's review.

M&A CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


a. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforseen conditions require

modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the

change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the

terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the

change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work

required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change

Order on Jeffferson County School District, R-1 Standard form for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor.


M&A PAYMENT PROCEDURES


SECTION 01 29 00 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions 23.00

and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the

Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.

2. Three documents comprise the payment application. They are the payment application cover sheet, sub/supplier payment record and the Jefferson County School District, R-1 standard payment application itself. Coordinate all items with the General Conditions 24.00, as it will take precedence over all procedures.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section. 1. Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are

specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals." 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of

the Contractor's Construction Schedule. B. Coordination: Each prime Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of

Values for its part of the Work with preparation of the Contractors' Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative

schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of allowances. e. Schedule of alternates.



f. List of products. g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. h. Schedule of submittals.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but

no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.

3. Sub schedules: Schedule of Values shall be broken down by each site. C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish

the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of

Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to

indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent,

adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate

continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing. Refer to General Conditions for related information concerning off-site storage of materials, etc.



6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the Contract Documents.

8. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of

actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the

next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and

payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Final

Completion, and the two separate Final Applications for Payment involve additional requirements. Refer to General conditions 23.00 for all related information on correct procedures.

B. Payment-Application Times: Each progress-payment date is indicated in the

Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment-Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 15th day of

each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days prior to the date for each progress payment.

D. Payment-Application Forms: Use forms provided by Jefferson County School District,

R-1 for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included at the end of this Section.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and

execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.



1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for

Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copies shall be complete, including cover sheets and sub/supplier payment records. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording

appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

G. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of

mechanics lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

H. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of

mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction

for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work

must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's

waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application. a. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers

from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner,

acceptable to the Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment: Refer to Gernal Conditions 23.00 for procedure

information. Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. Copies of permits from governing authorities for performance of the Work. 7. digital photographic documentation of all existing conditions.



J. Application for Payment at “100 % Completion” Payment Application: Coordinate all items with General Conditions 23.00. Following issuance of the Certificate of 100% Final Completion, submit an Application for Payment. 1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Final Completion issued previously for

Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this

application include: a. All required paperwork to apply for Certificate of Occupancy, b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Operation & Maintenance Manuals. e. Startup performance reports. f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. g. Final cleaning. h. Final progress photographs. i. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate

of Final Completion. K. “Final Retention” Payment Application: Coordinate all items with General Conditions

23.00. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Final Completion. 3. Ensure that incomplete Work that has been accepted will be completed without

undue delay. 4. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 5. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01 29 00

For District use only:

Current T.E. to Date

Previous T.E. to Date

Current Total Ret.

Previous total Ret.

Earned This Period

Retainage This Period + -

Check Amount

to

1. $

2. $

a. ($ 0.00 )

b. ($ 0.00 )

3. $

4. ($ )

5. $

PO #:

Address:

Signature DateVoucher No.

Retainage:

PO:

Executive Director:

C.O.O. (>$100k):

Date

Date

Signature

Signature

Consultants Name:

Jefferson County School District No. R-1Department of Planning & Construction

809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215

Payment No.:

Proj Name:

Type of Service:Billing Period:

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT OF CONTRACTORDate:

Contractor:

Less Contract Retainage……………………………..

Total Earned Less Retained..............................................................................................................

Less Total Previous Payments.................…………………………………………………………

Amount DUE THIS PAYMENT................…………………………………………………………….

Less Other Amounts Retained.....................................

0.00

0.00

Title :

Consultants Firm : Date:

Signature

I certify that all items and amounts on the attached estimate and schedules are correct; that the work for which payment is

claimed has been performed and materials supplied in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and

approved changes; and that all amounts have been paid for the work and materials for which previous Applications for

Payment were issued and payments received from the School District.

Contractor's Certificate

Date :

Contractor's Name :

Project Manager :For District use only: FUNDING

Proj ID #:

Total Contract To Date With Adjustments……………………………………………………….

Total Earned To Date…………………………………………………………………………………

Signature

Consultant's CertificateI certify that the work for which payment is claimed has been reviewed by me based upon site observations and the

information provided with this Application for Payment; that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief the progress

of the work is accurately stated, the work has been performed in compliance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents and the Contractor is now entitled to payment in the amount he has certified.

Revised: 1/24/2015

Revised: 1/24/2015

M&A PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATIOIN


SECTION 01 31 00 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2.1 SUMMARY A. Bidding Documents and Information, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 –

General Requirements apply in the Work of this Section of this Specification. B. Section Includes:

1. Mechanical and Electrical Coordination PART 2 PRODUCTS – Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 23 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule.

B. Schedule (by Division):

Item Furnished Set in

place

Power

wiring

Control

wiring

Equipment Motors 23 23 26

Starter/Connectors: Separate 23 26 26 23

Starter/connectors: Factory mounted and wired 23 23 26 23

Pushbutton stations: Separate 23 26 26 23

Pushbutton stations: In station enclosures 23 26 26 23

Disconnect switches 26 26 26

Thermal Overload switches 26 26 26

Manual operating switches 26 26 26

Control relays 23 23 23

Control Transformers 23 26 26 23

Line voltage thermostat 23 23 26 23

Low voltage thermostat 23 23 23

Sub base low voltage 23 23 23

Time switches not in control panel 23 23 26 23

T-stat and control integral with equipment of directly attached

to ducts, pipes, etc. 23 23 23

Equipment in temperature control panels 23 23 23

Valve motors, damper motors, solenoid valves, etc. 23 23 23

M&A PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATIOIN


Control circuit outlets 26 26 26

Smoke detectors including relays for fan control 26 26 26 23

Equipment interlocks 23 23 23

C. Control Wiring

1. Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc. and wiring for valve and damper operators.

2. For single-phase devices where power current passes through controller, wiring between controller and device shall be considered power wiring.


M&A CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


SECTION 01 32 00 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project

meetings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Preconstruction conferences. 2. Preinstallation conferences. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Coordination meetings.


Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project

meetings with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting the Contractor's Construction

Schedule. 3. Division 7 Section "Membrane Roofing" for preinstallation roofing conferences.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Owner shall schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a

time and location convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.



C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 1. Construction schedule. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Designation of responsible personnel. 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 6. Distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 8. Preparation of record documents. 9. Use of the premises. 10. Parking availability. 11. Office, work, and storage areas. 12. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 13. Safety procedures. 14. First aid. 15. Security. 16. Housekeeping. 17. Working hours.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction

activity that requires coordination with other construction. B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators

involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials.



o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations. s. Safety. t. Inspecting and testing requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection.

2. Generall Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements and

disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect.

3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner

and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.

B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, the General

Contractor concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: General Contractor shall review and correct or approve minutes of the

previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Time. c. Sequences. d. Status of submittals. e. Deliveries.



f. Off-site fabrication problems. g. Access. h. Site utilization. i. Temporary facilities and services. j. Hours of work. k. Hazards and risks. l. Housekeeping. m. Quality and work standards. n. Change Orders. o. Documentation of information for payment requests.

D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, General Contractor shall distribute

minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Jefferson County School District, R-1 agenda format shall be followed. 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. General Contractor shall conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals

convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings.

B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in

coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. General Contracator shall record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in

attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. END OF SECTION 01 32 00

MEETING DATE:

LOCATION:

PROGRESS MEETING # :

PROJECT I D #

PRESENT AT MEETING : PERSONNEL ON SITE :

NAME - FIRM SUB / VENDOR - No. OF PEOPLE

Distribution of Meeting Minutes:

All Attending Meeting

Others:

DATE: 01/00/00 LOCATION: 0

ResponsibilityDue

Date

Last

Modified

1 . Previous minutes approved as written :

a.

2 . Review of construction progress since last meeting

a.

3 . Field Observations, Problems, Conflicts

a) Problems needing Contractor ATTENTION :

1.

b) Problems needing Architect / Consultant ATTENTION:

1.

JEFFERSON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215 / (303) 982-2584

Department of Construction Management

JOB SITE MEETING MINUTES OUTLINE

Summary of Meeting

01 91 Jobsite Meeting Minutes Outline1 1 of 3


ResponsibilityDue

Date

Last

ModifiedSummary of Meeting

c) Problems needing District's ATTENTION:

1.

d) Site Stormwater Management or Environmental Problems needing ATTENTION:

1.

4 . Review of Construction Schedule:

a) Planned progress for next peroid:

1.

b) Areas / Trades which are behind Schedule:

1.

c) Areas / Trades which are ahead of Schedule:

1.

5 . Potential Problems which might IMPEDE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE:

a.

6 . Corrective measure required to regain Schedule:

a.



ResponsibilityDue

Date

Last

ModifiedSummary of Meeting

7 . Review of Submittal Schedule:

a.

8 . Review of Off Site Fabrication and Delivery Schedule:

a,

9 . Maintenance of Quality Standards:

a.

10 . Review of Proposed Changes and Change Orders:

a.

11 . Others:

a.

All meeting minutes items are considered correct and accurate unless the author is notified in

writing within 10 days

AUTHOR:

Prepared by


M&A SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals

required for performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule.. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. 6. Quality assurance submittals.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract

Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Applications for Payment. 2. Performance and payment bonds. 3. Insurance certificates. 4. List of subcontractors.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for

submittal of the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 13, 22, 23, and 26 Sections "Mechanical, Electrical and Controls

Specifications,” specifies requirements governing preparation and submittal of required Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and distribution of meeting and conference minutes.

4. Division 1 Section "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports.

5. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout.



1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,

coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance

of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the

Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 3. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time

required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must

delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial

submittal. c. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to

transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for

identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block

on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.

2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of the Architect. d. Name and address of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the subcontractor. f. Name and address of the supplier.



g. Name of the manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. 1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the

form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Project Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, CPM construction schedule. Submit

within 10 days after the date established for "Commencement of the Work." 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a

continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."

2. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.

3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.

4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.

5. Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other schedules.

6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

B. Phasing: On the schedule, show how requirements for phased completion to permit

Work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner affect the sequence of Work.

C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the

Work, including submittal review, testing, and installation.



D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other activities.

E. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to

the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

F. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where

revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare

a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values,

and the list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:

a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal. g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.

B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to

the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where

revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS



A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or

otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.

B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams,

schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit

Shop Drawings (CAD generated plots are preferred) on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.

8. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 blue- or black-line prints for the Architect's review. The Architect will return one print.

10. Submittal: Submit 3 blue- or black-line prints and 2 additional prints where required for maintenance manuals, plus the number of prints needed by the Architect for distribution. The Architect will retain 2 prints and return the remainder. a. One of the prints returned shall be marked up and maintained as a

"Record Document." 11. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action

taken. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or

system. Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product

Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements.



2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract

Documents has been confirmed. 3. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where

required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required.

5. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the

Installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with

construction. 1.9 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the

material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 1. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.

Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following: a. Specification Section number and reference. b. Generic description of the Sample. c. Sample source. d. Product name or name of the manufacturer. e. Compliance with recognized standards. f. Availability and delivery time.

2. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit

Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent

in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.



d. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion.

3. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship,

fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets. The Architect will return one set marked with the action taken.

4. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction.

B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors,

manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,

coatings, or finish materials and to establish the Project standard. a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process

transmittal forms to provide a record of activity. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's

instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a

product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other

individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test

reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."

1.11 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required,

the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp.

The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:



1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved,"

the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved,

Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender

without action. 1.12 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 - Administratvie Provisions B. Section 01 - Quality Control C. Section 01 - Material and Equipment D. Section 01 - Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 01 33 00

M&A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


SECTION 01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING

A. General

1. General Contractors: a. Provide all temporary facilities and controls.

B. Temporary Lighting:

1. Each Contractor: Provide plug-in portable lights as required for task lighting.

C. Use of Permanent Systems:

1. After work is completed to extent that permanent electric service into building is installed and permanent outlets are available, permanent system may be used as necessary for power and light.

2. Permanent branch circuit wiring may be used to supply pigtail lights if protected by properly sized circuit breaker or fuse. Do not use permanent receptacles for construction power.

3. Each Contractor: a. Be responsible for damage to permanent wiring or fixtures as result of

temporary use. b. Replace receptacles and device plates showing wear of abuse.

4. Division 16 Contractor: a. Provide lamps necessary to temporarily light work in permanently installed

fixtures. b. Clean permanently installed light fixtures, which are used for temporary

lighting during construction using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

1.2 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Toilet Facilities: Provide and maintain in neat and sanitary condition, adequate chemical toilet facilities for use of employees engaged on work, in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, laws and ordinances. GC not allowed to use any school’s restrooms.

1.3 FIELD OFFICE AND OTHER TEMPORARY STRUCTURES



A. Temporary Structures: Provide temporary structures and storage areas as required to accommodate work. 1. Remove offices and other temporary structures from site upon completion of work. 2. Locate on site in orderly manner, coordinate location with owner prior to installation.

1.4 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for protection of public and general

protection of workmen on project. 1. Provide warning signs against hazards created by such items as protruding nails,

hoists, well holes, window openings, stairways and falling materials. a. Danger Lights: Keep lighted each night from sundown to sunrise.

2. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers and active fire hydrants where required. Maintain fire lanes to hydrants and other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction.

3. Provide temporary walks, roadways, trench covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger lights and signals, etc. required for work by applicable safety laws and building codes.

4. Maintain temporary protective facilities in good condition throughout term of work. Remove at completion of work. Repair and replace work damaged by temperate protective facilities.

1.5 SCAFFOLDING AND RUNWAYS

A. Scaffolding: Provide as necessary for work. B. Runways, GuardRails, Platforms and Similar Temporary Construction: Provide and

maintain for safe performance of contract. 1. Provide facilities of type and arrangement as required for their specific use,

substantially constructed, strongly supported, and well secured. 2. Comply with applicable safety laws and codes.

1.6 CLOSURES

A. Temporary Closures: Erect over openings when weather conditions render such action necessary for proper installation of work.

1.7 PROTECTION FOR WORK IN PLACE

A. Work in place: When subject to injury because of operation being carried on adjacent, cover, board up, or substantially enclose with adequate protection. 1. Block and board heads, jambs and sills of permanent openings used as

thoroughfares for introduction of work and materials.



2. Construct forms of protection in manner that, upon completion, entire work will be delivered to Owner in undamaged condition.

1.8 ACCESS

A. Limit access to necessary routes to perform the work. The construction access plan is to be reviewed by the Owner at the preconstruction meeting.

B. Maintain access roads so construction is not interrupted.

1.9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances and regulations. B. Noise: Minimize noise near residential areas. Properly muffle equipment. Do not operate

noisy equipment after 7:00 pm or before 7:00 am. hours.

C. Dust: Control when construction procedures result in dust, which becomes nuisance to Owner, private property of traffic. Water: Control flow of water at site to prevent damage to Owner’s private and public facilities.

D. Debris: Continually police work to prevent collection and scattering of debris uncovered,

loosened, or caused by prosection of work.

E. Pollution: Take precautions to prevent spilling and littering of water pollution substances. Do not dump any foreign materials into sever and storm sever collection systems. 1. Burning of debris or any other air polluting methods or equipment not allowed.

F. Erosion : Provide facilities necessary to prevent erosive damage to Owner’s property and to adjacent properties. Comply with Erosion Control Plan.

G. Public Streets: Clean dirt and mud caused by construction operation from public streets.

1.10 CLEAN UP

A. General: Maintain project and site in clean and orderly condition. Daily clean interior areas. Regularly remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site.

B. Interior Areas: Clean prior to start of finish work and continue cleaning as required.

Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particles will not adhere to newly coated surfaces.

C. Final Cleaning: See Section 01.


M&A PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 01 60 00 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the

Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project.


Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the

applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the

Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for

handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract and per Gerneral Conditions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms

used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether

purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product

name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

b. "Foreign Products," as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside the United States and its possessions. Products produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are



not citizens of, nor living within, the United States and its possessions are also considered to be foreign products.

2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished,

refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Prepare a schedule in tabular form showing each product listed. Include

the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. B. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to

the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the

Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare product list with information on each item tabulated under the

following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work,

submit 2 copies of an initial product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product

selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period.

4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work,

submit 2 copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements.

5. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action.



1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind

from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot,

produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between

2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

that are compatible with products and construction methods of other or separate contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, the Architect will determine which products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced.

C. Foreign Product Limitations: Refer to General Conditions for Colorado

Preference. D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint

manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or,

where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for

items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction.

7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract

Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and

other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

B. Product Selection Procedures: The General Conditions and Contract Documents and

governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Coordinate with General Conditions. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Coordinate with general

Conditions.. a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name,

accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," comply with the General Conditions andContract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.



3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or

manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.

5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product

literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 6. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only

require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.

7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches

satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category.

8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase

"... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of

products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from

damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01 60 00

M&A PRODUCT OPTIONS


SECTION 01 62 00 – PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Coordinate the section with the General Conditions of the Contract for requirements

for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1. For substitution requests made prior to the Bid Opening, see 2.2 in this section.


Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the

applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the

Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing

the Contractor's selection of products and product options. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in

the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction required by the General Conditions and Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after the Bid Opening will not be accepted:

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitutions will be considered if

received on the product substitution request form included at the end of this section. Substitution request submittals shall include following:

M&A PRODUCT OPTIONS


1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration on the provided form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for

substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the General

Conditions and Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the

Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents.

6. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

11. The Product Substitution Request is submitted prior to Bid Opening B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product

Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.

M&A PRODUCT OPTIONS


2.2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PRIOR TO THE BID OPENING

A. Substitutions: Requests in changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor will be accepted per advertisement prior to the Bid Opening.

1. Provide duplicate approval forms complete with supporting data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION Substitution Request Form to be used prior to any submittals, if required. Refer to General conditions for proper use of this form. PART 4- PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

(Refer to attached Jeffco form) END OF SECTION 01 62 00

Date:

TO: Location:Architect / Consultant

Project I D #:

FROM: Project Description:Contractor / Vendor

A) Specified Product is no longer available: C) The Owner will receive a Savings of:

B) Substitution will improve lead time by: Days D) The Quality of the Material or Product will be Improved:

Give Details:

Contractor's or Vendor's Comments on Substitution:

Contractor / Vendor

Architect / Consultant Recommendations:

Architect / Consultant

School District's Project Manager

Signature

Signature

Signature

The above listed Contractor / Vendor here by requests approval of the following product in accordance with

Section GC 36.00 of the General Conditions of the contract.

Manufacture:

Model #:

Material Or Product

Specified Material or Product:

Owner Rejection Date:

Substitution Request # :

Owner Approval Date:

Model #:

Reason for Substitution:

Substituted Material or Product:

JEFFERSON COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS809 Quail Street, Building #4 / Lakewood, Colorado 80215


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

Specification Section:

Manufacture:

01 92 Substitution Request 2006041

M&A CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


SECTION 01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout

including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning.

B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the

appropriate Sections in Divisions 02 through 33. 1.3 PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

NOTE: The mandatory sequence of events for acceptance and closeout of Jefferson

County School District, R-1 capital construction projects is as follows: 1. Contractor maintains “As Constructed” set of documents at the project site at all times. 2. Contractor submits “As Constructed” documented set to Design Consultant. 3. Design consultant integrates Contractor information with other documentation of post-

award changes and submits updated text, CAD, and plotted reproducible record documents directly to the Design Consultant at the closeout meeting.

4. Preparation: Before requesting a Final Inspection, the Contractor personally inspects the work to certify completion of all contract requirements and develops: Punch-List of deficiencies by discipline (ie. Civil, Architectural, HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, etc.) Partial Punch-Lists by area of construction may be permitted with the approval of the Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager.

5. Written Notification of Project Completion: The Contractor certifies inspection, acceptance, and suitability of the work for the Architect’s Final Inspection and attaches the Punch-List.

6. Final Inspection: Upon written receipt of the Written Notification, the Architect schedules a Final Inspection with the Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project



Manager to confirm the Punch-List and initiate Project Acceptance. Following this inspection, the Architect prepares and distributes a Final Inspection Report.

7. Notice of Completion: The Contractor advises the Architect in writing tht the items identified in the Punch List and Final Inspection Report are complete, inspected, and ready for Final Acceptance.

8. Final Acceptance Inspection: Upon receipt of the Notice of Completion, the Architect schedules a Final Acceptance Inspection with the Contractor and the Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager.

9. Project Closeout Meeting: Contractor schedules a meeting transmit closeout documents to the Prime Consultant with Subcontractor and Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager in attendance.

10. Acceptance: After Punch-List items and closeout submittals have been comleted to the satisfaction of the Architect, the Architect issues a written letter to Jefferson County School District, R-1 recommending acceptance of the project. The Architect’s letter of acceptance includes asbestos content certifications and the recommended date of acceptance.

11. Final Application for Payment: Upon completion of the Final Acceptance process, the Contractor submits to the Architect:

a. Closeout submittals per sections 01 78 23 – 01 78 39. b. Final Applications for Payment pre section 01 29 00.

12. Final Payment: Upon verification of the preceeding items: a. The Architect recommends Final Payment.

13. Jefferson County School District, R-1 issues Final Payment after a waiting period following the publication of a formal announcement of Final Retention Payment.

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record

documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints

of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on

Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. 3. Note related change-order numbers and ASI numbers, etc., where applicable for

differing work. 4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-

paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.



C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete, clean record specification copy of the

Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders, ASI’s, etc., and modifications issued in printed form during construction. On each first page of each specification section of the Record Specifications, include the following clearly hand written information:

#1: corresponding suppliers company name, contact and suppliers phone number,

#2: installers company name, contact and installers phone number,

#3: exact grade, color, or particular designation of item or items installed. 1. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed

in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. 2. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information

on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

3. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 4. Upon completion of the Work, submit Record Specifications to the Architect for

the Owner's records. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note

related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in

comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the Owner's records.

E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for

requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.

F. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into: 3 suitable sets,

per each school site, of manageable size. (Two copies for Jeffco, 1 copy for GC). Bind properly indexed data, for each school site, in individual, heavy-duty, 2-3 inch, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions.



2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:

1. Startup. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction.

Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and

windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.



d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.

C. Pest Control: Make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other

pests. D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for

protection of the Work during construction. E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety

standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.


M&A OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 - Submittal Procedures B. Section 01 - Product Requirements C. Section 01 - Closeout Procedures D. Section 01 - Demonstration and Training E. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance

data

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide complete instruction manuals and data prepared by personnel

experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

1.4 FORMAT A. Provide data in the form of an equipment and system instructional manual B. Binders: commercial quality, 8.5 x 11 inch, three ring binders with hard back,

cleanable plastic covers. Three-inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

C. Cover: identify each binder with typed or printed information: 1. Title: “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND

INSTRUCTIONS”. 2. Project title, number 3. Contents of each binder

D. Arrange contents by system under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual.

1. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

2. Text: all printed. Manufacturer’s printed data and contractor provided documentation.

3. Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to the size of text pages.

1.5 CONTENT, EACH VOLUME

A. Table of Contents: provide title of Project, names, addresses and telephone numbers of Architect, sub consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

B. Warranty matrix: Summary spreadsheet listing every item under warranty indicating: length of warranty, start/end dates, contact (name,


address, contact, phone/fax numbers), and the corresponding tab under which item can be found.

C. For each product or system: list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

D. Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project record documents as maintenance drawings.

E. Type text: as required to supplement product data. F. Warranties and bonds: under corresponding equipment tab. G. Materials matrix: Summary of all materials used including color and

texture. H. Additional requirements: as specified in individual product specification

sections. 1.6 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Each item of equipment and each system: include description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data and tests and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

B. Panelboard circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications.

C. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating procedures: include manufacturer’s start up, break in and

routine normal operating instruction and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut down and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter and any special operating instruction.

E. Maintenance requirements: include manufacturer’s routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly instructions. Alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions to be included.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings

and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. J. Provide Contractor’s coordination drawings with color-coded piping

diagrams as installed. K. Provide list of original manufacturer’s spare parts, current prices and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. L. Additional requirements as specified in individual product specification

sections.

1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect adequate original manuals to allow the Owner to

keep TWO (2) complete/approved manuals, per each school site, containing all equipment and system manufacturer’s product data. (GC


to keep ONE (1) manual, per each school site, for their records.) Manual contents and organization shall be as required herein.

B. Submit operation and maintenance manuals at closeout meeting. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION 01 78 23

M&A WARRANTIES


SECTION 01 78 36 - WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the

Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Warranty period for this project is one year. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of

the Contractor's period for correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies contract closeout procedures. 3. Divisions 2 through 26 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner

are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties

do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.

B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents,

either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.

1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,

remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

M&A WARRANTIES


B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected

by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or

rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied

warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit

selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work

or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Completion. If the

Architect's Certificate of Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner,

by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor,

supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.

C. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor,

or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to Divisions 00, 01, 02 through 26 Sections for specific content requirements and

particular requirements for submitting special warranties. D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 3 copies of each required warranty properly

executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

M&A WARRANTIES


E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered

loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty.

Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer.

2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor.

3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF WARRANTIES

A. Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in the Project Manual,

General Conditions and on the Drawings.


M&A PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 01 78 39- 1

SECTION 01 78 39 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Maintenance of Record Documents A. Submittal of Record Documents

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 00 - General Conditions B. Section 00 - Supplementary Conditions C. Section 01 - Submittal Procedures D. Section 01 - Closeout Procedures E. Individual Specification Sections: Manufacturer’s certificates and certificates of

inspection.

1.3 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site one record

copy of: 1. Contract Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract 5. Reviewed shop drawings product data, and samples 6. Inspection certificates 7. Manufacturer’s certificates

B. Store record documents and sample in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks and secure storage for record documents and samples.

C. Label and file record documents and samples in accordance with section number listings in Table of Contents of the Project Manual. Label each document “PROJECT RECORD COPY” in neat, large, printed letters.

D. Maintain record documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

E. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Architect. 1.4 RECORDING

A. Contract drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:

1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Changes made by modifications 4. Details not on original contract drawings. 5. References to related shop drawings and modifications. 6. Daily record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings

and in a copy of a Project Manual, provided by Owner.

M&A PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 01 78 39- 2

B. Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Cross reference each first sheet of each specification section to a master

list of subcontractor, suppliers, and installers complete with addresses and telephone numbers of each. Identify manufacturer, trade name, and catalog number of each product actually installed, including color, texture, etc. Clearly differentiate between actual installed items and bid options or substitutions. Indicate changes made by addenda, change order, alternate and field order modifications.

2. Daily record information on a set of blue line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project Manual, provided by Owner.

3. The information in this document to be copied to a 3-ring bound Project Manual and submitted as the Project Record Specification at Final Completion.

B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information.

C. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.

D. Other documents: maintain manufacturer’s certifications, inspection certifications required by individual specifications sections.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. At Contract closeout, deliver record documents and samples under provisions of Section 01 to the Architect.

B. Record documents required, include but are not limited to the following list: 1. Record drawings 2. Record specifications 3. Record survey 4. Contractor’s certified punch list

C. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor’s name, address, and telephone number 4. Number and title of each record document 5. Signature of Contactor or authorized representative

D. Contractor is to sign each sheet of the record drawings that are turned over to the Architect. Subcontractors are to sign their respective sheets of the Work.

E. Final payment to the Contractor is contingent on the satisfactory completion of items A-D abpve and confirmation from the Architect that all of the project information needed to complete a Record Set of Documents has been provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION 01 78 39

M&A SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


SECTION 02 41 00 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Removal of the existing Site’s Landscape, Architectural, Mechanical

and Electrical Items as detailed on documents 2. Dispose of debris off site.

B. Related Sections:

1. Barricades, Warning Lights and Signs: Section 01 Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. Use of Premises: Section 01 Summary of Work. 2. Coordination: Section 01

1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Execute demolition in manner to limit

unnecessary dust and noise. Burning of materials on site not allowed.

B. Existing Conditions: Portions of the site may be occupied during construction. See Section 01 Summary of Work. Do not interfere with use of occupied portions of site. Maintain free and safe passage to and from occupied areas.

C. Existing Utility Services:

1. Capping: Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing and capping utility services within areas of demolition. Disconnect and stub off. Notify affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting this work.

2. Identification: Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on project record documents.

D. Protection: Provide necessary temporary shoring and bracing to support and

protect portions of existing building during demolition operations. Leave such shoring in place until permanent supports have been installed. Be solely responsible for design, safety and adequacy of temporary shoring and bracing and its ability to carry load for which intended.

E. Safety: Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of

structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume until safety is restored.

F. Asbestos: Asbestos containing materials will be removed under separate

contract. Notify Owner of any suspected asbestos containing materials remaining.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials to be Reused: Carefully remove materials scheduled or noted to be reused in other portions of work and store at site for later reinstallation. Repair any damage caused during removal, storage or reinstallation to satisfaction of Architect.

B. Materials to be Removed by Owner: Items which are removed prior to start of

demolition shall remain property of Owner. All other items indicated to be removed but not indicated for reinstallation shall become property of Contractor who shall remove them from site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Dust Protection: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions as required to prevent spread of dust, fumes and smoke to other parts of building. On completion, remove partitions and repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

B. Building Occupancy: Carry out demolition work to cause as little

inconvenience to site occupants as possible.

3.2 BUILDING DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish in orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate new work. Protect existing foundations and supporting structural members.

B. Repair: Repair demolition performed in excess of that required at no cost to

Owner.

C. Asbestos Containing Materials: If the Contractor suspects that existing asbestos containing materials have been uncovered during demolition, he shall immediately stop work in the area and shall notify the Owner. The Owner will arrange and pay for any testing, removal or encapsulation that be may be required.

3.3 SITE DEMOLITION

A. Remove existing site improvements as indicated.

B. Cut existing paving to a straight line with a masonry saw where removal is required.



3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. Cleaning: During demolition operations, keep premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by employees or work, and at completion of work remove rubbish, tools and surplus material and leave premises clean and ready for subsequent work. Promptly remove waste, rubbish or debris from site.


M&A ASPHALT PAVING


SECTION 02 51 30 ASPHALT PAVING

0.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work in this section shall include asphalt paving, cutting, patching and repair.

0.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 01410 – Testing Laboratory Services

C. Section 02200 – Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting

D. Section 01340 – Submittals and Shop Drawings

0.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Section 01340 – Submittals and Shop Drawings.

1. Submit Job Mix Formula for each type of asphalt mix to be used on the project to A/E for approval.

2. Asphalt Material Certificates signed by material producer, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements to include job graduation, aggregate source, and percentage of each element. Producer certification shall be provided at Contractor’s expense.

3. Installer Qualifications

4. Producer Certification

5. Batch Tickets: Mix design numbers shall appear on all delivery truck tickets.

6. Pavement reinforcement Geotextile Fabric

7. Tack Coat

8. Soil Sterilant

9. Paint chips for striping and infill color selections.

0.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Asphaltic concrete paving installer shall have not less than five years experience on projects of similar size and scope.

B. Testing Agency: Sampling, testing, and inspections specified herein will be performed by and independent testing consultant employed by owner. See Section 01410.

C. Notify the Testing Agency, and A/E, not less than 48 hours in advance of work requiring testing or inspection services.

D. Environmental Compliance

1. Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations pertaining to asphalt paving systems.

0.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS

M&A ASPHALT PAVING


A. Site Information: Perform necessary research of public utility records, and verify existing and temporary utility locations.

B. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas, subgrades and conditions.

C. Construction Traffic: Conduct all paving operations to ensure minimum interference with driveway, parking lots, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities to include adjacent project areas under construction or temporary access. Do not close or obstruct driveway, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements or newly constructed improvements. Provide necessary fencing or barricades.

1. Protect all improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner’s property.

2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners, to the A/E.

3. Protect all underground utilities under paved areas.

4. Restore and assure that manholes, meter pits and shut-off valve covers are raised to the level of finished surface grade.

E. Existing Bench Marks and Monuments:

1. Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks, horizontal/vertical control, monuments, property line pipes and pins and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Excess Materials: Arrange for disposition of unsuitable material, waste materials, and materials not allowed by specifications for fill, backfill, or site grading in accordance with local requirements. Location of dump, length of haul, and disposal expenses are Contractor’s responsibility.

0.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIRMENTS

A. Perform work only under suitable weather conditions. Comply with the environmental requirements for asphalt placement.

0.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Consultant Notification

1. Contractor shall notify A/E at least three (3) days prior to commencing asphalt paving work.

2. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule testing of asphalt paving.

3. Contractor shall notify A/E at least three (3) days prior to commencing proof rolling.

PART 1 PRODUCTS

1.01 MATERIALS

M&A ASPHALT PAVING


A. General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations. All asphalt pavement material and mix designs shall comply with Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications.

B. Aggregates: Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed slab, crushed gravel or natural gravel conforming to the requirements of CDOT Specifications, Item 703.04.

C. Mixes:

1. Plant Mix Pavements: Furnish job-mix formulas for each asphalt pavement type, conforming to the requirements of CDOT, Specifications Item 401.02.

2. Asphaltic Concrete Base or Surface Course: Mix aggregates and bituminous materials in accordance with the requirements of CDOT Specification Item 401.15. Use approved job mix formulas. a. Base Course: Grade S or SX Hot Bituminous Pavement using Superpave

Performance Grade 58-28 Binder. b. Surface (wearing) Course: Grade SX Hot Bituminous Pavement using

Superpave Performance Grade 58-28 Binder.

3. Pavement Patching: Grade SG Hot Bituminous Pavement using Superpave Performance Grade 58-28 Binder on play areas and PG 64-22 Binder on parking and driveareas.

D. Tack Coat: AC10 Asphaltic Cement or emulsion.

E. Soil Sterilant: Material shall be or an organic nature with minimum leaching characteristics. The preferred product is Simazine of the Triazine group.

F. Asphalt Striping

1. Asphalt striping to meet Type 1 requirement for Federal Specification TT-P-1 952-b for paints.

2. Paint Colors: Yellow shall visually match color chip number 33538 of Federal Standard 595B. Paint color white shall have 84% reflectance. Paint color blue shall visually match color chip number 35180 of Federal Standard 595B. All other paint colors shall be selected by the Architect prior to any painting activities. Contractor to provide sample paint chips.

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.01 EXAMINATION

A. Construct hot-mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. Do not apply tack coats or surface course in rainy weather or when sub-grade surface is wet or contains an excess of moisture. Tack coat shall be paved over only on the day of application.

B. Grade Control: Establish or verify and maintain required lines and grades, including cross-slope, for each course during construction operations.

C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the drawings by taking field dimensions. Report discrepancies to the A/E for clarification, and make minor adjustments in layout as required by field conditions and as approved by the A/E, at no additional cost to the Owner.

M&A ASPHALT PAVING


2.02 PREPARATION

A. Preparation of the sub-grade, or placement of asphalt, shall not commence until all underground work in the area has been completed.

B. See section 02810 for information regarding areas requiring sleeving under paved areas.

C. General:

1. Remove loose material from compacted sub-grade surface.

2. Treat surface with an approved soil sterilant.

D. Proof Rolling: Proof rolling of the sub-grade shall be required prior to placement of any pavement and after sub-grade reconditioning has been completed.

1. Proof Rolling shall be conducted with a double tandem ten-wheel end-dump truck, loaded to a minimum gross weight of 35,000 pounds, or other equipment as approved by the A/E.

2. Areas found to be weak, and those areas that fail, shall be reconditioned again as necessary and re-compacted to the requirements for density and moisture at the Contractor’s expense.

3. Proof rolling of failed areas shall be conducted immediately after they are reconditioned. Where failing areas are still encountered, the A/E may require the Contractor to remove the unsuitable materials as muck excavation and backfilled with structural fill material.

4. The A/E may designate as unsuitable those soils that are detrimental to the finished roadway. The Contractor shall dispose of all unsuitable material in legal and proper manner.

5. The A/E shall be present during all proof rolling.

E. Placing Equipment: Self-Contained power-driven unit capable of spereading, shaping, and finished to the degree of smoothness required. Provide hand tools, such as shovels and rakes, as required to correct any irregularities in the pavement.

F. Rolling Equipment: Power driven rollers weighing not less than 8 tons, equipped with adjustable scrapers and sprinkling devices to keep roller wheels clean and wet.

G. Hand Tampers: Provide flat plate type, pneumatic hand tampers for compacting areas next to structures or other areas inaccessible to power rollers.

H. Exercise care in applying bituminous material to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces. Remove and clean damaged or stained surfaces.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Placing Mix

1. General: Place hot-mixed asphalt mixture on clean and dry prepared surface, spread and strike off. Spread mixture at a minimum temperature of 235 deg F (107 deg C). Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and compacted thickness. Apply tack coat to areas of geotextile fabric on existing pavement or patched areas.

2. New pavements in driveways and parking lots shall be a minimum of 4 inches thick, or as specified on the plans. All new pavements shall consist of an asphaltic base

M&A ASPHALT PAVING


course with a minimum thickness of 2 ½ inches and an asphaltic surface (wearing) course with a minimum thickness of 1 ½ inches. Where thicker pavements are required, the base course thickness shall be not less than 60% of the total pavement thickness and the maximum surface course thickness shall be 3 inches thick.

3. Paver Placing: Place in strips of 10 feet or 14 feet wide, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Place strips parallel to the centerline of all driveways.

4. Immediate correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess material forming high spots with shovel or lute. While mix is still hot, compact and finish off each course with power rollers.

5. Joints: Produce dense, watertight finished joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days work, to ensure continues bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of hot mixed asphalt course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.

B. Tolerances

1. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness will not be acceptable if variations from thickness noted or specified exceed ¼ inch. Paved areas deficient in thickness will be overlaid with an additional course of asphalt material to achieve the minimum specified thickness. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to remove paved areas where the pavements thickness exceeds the maximum tolerance limits creating birdbaths. Where the tolerance limits are exceeded, all corrective work shall be performed in a manner that leaves the finished surface with a neat, smooth appearance.

2. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each asphalt paving course for smoothness, using a 10 foot straightedge. Surfaces will not be acceptable if variations exceed +/- ¼ inch in 10 feet.

3. Patching: Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign materials, defective areas, and existing pavements at transitions with new paving. Cutout such areas and fill with fresh hot asphaltic concrete. Compact by rolling to required surface density and smoothness. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. Saw-cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. Apply tack coat before placing asphalt concrete mixture.

C. Rolling

1. General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

2. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

3. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.

4. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted.

M&A ASPHALT PAVING


5. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95% laboratory density.

6. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

7. Erect Barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture for a minimum of 14 days, or until has cooled enough not to become marked.

D. Striping

1. Striping dimensions, color, and layout for all asphalt striping operations shall match the drawings.

2. Immediately prior to installation of asphalt striping, remove any loose and deleterious material from the surface. Power wash as necessary to remove any oils, soils, and other spilled materials.

3. Protection: After final rolling, do NOT permit vehicular traffic on the pavement until it has completely cooled and hardened.

4. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough for pavement to be marked.

2.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Testing in-place hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owners independent testing laboratory. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner or Engineer.

B. Testing

1. The Owner may retain and pay for the services of a Employed Testing Consultant who shall test asphalt work at the time of placement and shall issue a written report indicating test results.

2. Testing Consultant shall notify Contractor at the time of testing, prior to final report, if any results do not meet specifications, such that, corrective measures may be made immediately.

3. Contractor is responsible to repair all cores taken at the time of testing.

4. Owner will have each lift of asphalt tested by a geotechnical engineer or engineer’s representative, with a nuclear gauge. Each sample shall meet a minimum of 95% of the Marshall Mix Design. Contractor to coordinate all testing.

5. Owner will have a geotechnical engineer or engineer’s representative to test all sub base conditions with a nuclear gauge. Compaction to be 95% Standard Proctor, ASTM D698. Contractor to coordinate testing.

6. Owner will have a geotechnical engineer or engineer’s representative observe all asphalt placement. Contractor to coordinate.

7. Owner will have a geotechnical engineer or engineer’s representative collect a sample of the delivered mix. Wet sample will be compared with the mix design. Contractor to coordinate.

M&A ASPHALT PAVING


8. When testing results fail to meet specifications the Owner shall consult with the A/E and Testing Consultant. The Owner shall determine if additional testing/observation is needed to ensure compliance with Contract. If additional testing and/or observation are required, the Contractor shall obtain and pay for such services specified by the Owner at his own expense. All additional information resulting from Contractor testing shall be shared with the Owner, Testing Consultant and A/E.

9. Water Test: New pavement shall be tested with water, at contractor’s expense, to verify no adverse slopes or excessive birdbaths exist across pavement. Tolerances specified in 3.03 B, shall be met prior to final acceptance by Owner.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D-3549 will not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations:

1. All Asphaltic Courses +/- ¼ inch.

D. Sampling or Testing: During paving operations the Testing Consultant will perform sampling and testing of asphalt paving mixtures. The Testing Consultant will record locations where samples are taken to correlate with subsequent testing.

E. Minimum Quality Requirements:

1. Minimum acceptable density of in-place course material is 95% of recorded laboratory specimen density.

2. Hveem stability (R-Value) will be a minimum of 30.

3. Maximum Theoretical Specific Gravity is less than that specified for the mix design.

D. Non-Complying Work: Repair or replace defective or non-complying work and materials at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protection: Protect newly placed material from traffic by barricades or other suitable methods until mixture has cooled and attained maximum degree of hardness. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt pavement until it has cooled and hardened and in no case sooner than six (6) hours.

B. Completed Work: Pavement surfaces shall be clean, free of loose gravel or aggregate, sound, and unmarred at time of acceptance of the work.


M&A LANDSCAPING


PART 1 - SECTION 02 90 00 LANDSCAPING

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Soil Preparation and Fine Grading

2. Restoration of Disturbed, Damaged, or Destroyed Areas

3. Soil Amendments

4. Top Soil

5. Planting Mixes

6. Fertilizers

7. Water

8. Mulches

9. Landscape Fabric

10. Trees

11. Plant Materials

B. Related Sections:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

2. Division 1 – Section 01030 – Alternates, Unit Prices and Allowances

3. Division 1 – Section 01049 – Architect Coordination

4. Division 1 – Section 01340 – Submittals and Shop Drawings

5. Division 1 – Section 01400 – Quality Control

6. Division 1 – Section 01630 – Product Options and Substitutions

7. Division 1 – Section 01700 – Closeout

8. Division 1 – Section 01710 – Final Cleaning

9. Division 1 – Section 01730 – Operating and Maintenance Data

10. Division 1 – Section 01740 – Warranties and Bonds

11. Division 2 – Section 02200 – Earthwork

12. Division 2 – Section 02930 – Lawns and Grasses

1.02 ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES

A. Project alternates are to be used only with the approval of Jeffco. Work identified as "Alternates"

shall be subject to the review and evaluation of the Jeffco Project Manager and may be selected

for addition to or deletion from the Contract for Construction. Comply with requirements of

Section 01030 – Alternates, Unit Prices and Allowances.

M&A LANDSCAPING


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Materials List: Submit a list of all materials to be used in the planting operations, together with the

source of those materials. The list shall include plant materials, mulches, soil amendments,

edging, etc.

B. Descriptive Data: Submit catalog cuts or brochures for the following:

1. Fertilizers

2. Soil Amendments

3. Landscape Fabric

B. Supply name of CLT personnel prior to beginning work.

C. Submit any analytical tests, performed by a certified soils laboratory, or suppliers certified analysis

of materials with certified specification requirements (where applicable). Analysis must be

current, up-to-date and reliable.

D. Shop Drawings: N/A

E. Physical Samples for Verification:

1. Provide physical samples of material listed below. Loose material shall be placed in a one

quart Ziploc bag and labeled appropriately.

a. Rolled Top Steel Edger

b. Stabilized Crusher Fines

c. Shredded Cedar Mulch

d. Landscape Fabric


A. Crew Qualifications: The fine grading shall be performed by an experienced landscape installer

having not less than five (5) years successful experience in landscape projects of similar size and

scope. Landscape crews shall be supervised by an on-site superintendent or foreman holding a

Certified Landscape Technician (CLT) certificate as provided by the Associated Landscape

Contractors of Colorado (ALCC).

B. Plant Materials: Provide trees and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety indicated for

landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1

“American Standard of Nursery Stock” and Colorado Nursery Act as revised.

C. Plant Source: Plants grown in hardiness zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 only will be accepted. Hardiness

zones are defined in U.S. Dept of Agriculture publications. All plants shall be nursery grown.

Imported plants shall have been growing in a nursery for a minimum of one growing season.

Trees and shrubs shall have been root pruned during their growing period in the nursery in

accordance with standard nursery practices.

D. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing agencies.

Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.


A. Planting Time: All required site preparation shall be completed prior to bringing plants, seed, sod,

etc., to the site for installation. No storage of live material permitted on-site overnight unless given

prior written approval by Jeffco Project Manager.

B. Plant sod within time frame and sequencing of Section 02930 – Lawns and Grasses.

M&A LANDSCAPING


1.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. The purpose of this guarantee is to ensure that the Owner receives landscape items (mulches,

edging, etc.) and plant materials of prime quality, planted and maintained in a thorough and

careful manner. To distinguish plants which have latent defects or diseases or plants shocked in

the process of transplanting, the Contractor shall conform to the following:

1. The Contractor shall guarantee all landscape work and materials against defects due to any

cause except for vandalism and acts of God for a period of twenty-four (24) months from Date

of Completion set forth in the Owner’s Letter of Acceptance.

2. The Landscape Architect shall make the sole determination of guarantee replacements.

3. The Contractor shall replace all trees and sod when no longer in a satisfactory growing

condition as determined by the Landscape Architect for the duration of the guarantee period.

4. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees

and shrubs that are in doubtful condition at the end of warranty period.

5. All replacements shall be of the same kind and size as originally specified and/or planted and

shall be planted as described in the contract documents. All expenses incurred in the

replacements shall be borne by the Contractor.

6. Replacements material will be guaranteed for an additional year from the date of replacement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. No requests for substitutions will be considered after the Bid Opening.

B. Contractors and/or suppliers may submit requests for approval of equal products or materials.

Written requests shall be submitted to the A/E for review within the specified time BEFORE THE

BID.

2.02 TOP SOIL

A. Topsoil for planting backfill or other use shall be from stripped on-site stockpile. Strip 4” of topsoil

from the source area. Contractor shall mix, scarify and pulverize soil to break up or remove clods,

rocks, debris, and non decomposed organic matter. No clods, rocks, or organic matter larger

than two inches (2") in the greatest dimension shall be allowed for use in planting operations.

2.03 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Organic Compost: Finely ground composted manure certified to be free of deleterious weed

seeds. Composted material shall contain a minimum 40% organic matter. Compost to be from

local source such as A-1 Organics, Eaton, Colorado, or Boss Compost, Denver, Colorado. No

feed lot manure accepted. Rate for sod: Apply four (4) cubic yards per 1000 square feet for all

landscape planted areas.

2.04 FERTILIZATION

A. All Planting Areas: Commercial fertilizer having a guaranteed analysis of granular form

Diammonium phosphate (18-46-0).

B. Booster Fertilizer: Fertilizers shall be inorganic base (12-12-4) analysis with 2% iron and 8%

sulfur. Provide guaranteed analysis.

M&A LANDSCAPING


C. Trees and Shrubs: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from

organic sources. Use Agriform, 21-gram planting tablets having an NPK analysis of 20-10-5 as

follows:

1. Trees: Trees 1”-2” caliper to receive 4 tablets each. Trees 3” caliper and above to receive 6 tablets each. Insert tablets in the planting pit 6” to 8” deep spaced evenly around root ball.

2. Shrubs: 2 tablets per shrub. Insert tablets in the planting pit 6” to 8” deep spaced evenly around root ball.

2.05 WATER

A. Contractor must arrange and pay for water during construction period. If required during winter

construction, winter watering may be done with building sill cocks. See “Winter Watering”

beneath “Execution” portion of this specification.

2.06 HERBICIDE

A. “Roundup” by Monsanto.

2.07 PLANTING PIT / PLANTING AREA / PLANTER MIXES

A. The specified backfill materials shall be evenly pre-mixed using appropriate equipment and then

turned to produce a uniform, evenly blended consistency, free of all pockets of unblended material

and any clods or stones greater than two inches (2") in diameter. Backfill mix shall be delivered to

each planting pit after mixing has occurred. Amend as Follows:

1. Planting Pit Backfill –Planting pits of all types shall be backfilled with the following mix: a. Two parts native soil from pit excavation. b. One part Sphagnum peat. c. One part composted manure.

2. Planter Backfill – Backfill with the following mix: a. Three parts screened topsoil. b. One part Sphagnum peat. c. One part composted manure.

3. Commercial Fertilizer – Provide and install Agriform, 21-gram fertilizers to trees and shrubs at the rate described above.

2.08 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper indicated and with branching configuration

recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single-stem tree form trees,

except where special forms are shown or listed.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees.

2. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock.

B. Shrubs & Other Plants: To comply with ANSI Z60.1 for type, size and species required.

2.09 MULCHES

A. Shredded Cedar Mulch: All single trees and planting beds shall be mulched with clean shredded

natural cedar of a medium texture six (6) inches in depth.

M&A LANDSCAPING


2.10 LANDSCAPE FABRIC

A. Spunbond type by Landmaster, Duon, Mirafi 140, Typar, or Stabilenka T-80. Black polyethylene

film material NOT acceptable

B. Shall have no tears or defects.

C. Fabric NOT required beneath crusher fines.

D. Fabric NOT required beneath mulch.

E. Fabric is to be placed beneath bottom layer of drainage material in all play pits.

F. Fabric rows to overlap 9” and to be pinned with 8” u-shaped metal pins.

2.11 TREE ESTABLISHMENT

A. Tree Wrap: 4” wide layered tree wrap with interior layer of asphaltic material. Tree wrap shall be

specifically manufactured as horticultural tree wrap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all plant materials for adherence to ANSI Z60.1 for type and species specified, uniformity

of appearance, and health.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SITE AND SOIL PREPARATION

A. Site preparation shall be completed prior to bringing plants, seed, sod, etc., to the site for

installation. No storage of live material permitted on-site overnight unless given prior approval by

Project Manager.

B. No planting or seeding shall take place until the following have been accepted by the A/E and

Jeffco Project Manager.

1. Irrigation

2. Plant materials

3. Weed control, debris removal

4. Soil amendments

5. Grades

a. Regardless of grading tolerances, intended drainage flows shall be maintained without

ponding.

6. Tree and shrub locations

C. Protect all trees, shrubs, and groundcover within the areas of construction and related excavation

as herein specified. Provide suitable barricades and/or fences as required.

D. Do not perform work when climate and existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory results.

E. Clearing and Grubbing: Prior to any soil preparation, all existing vegetation that might interfere

with the required/specified soil preparation shall be mowed, grubbed, raked, and the debris

removed from the site. Prior to or during stripping, grading or tillage operations, the ground

surface shall be cleaned of materials which might hinder final operations.

M&A LANDSCAPING


F. Strip 4” of topsoil from the source area and stockpile on-site for future distribution in new sod

areas, 4” deep. Stockpile pulverized and stripped topsoil on-site for 3 weeks minimum to promote

breakdown of pulverized sod. Contractor shall mix, scarify and pulverize soil to break up or

remove clods, rocks, debris, and non-decomposed organic matter. No clods, rocks, or organic

matter larger than two inches (2") in the greatest dimension shall be allowed for use in planting

operations.

G. Soil Preparation for Sodded Turf:

1. Ripping: Rip all areas requiring sodding, seeding, or planting to a depth of 12”. Protect

existing tree roots.

2. Soil Amendments: Spread soil amendments and fertilizers the rate specified after topsoil is

spread and bring to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades and elevations after

natural settlement.

3. Tilling: Rotor-till thoroughly with a mechanical tiller to a depth of 6-8” after application of

fertilizer and organic matter.

4. Delivery Quantities: Substantiate quantities of all amendments with delivery tickets and empty

manufacturer bags for transfer to the Project Manager at the weekly project meeting.

5. Fine Grade: Restore smooth, even finish grades and ensure positive surface drainage. Top

of finish grade (sod or seed) shall be established as per Fine Grading Section of this

specification. No planting shall take place until grade is accepted by the Jeffco Project

Manager.

3.03 FINE GRADING

A. Do fine grading for all areas immediately prior to planting.

B. For ground surface areas surrounding buildings to be landscaped, maintain required positive

drainage away from buildings.

C. Finish grade to be 1-1/2”-2” below edge of pavement prior to sodding, seeding, or planting.

D. Refer to Section 02200 – Earthwork for additional finish/fine grading, including compaction data

and for grading tolerances.

E. Regardless of grading tolerances, intended drainage flows shall be maintained without ponding.

3.04 TREE / SHRUB PLANTING

A. Establish Location: Stake or set out trees and shrubs in locations shown on the plans for approval

by Architect.

B. Planting Pits:

1. Planting pits shall be dug or augured to the minimum sizes shown in the appropriate planting

detail. Scarify pit walls.

2. Set plant plumb and orient for best appearance.

3. Backfill in layers, working and watering each layer to settle backfill and eliminate air pockets.

4. Mound top of backfill in irrigated areas; provide water bowl for dry land areas.

5. Spread wood mulch four inches (4") throughout all planting beds and 48” diameter around all

tree basins.

3.05 MULCHING

M&A LANDSCAPING


A. Install specified mulch in all shrub beds, ground cover areas and around trees. All trees in turf

shall receive a 4’ diameter mulch ring. Place mulch at a consistent depth of four inches (4”) in all

planting beds.

3.06 WINTER WATERING

A. Contractor’s maintenance crew to water all sod and planter materials once each month during

December, January, February, and March unless the Owner has accepted the project. This

watering shall be at a minimum: provide 0.5” of water for sod areas as well as deep-root watering

each and every tree and shrub.

B. This watering shall occur from sill cocks of the building and must include the cost of supplying all

necessary hose and fittings. If sill cocks are frozen or cannot be activated, Contractor shall

provide water using a water truck at his own expense.

3.07 LANDSCAPE FABRIC INSTALLATION

A. Level to smooth, even finish grade free of all debris and soil clods.

B. Fabric NOT required beneath garden mulch or stabilized crusher fines.

C. Fabric rows to overlap 9” and to be pinned with 8” u-shaped metal pins.


A. Plant Material Inspection: Owner has right to reject plant material through duration of warranty

period.

1. Substantial Completion

a. At the completion of all operations under contract to Owner, and prior to the beginning of any post-construction maintenance period, a substantial completion inspection shall be performed.

b. At the time of inspection, the Contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All plant basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with all heads properly adjusted.

c. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up and all walkways and curbs shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from construction operations. The inspection shall not occur until these conditions are met.

d. If, after the inspection, the Architect is of the opinion that all but minor corrective work has been performed as per the contract documents and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the Contractor written notice of items to be corrected on a "punch list" per Section 01700 – Closeout.

e. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the Architect shall be performed within the period specified in Section 01700 – Closeout.

f. The Contractor is required to establish and maintain the project in an acceptable manner typical to expectations and standards of quality for other similar projects and completely acceptable to Project Manager between project construction and final acceptance including mowing, spraying, policing debris, pruning, equipment adjusting, and all other desired activity until final inspection.

2. Final Inspection

a. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and Owner that the project is ready for final inspection.

b. Maintenance including seasonal mowing within the past four (4) days shall have been performed, so that the site is ready for full and complete use immediately without maintenance activity by Owner.

c. If, after the inspection, the Architect is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the contract documents and that all materials are in satisfactory placement or growing

M&A LANDSCAPING


condition and turf is fully established, he will give the Owner and Contractor written notice of final acceptance of construction.

d. All Guarantees and Warranties shall bear the Date of Completion set forth in the Owner’s Letter of Acceptance.

3.12 CLEAN-UP

B. Clean the entire site of any construction debris, pruned material, excess material, weeds, etc., as

a last operation. “Broom” clean is acceptable procedure, wash clean on public pavements.


M&A LAWNS & GRASSES

TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 02930 - 1

PART 1 02 93 00 LAWNS & GRASSES

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fertilizing

B. Sodding

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 02 90 00 – Landscaping

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Section 01340 - Submittals and Shop Drawings.

1. Submit to A/E grower’s certification of sod mix. Identify source location and area immediately after contract execution. Provide letter from supplier/producer defining order, quantity and compliance with these specifications.

1.04 ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES

A. Project alternates acceptable only with Jeffco approval. Work identified as "Alternates" shall be subject to review and evaluation by the Project Manager and may be selected for addition to or deletion from the Contract for Construction. Comply with requirements of Section 01030 – Alternates/Alternatives.


A. No requests for substitutions will be considered after Bid Opening.

B. Written requests shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) for review within the specified time. BEFORE THE BID.


A. Sod: Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) Classes of sod materials.

B. Coverage: Failure of adequate coverage or healthy growth, as specified within the “Final Acceptance” of specified lawns and seeding shall be grounds for the Contractor to perform additional work in this Section as required at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Equipment: Use equipment manufactured to produce the desired result.

D. Coordination: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warranty all sodded areas against failure to take root and display vigorous growth, for a period of 24 months from the Date of Completion set forth in the Owner’s Letter of Acceptance.

B. During maintenance and warranty period, replace sod areas that die due to natural causes, poor maintenance procedures, or which in A/E’s opinion are unhealthy. The A/E shall have the final decision as to areas of replacement.

C. Install replacements as originally specified.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Fertilizer:

M&A LAWNS & GRASSES


1. Deliver inorganic fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, tickets for submittal upon delivery to site.

2. Material may be inspected upon arrival at project site. Immediately remove any unacceptable material from job site.

B. Sod:

1. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping at sod farm and within twelve (12) hours of delivery to site. Protect sod against drying and braking of rolled strips.

2. The Owner reserves the right to reject sod at site and when laid if all or portions of the materials fail to meet these specifications. Remove rejected sod promptly or mark with dye to indicate rejection.

3. Do not harvest or transport sod when moisture content may adversely affect sod survival.

4. Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to installation.

5. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.

1.09 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Beginning work of this section means acceptance of existing site conditions. Soil preparation and final grading to be approved prior to sod installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer: Specified in Section 02 90 00 – Landscaping.

2.02 TOPSOIL

A. Refer to Section 02 90 00 – Landscaping for topsoil requirements.

2.03 SOD

A. Sod Rolls: Shall have from 5/8” minimum thickness of soil adhering to root system, cut into strips 24” maximum width by 60” maximum length. Sod rolls shall be kept moist; protected from sun, heat, and wind; and properly protected in transport.

B. Sod rolls shall meet the following:

1. Provide sod of uniform roll sizes with maximum five inch (5”) deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be accepted. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper ten percent (10%) of pad will be rejected.

2. Sod that has dried out or sod with adhering soil that breaks, tears, or crumbles will be rejected.

3. Sod cut for more than 24 hours will be rejected.

4. NO NETTING – sod containing netting will be rejected.

5. Sod shall be strongly rooted sod, not less than one (1) year old, free of both weeds and undesirable native grasses including the following: a. Bermuda Grass b. Quackgrass c. Johnsongrass d. Nutsedge

M&A LAWNS & GRASSES


Sod Options:

6. Sod: Sod shall be Colorado grown, 100% certified, Marion Kentucky Bluegrass blend of a mixture of 4 or more improved varieties complying with applicable Colorado and Federal regulations, having a healthy root system, regularly fertilized, watered, mowed, sprayed, and capable of vigorous growth and development. Materials for specified bluegrass varieties mixed or improved varieties consisting of two or more from the following: a. Baron Artista b. Parade c. Midnight d. Raml Flyking e. America f. A-34 g. Pennstarr h. Columbia i. Victa Touchdown j. Adelphi

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PLANTING TIME

A. Planting Time: After April 15 and prior to October 31.

3.02 PREPARATION OF FINAL GRADE

A. Protect existing underground improvements from damage. Flag surface items for location. Ensure no compacting or settlement will occur.

B. Prepare soil and grade as specified in Section 02 90 00 – Landscaping.

C. Bring grades next to curbs, mow edge, sidewalks, and pavements to specified levels.

D. In irrigated areas, moisten prepared seed areas before planting to bring soil moisture to ideal soil moisture level and seeding condition.

E. Restore seed areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting.

3.03 FERTILIZING

A. Refer to requirements of Section 02 90 00 – Landscaping.

3.04 LAYING SOD

A. Lay sod within twenty-four (24) hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen or excessively wet.

B. Sod shall be laid on a firm, pre-moistened bed with tight joints so that no voids occur under or between strips.

C. In the event that sod dries or shrinks, a mixture of screened topsoil and bluegrass seed shall be brushed into the cracks and tamped flush. Excessively shrunk sod (over ¾” shrinkage) shall be re-laid.

D. Install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slopes, perpendicular to direction of the sloped area. Place subsequent rows parallel to and tightly against previously installed row.

E. Peg sod on slopes greater than 3 to 1 to prevent slippage at a rate of 2 stakes per lineal yard of sod.

F. Sod shall be watered thoroughly with irrigation system immediately after laying to provide maximum root zone saturation. Do not lay sod that will not receive water within one (1) hour.

M&A LAWNS & GRASSES


G. Rolling: Roll sod lightly immediately after it is laid, after slight watering. Delay rolling until just before the continued watering to provide root zone saturation.

H. Water sod daily to maintain adequate surface soil moisture for proper growth.

I. Topsoil: Add along exposed edges; feather 8-12” from edge to match adjacent existing grades.

J. Drainage: Assure finished areas of sod are laid so positive drainage will occur.

3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide sod maintenance, including but not limited to protection, mowing, and irrigation until end of maintenance period.

3.06 REPAIR OF EXISTING SOD AREA DISTURBED BY RENOVATION OR RE-WORK

A. Repair existing sod areas disturbed by renovation work (utilities, paving, etc.) as indicated, in accordance with specifications of this section.

3.07 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Final acceptance inspection shall be conducted after satisfactory completion of ALL punch list items.

B. Sodded Areas: Must take root, display vigorous growth and full coverage.

3.08 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. During work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage. Damage to other work done by landscape crew is to be reported and repaired immediately. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.

C. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment.


M&A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete Foundation Footings 2. Concrete Foundation Walls 3. Concrete Floor Slabs

B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01 40 00 Quality Control. 2. Quality Control: Section 01 40 00

C. Related Section:

1. Reinforcement: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: See Section 01. Comply with following: 1. ACI 301-89 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 304R-85 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing

Concrete. 3. ACI 305R-77 - Hot Weather Concreting (Revised 1982). 4. ACI 306.1-90 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.6 5. ACI 318-89 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 6. Copies: Keep copies of above reference standards at site.

B. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental

requirements on the drawings or by these specifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Designs: Not less than two weeks prior to placing any concrete, submit substantiating data for concrete mixes for acceptance in accordance with Section 01 30 00. 1. Submit separate mix design for each type of concrete to be used in

project. 2. Submittal: Include following:

a. Mix identification designation. b. Statement of intended use for mix. c. Mix proportions, including admixtures. d. Manufacturer's data and/or certifications verifying conformance

of mix materials including admixtures with specified requirements.

e. Wet and dry unit weight. f. Entrained air content. g. Design slump. h. Required average strength qualification data ACI 301 3.9.1

and 3.9.2. Submit separate qualification data for each



production facility which will supply concrete to the project. i. Average qualification data (trial mix data or field test data per

ACI 301 3.9.3). When field test data is used to qualify average strength, submit separate qualification data for each production facility which will supply concrete to project.

j. Separate design mixes are required for each strength and class of concrete, each change in type and/or quantity of mix materials including admixtures, each change in slump limits and each change in entrained air content.

B. Test Reports: Reports of control tests, special tests and core tests specified

under Field Quality Control in Part 3 shall be distributed by independent testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01.


A. Testing Agency: All testing will be conducted by approved testing laboratory. See Field Quality Control - Part 3 and Section 01.

B. Source Quality Control: Engineer/Owner shall be offered uninterrupted

access to ready-mix batching plant while work is in progress.

C. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Engineer/Owner for examination at any time.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Before submittal of mix designs, hold

conference with General Contractor's superintendent, independent testing laboratory, concrete formwork installer, reinforcement installer, concrete supplier, concrete installer, pumping equipment operator, and manufacturer(s) representative(s) in accordance with Section 01600. Also notify Owner and Structural Engineer of meeting at least 10 days in advance. 1. Discuss all matters pertaining to proper forming, reinforcement

placement, concrete supply, concrete placing, concrete testing and concrete curing.

2. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties, Architect and Structural Engineer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Hauling Time: Discharge concrete transmitted in truck mixer, agitator or other transportation device within 1-1/2 hours after mixing water has been added.

B. Extra Water:

1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. 2. Should extra water be required for workability before depositing

concrete and water/cement ratio of accepted mix design has not been exceeded, General Contractor's superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and



signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly

for 40 revolutions of drum or 3-1/2 minutes at mixing speed, whichever is greater.

4. Water may be added at the site only once for each batch. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Placement:

a. When for 3 successive days prior to concrete placement, average daily outdoor temperature falls below 40 degrees F or when average outdoor temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F on day of concrete placement, preparations, preparation, and curing of concrete shall comply with Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting (ACI 306.1).

b. Minimum temperature of concrete upon delivery shall conform to Specifications for Structural Concrete (ACI 301) Table 7.6.1.1. Concrete temperature at placement shall conform to minimum values of ACI 306.1 Table 3.2.1, and shall not exceed minimum values by more than 20 degrees F.

c. Subject to acceptance of Engineer, an accelerating admixture may be used. Admixtures shall meet the requirements of Part 2. Calcium chloride and other chloride-type accelerating admixtures shall not be allowed.

d. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade. Frozen subgrade shall be thawed to minimum depth of 2 feet prior to concrete placement.

e. Minimum temperature of massive embedments at time of concrete placement shall be 32 degrees F.

f. Comply with concrete protection temperature requirements of ACI 306.1. Record concrete temperatures during specified protection period at intervals not to exceed 16 hours and no less than twice during any 24 hour period.

g. Submittal of detailed procedures, means, and methods for production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather is not required.

2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow

recommendations of ACI 305R. b. Temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed

85 degrees F. c. When air temperatures on day of placement are expected to

exceed 90 degrees F., mix ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of mix water.

d. Retarding admixture may be used subject to acceptance of Engineer. Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2.

e. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. Use of continuous fog sprays may be



required by Engineer for 24 hours after depositing or work may be restricted to evenings or nights, especially in times of low humidity.

3. Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet, or snow. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water or to damage the surface finish.

B. Protection: Protect newly finished slabs from rain damage. Cover masonry

walls, glazing, and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to placing of slabs or sidewalks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. ACI 301: Provide materials in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed, unless amended or superseded by requirements of this section or general notes on structural drawings.

B. Concrete Materials (ACI 301 Chapter 2):

1. General: Ready-mixed Concrete: ASTM C94-86b. On-site mixed concrete not allowed.

2. Cement: ASTM C150-86. a. Use Type II cement in all concrete.

3. Fly ash: Fly ash as a substitute for cement will be allowed. Fly ash shall conform to ASTM 618 Class C or F. Substitution for cement shall not exceed 20 percent by weight. Minimum replacement factor shall be 1 to 1. Fly ash shall not be more than 20 percent of total cementitious materials by weight. Fly ash is not permitted in concrete for flatwork.

4. Aggregate: ASTM C33-86, obtained from same source throughout project: a. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand. b. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone containing no

deleterious substances which cause surface spalling. Determine maximum coarse aggregate size by thickness of members, finish required, and spacing of reinforcement. Size: Accepted by Engineer prior to placing any concrete.

5. Water: Potable. 6. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C260-86. 7. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494-86, Type A, containing not

more chloride ions than present in municipal drinking water: a. Eagle Admixtures Conad N. b. Euclid Eucon WR-75 c. Master Builders Pozzolith 344N d. Gifford Hill PSI-N e. Sika Plastocrete 161 f. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01631.

8. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494-86, Type C or E, containing not more chloride ions than present in municipal drinking water and with long term test data from independent testing laboratory providing non-corrosive effect on reinforcing steel:



a. Euclid Accelguard 80 b. W.R. Grace Darex Set Accelerator c. Sika Plasocrete 161 FL d. Master Builders Pozzutec 20 e. Gifford-Hill Gilco Accelerator f. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01631.

10. Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride, thiocyanate, and admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions not allowed.

11. Certification: Submit written conformance to above mentioned requirements and chloride ion content prior to mix design review by Engineer.

C. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Curing Compound - Vertical Surfaces: ASTM C309-81. 2. Curing Compound - Interior Slabs to Receive Seamless Flooring:

ASTM C309-81, Type I Dissipating Resin Type: a. Euclid Kurex DR b. L & M Cure c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01631.

Comply with requirements of floor finish manufacturers. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound - Interior Slabs to Remain Exposed,

Interior Slabs to Receive Resilient Flooring and Carpet, and Exterior Concrete: Minimum 30% solids content, maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per square centimeter (300 square feet per gallon of coverage): a. Euclid Super Rex or Super Pliocure b. Master Builders Masterseal c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01631.

Comply with requirements of floor finish manufacturers. 4. Floor Sealer: Second coat of Curing and Sealing Compound - Interior

Slabs to Remain Exposed as specified above. 5. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz. per sq.yd. complying with AASHTO M182, Class 2.

6. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171:

Waterproof paper Polyethylene film Polyethylene-coated burlap. 2.2 ADHESIVES AND BONDING COMPOUNDS

A. Epoxy Adhesives for use in All Structural Repairs: Two component, 100% solids, 100% reactive compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces and comply with ASTM C881. 1. Euclid Euco Epoxy 452MV or 620. 2. Sika Sikadur Hi-Mod L.V. or Sikadur Hi-Mod. 3. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01631. 4. Where epoxy injection procedures are used, use low viscosity epoxy

made by one of above manufacturers.

B. Bonding Compound:



1. Euclid Euco Weld 2. Larsen Products Weldcrete 3. Sika Sikabond 4. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01631. 5. Use only at areas not subject to moisture.

2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 Chapter 3.

B. Design: Conform to general notes on structural drawings. Proportion ingredients for mixes in accordance with ACI 301 3.9. 1. Should Contractor require special mix due to structural requirements,

weather or materials, submit samples of cement and aggregate to be used to approved testing laboratory. Testing laboratory will make analysis of materials and design proper mix to be used.

C. Slump: Design water-cementitious material ratio to provide slumps indicated

under mix type. 1. Concrete Placed by Pumping: a. Maximum slump of 6" at discharge end of hose for friction

piers. b. Maximum slump of 4" at discharge end of hose for all other

concrete.

D. Water/Cementitious Material Ratio for All Concrete: 0.50, maximum unless specified otherwise under mix types.

E. Selection of Proportions:

1. Mix Design: Cost of concrete mix design by concrete contractor.

2. Selection of Proportions: Use method of ACI 301 3.9. Proportioning based on method of ACI 301 3.10 not allowed.

F. Admixtures:

1. General: No admixtures will be allowed except as specified herein unless authorized by the Engineer. All requests for approval or substitution must be made by the General Contractor and be accompanied by sufficient information and test data for evaluation. All admixtures shall be chemically compatible with cementitious materials and all other admixtures used in the mix. All admixtures shall be chloride free. No calcium chloride shall be added to concrete.

G. Chloride Ions: Maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration in concrete

mix shall not exceed following percentages by weight of cementitious materials. a. Concrete Over Metal Decks: 0.06%. b. Other Concrete: 0.15%.

H. Mixing: Add aggregate and approximately two-thirds of required water to

mixer first and mix minimum of 70 revolutions at mixing speed to insure wetting of all aggregate particles, then add cement, air entraining agent and



remaining water and mix minimum of 30 revolutions of mixing speed. 2.4 CONCRETE MIX TYPES

A. Concrete Mixes: See Structural Drawings for required compressive strengths.

B. Admixtures: 1. Air Entraining Agent: Use at all concrete required to be air entrained.

2.5 COMPOUNDS, HARDENERS, STAINS AND SEALERS

A. Curing and Compounds: ASTM C309 Type I Acrylic Base, Sonneborn “Kure-N-Seal W”, Dayton Superior “Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-21)”, or Acceptable Substitution. Products shall not interfere with bond of adhesive applied flooring or concrete stain.

2.6 CONCRETE FINISHES OTHER THAN FLOOR

A. Patch defective, honeycombed areas, tie holes and the like per Paragraph 3.06F.

B. Give concrete surface which are to be exposed to view the following cleaning:

Prepare paste of one part Portland cement, 1-1/2 parts sand, approved color, to consistency that will permit its application to vertical surface with stiff bristle brush. Brush paste on previously dampened surface to fill completely air bubbles indention. Allow paste to remain on surface until cement has partially set; remove excess grout with steel trowel. After drying for an hour or longer, depending on weather conditions, rub surfaces vigorously with burlap to clean paste completely therefrom, leave pits filled without visible grout film on surface. Concrete columns to have light sandblast finish.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide minimum 15 mil vapor retarder, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. 2. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. 3. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. 4. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. 5. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. 6. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. 7. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.

2.8 Fine-Graded Granular Material:

Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine



aggregates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Engineer's Review: Provide minimum of 48 hour notice to Engineer to allow him to review forms and reinforcement just before concrete is placed and to observe placing of concrete.

B. Contractor's Review: Contractor shall inspect forms and reinforcing prior to

concrete placement to assure accurate placement of embedded items. 3.2 GENERAL

A. Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed unless

amended or superseded by this section or notes on structural drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION

A. Do not begin concrete work until operations are complete enough to allow placement to be carried on as continuous operation for entire section that is to be placed. Clean equipment for mixing and transporting concrete. 1. Forms: Cleaned of debris and ice, wetted (except in freezing

weather), and coated as specified under Section 03100. 2. If water accumulates in forms, pump out before concrete is deposited. 3. Clearly mark finish top surface of vertical members on form walls.

B. Protection: Cover masonry walls, glazing, and other finish materials with

polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to placing of slabs, sidewalks or floors above.

3.4 PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 8.

B. Placement: Place concrete in approximately uniform horizontal layers not over two feet in height. Piling up of concrete in forms or chuting in manner to separate aggregates will not be permitted. Do not drop concrete in free fall over 5 feet, except in drilled piers.

C. Water: Prevent accumulations of water on surface of concrete due to water

gain, segregation, or other causes, during placement or compacting. Make provision for removal of water as may accumulate so that concrete not be placed in such accumulation.

D. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete during and immediately after depositing

by means of mechanical vibrators. Supplement by hand spading at corners and angles of forms, around embedded fixtures and in other difficult areas. 1. Mechanical Vibrator: Comply with ACI 309, minimum frequency of

8,000 vibrations per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and



withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

E. Finishing:

1. Where tops of cast-in-place concrete walls will form finished surface, immediately finish concrete in form by skilled cement finisher. Walls or surfaces not finished to level subject to removal and replacement.

2. Exterior stair nosings: Form a continuous 1" radius nosing. 3.5 FLATWORK

A. Screeds: Establish finish plane of horizontal surfaces by screeds, carefully aligned and securely set, spaced not over eight feet apart and installed at proper level or slope, prior to placing concrete.

B. Floor Slab Tolerances: Level within maximum tolerance of 1/4" in 10 feet

except slope to drains as indicated.

C. Selection of Finishes: In accordance with Section 11.8 of ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated. Finish surfaces sparingly with special tools, such as roller bugs, to force coarse aggregate slightly below surface. Jitterbug tampers not allowed without acceptance of Engineer. Dusting of wearing surfaces with dry materials not allowed.

D. Requirements for Slab Finish: Comply with requirements of various Sections

for slab tolerances, finishes, curing, etc. Be responsible to repair or replace slabs as required and specified in those sections to meet requirements.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Construction Joints of structural members: Thoroughly clean and wet surface prior to placing fresh concrete.

3.7 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS

A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 9.1.

B. Inspection: Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.

C. Repair:

1. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations.

2. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural finished concrete except upon express direction of Engineer.



3. Patch holes and defects.

D. Repair defects in structural concrete walls as follows: 1. Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and

clean thoroughly to remove loose concrete and dust. Apply thick coat of epoxy adhesive. Form and pour full with non-shrink grout prior to development of tack-free condition of epoxy adhesive. Strip forms after grout has hardened and provide specified finish. Moist cure and apply clear curing and sealing compound immediately after finishing.

2. Defects Greater Than 1/2 Inch Depth Not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean and apply epoxy adhesive. Place or dry pack using non-shrink grout prior to development of tack-free condition of epoxy adhesive. If dry pack consistency is required, use non-shrink grout damp pack formula. Provide specified finish and cure.

3. Defects Less Than 1/2 Inch Depth and All Tie Holes: a. For concrete having a specified compressive strength of 5,000

psi or less: Chip and clean per 1. above. Dry pack, finish and cure per 1. above.

4. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review of Engineer.

3.8 TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 Chapter 10.

B. Form Removal: Finish and cure concrete surfaces covered by formwork immediately after forms have been removed. Do not expose more surface area than can be finished and cured in one working day.

C. Patching:

1. Patch voids, honeycombs or damaged areas in accordance with repair of surface defects above.

2. Add white cement to patching grout as required to match color of existing concrete where patches are exposed to view.

3. Patch all tie holes. 4. Use specified bonding compound and epoxy adhesive.

D. Laitance: Remove deposits of laitance occurring on top of concrete surfaces as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent injury to concrete. Repair areas where laitance is removed as specified for patching.

E. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: Treat surfaces of concrete wall, slabs,

beams, and columns, which are to be covered by subsequent work, as specified under Patching.

F. Unpainted Exposed Concrete Surfaces:

1. Carefully protect from damage and soiling concrete surfaces, both interior and exterior, to remain exposed but unpainted.

2. Patch where required as specified under Patching. Upon completion of work, reclean damaged or soiled surface as required to make clean, smooth and finished in every respect.



G. Painted Exposed Concrete Surfaces:

1. Remove fins and irregularities with dry carborundum stone from surfaces.

2. Repair defective areas as specified under Patching. 3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Reference Standard: ACI Chapter 12.

B. Protection: Protect concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping, and other damage during progress of the work, and leave in good condition upon completion.

C. Curing of Concrete Floor Slabs: Moist cure to prevent slab curling and

excessive shrinkage. 3.10 FLOOR SEALING

A. Floor Sealer: 1. Install new breathable acrylic concrete floor sealer per spec section 07

19 23. 2. Upon completion, provide surface clean without discoloration or traces

of excess material. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS

A. Other Concrete Work: Furnish and install other concrete work indicated on drawings, even though not specifically mentioned herein to complete work, including following: 1. Anchors: Install anchors furnished under Section 05500 in

accordance with accepted shop drawings for structural and miscellaneous steel.

2. Equipment Bases: Furnish and install concrete bases for pumps, boilers, tanks, fans, transformers, floor mounted electrical equipment, etc. as indicated. Furnish and install concrete fill in inertia base frames provided under Division 15. Install anchor bolts and inserts in accordance with setting diagrams furnished by contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Finish bases in workmanlike manner with troweled finish. Locate and size bases as determined by contractor furnishing equipment.

3. Flag Pole Base: Form and pour flag pole bases shown on drawings. 4. Splashblocks: Provide where shown on the drawings.


A. Reference Standard: ACI Chapters 16 and 17.

B. General: Testing will be conducted by an approved testing laboratory. See Section 01400.

C. Test Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine concrete quality



throughout project; however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests.

D. Tests: Cooperate fully with those making tests. Following tests and

procedures are subject to change during construction at discretion of Engineer: 1. Test Reports: In accordance with Section 01400. 2. Slump Tests: The Owner shall provide necessary equipment and

shall make tests in conformity with ASTM C143-78. The Owner shall make slump tests on the first truck of each pour and as often as deemed necessary by the Contractor to maintain the required slump and adequate records. In addition, the Owner shall make slump tests when directed by the Engineer. a. Tests shall be made by person thoroughly familiar with

requirements specified. b. Sample concrete at point of placement. c. Should slump exceed limits stated in Concrete Mix Types in

Part 2, batch shall be rejected. d. Keep accurate record of time, location in work and results of

slump tests which shall be available for inspection by Owner and Engineer.

3. Control Tests: a. Control tests of concrete work shall be made on every 50 cubic

yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed and, in any case, minimum of once during each day's pour.

b. Each test shall consist of six standard 6" test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31-84 and ASTM C172-82.

c. Sample concrete at point of placement. d. Two cylinders shall be broken at end of seven days after

placing, two cylinders shall be broken at end of 28 days after placing, and remaining cylinders shall be stored until their disposition is determined by Engineer.

e. In general, remaining cylinders will be broken only when previous test reports indicated unsatisfactory results.

f. Test on remaining cylinders shall be at expense of the Contractor.

g. Engineer reserves right to stop future concrete work when seven or 28 day tests indicate unsatisfactory results until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures have been taken to insure quality concrete in future work and corrections deemed necessary have been made.

h. Tests shall be made at time control tests are taken and so stated in reports to determine slump, air content, unit weight and temperature of concrete.

i. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C138-81 or ASTM C231-82.

4. Special Tests: a. Should Contractor desire control tests to facilitate early

removal of forms, they shall be made in addition to those specified for control tests and shall be completely site-cured.

b. Expense for making additional test cylinders, testing, curing



and protection shall be Contractor's. 5. Strength Level: Considered satisfactory if average of all three sets of

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi.

6. Core Tests: a. If, at any time, concrete control test specimens show

compressive strength of 28 days below required level, or if concrete has been frozen before it has taken final set, so severely that in opinion of Engineer, its strength has been adversely affected, Contractor shall, at his own expense, have sufficient core test taken, number and location to be accepted by Engineer on such portions of work as may have been affected to determine actual conditions of concrete.

b. Securing, Preparing and Testing: ASTM C42-84a. Should tests reveal that concrete does not meet requirements of this specification, Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace entire section involved or make corrections deemed necessary by Engineer.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Installed Work: Protect newly finished slabs from damage. END OF SECTION 03 30 00

M&A PAINTING


SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in

addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or

material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts

(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating

parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork and casework b. Finished electrical equipment. c. Light Fixtures d. Distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:

a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts.

M&A PAINTING


3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM) or

other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and

frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for

gypsum board. 5. Division 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in

Division 15 and 16, respectively. E. Related Documents:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

M&A PAINTING


1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate

each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors

available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After all color selections, the District Representative will furnish color chips for

surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to

simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture is achieved. Furnish for approval minimum 12” X 12” samples of surfaces to be painted. Samples, when approved, will become the standard of comparison, and finished surfaces not equal to sample color shall be refinished at Painting Contractor’s expense.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each sample for location and application.

3. Submit 3 Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only:

a. Concrete: 4-inch-square Samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Unit Masonry: 4-by-8-inch Samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: 8-inch-square Samples for each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch Samples of natural-or stained-wood finish on representative surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch-square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch-long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


M&A PAINTING


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed

painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each

coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each

type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1. District Representative will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft..

b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate

coating systems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages

and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a

minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags

and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

M&A PAINTING



A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be

painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in

the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated

below: a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal of each color applied. b. Exterior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 2 gal. of each color applied. c. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. d. Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 2 gal of each color applied. e. Interior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 2 gal. of each color applied. f. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All paint material selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the

product of a single manufacturer. The best quality materials as manufacyred by any of the following manufacturers or an approved equivalent will be acceptable for use on the work.

B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).

M&A PAINTING


3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Co. (Kelly-Moore). 5. Kwal Howell Paint Co. (Kwal). 6. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat

materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various

coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to

designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer’s material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions

C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the District Representative from paint

manufacturers full line of samples. 2.03 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block

fillers.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils. 2. Coronado; 946-1 1 Super Kote 5000 Commercial Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.4 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; Bloxfil4000-1000 InteriorIExterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 52 1 Fill and Prime Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 5890 Accu-Pro Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of

not less than 8.0 to 12.0 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide InteriorIExterior Masonry Latex Block Filler:

Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils. 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite InteriorIExterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a

dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils.

M&A PAINTING


2.04 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Latex Exterior Primer No. 102: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moonvhite Primer No. 100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not

less than 2.1 mils. 3. Coronado; 48-1 1 Elast-0-Meric Acrylic Masonry Sealer: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 4. ICI Dulux Paints; 2001-1200 Dulux Exterior Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 247 Chem-Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils. 6. Kwal Paint; 5860 Pro-Finish All Purpose 100% Acrylic Primer Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide InteriorIExterior Acrylic Latex Alkali

Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory-formulated alkyd- or alkali-resistant acryliclatex primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moonvhite Primer No. 100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not

less than 2.1 mils. 2. Coronado; 410-1 1 Crylicote Gold Exterior Acrylic House Paint Primer: Applied at a

dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2001-1200 Dulux Exterior Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

4. Kelly-Moore; 250 Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 5810 Universal Primer. Embassy W/B Cancel 100% Acrylic Primer: Kwal, Series #5862 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

C. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior

application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Ironclad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel No. 163: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

M&A PAINTING


4. Kelly-Moore; 171 1 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 6. Kwal Paint; 9210 Accu-Pro Rust Inhibiting Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-858 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6h350WZl: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

D. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Ironclad Latex Low-Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel No. 363: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2. Coronado; 36-1 1 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat InteriorIExterior Waterborne Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry thickness of not less than 2.2 mils. 4. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 6. Kelly-Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 7. Kwal Paint; 5810 Ambassador G-Prime Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 8. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack InteriorIExterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 9. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 10. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

2.05 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex

interior primer for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 2. Coronado; 78-1 1 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex PrimerISealer: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 0800 Accu-Tone Hi-Hide PDQ Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

M&A PAINTING


6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior

application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 21 6: Applied at a dry thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 2. Coronado; 40-1 1 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.at a dry thickness of not less than 1.2 Mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex PrimerISealer: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 0890 Accu-Pro Sandable Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300 Series: Applied at a dry

film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-

formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody No. 2 17: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Coronado; 78-1 1 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1 200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 975 Acry Plex Interior Latex Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 985 Flo-Cote Acrylic Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 6. Kwal Paint; 0890 Accu-Pro Sandable Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

D. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-

based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Ironclad Alkyd Low Lustre Medal and Wood Enamel No. 163:

M&A PAINTING


Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils. 4. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 171 1 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 6. Kwal Paint; 9210 Accu-Pro Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of

not less than 2.0 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-858 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6D350WZl: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.

E. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Ironclad Latex Low Lustre Metal and Wood Enamel No. 363: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2. Coronado; 36-1 1 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry

film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 5810 Ambassador G-Prime Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack InteriorIExterior PrimerIFinish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 7. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite Paint B50W3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not

less than 2.0 mils. 2.06 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; MoorLife Latex House Paint No. 105: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2. Coronado; 10-Line Premium Gold Collection Acrylic One Coat Flat House Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2201-XXXX Dulux Ultra Latex Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1240 Acry-Shield Exterior Acrylic Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 6300 Accu-Pro 100 percent Acrylic Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 10 Line Pitt-Cry1 Exterior Water Base Paint: Applied at a dry

M&A PAINTING


film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint: Applied at a 8. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Flat House and Trim Paint, A80 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

C. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell) acrylic-latex paint for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; MoorGard Latex House Paint No. 103: Applied at a dry film 2. Coronado; 410 Line Crylicote Gold Collection Satin Acrylic House & Trim: thicknessof not less than 1.1 mils. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2403-XXXX Dulux Exterior Latex Satin Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 4.Kelly-Moore; 1245 Acry-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish: Applied at a

dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 7100 Liquid Vinyl 100% Acrylic Satin: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 76 Line Sun-Proof Exterior House & Trim Acrylic Satin Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 7. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Satin Wall Paint A89 Series: applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-

latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint No. 096: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 2 Line Crylicote Gold Collection Gloss Acrylic House & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2407-XXXX Dulux Exterior Latex Semi-Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 3200 Ambassador 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Block Resistant Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 7. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Gloss Latex A-84 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.

D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: Factory-formulated

full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Irnpervex Latex High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel No. 309: Applied at a dry film of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux InteriorIExterior Acrylic Gloss Finish:

M&A PAINTING


Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 8400 Ambassador 100% Acrylic Gloss Block Resistant Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 Line Pitt-Tech One Pack InteriorIExterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 52-Line Brilliant Reflections InteriorlExterior Latex Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior High Gloss Latex Enamel A85 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.

E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory- formulated fullgloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Impervex Enamel High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel No. 309: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux InteriorlExterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 8300 W.B. Industrial DTM Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-LinePitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 5 1 -Line Brilliant Reflections Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils.

2.07 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior

application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal Wall Satin No. 215 Premium Interior Finishes Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Coronado; 26 Line Gold Acrylic Latex Flat Wall Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1201 -XXXX Dulux Ultra Velvet Sheen Interior Flat Latex wall & Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 550 Super Latex Interior Flat Wall Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 0910 Accu-Pro Velva Sheen Interior Flat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 80-Line Wallhide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint: Applied at a

M&A PAINTING


dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 7. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint, A86 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal Aquavelvet No. 3 19: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Coronado; 34 Line Tough Walls Acrylic Eggshell Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1403-XXXX Dulux Ultra Eggshell Interior Latex Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1610 Sat-N-Sheen Interior Latex Low Sheen Wall and Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 1686 Dura-Poxy Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 6. Kwal Paint; 2100 Accu-Pro PC Latex Eggshell: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

C. Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel

for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Regal AquaGlo No. 333 Premium Interior Finishes Latex Semi- Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Coronado; 22 Line Tough Walls Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1407-XXXX Dulux Ultra Semi-Gloss Interior Acrylic Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 1685 Dura-Poxy Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Kwal Paint; 3000 Accu-Pro Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Liquid vinyl 100% acrylic, Interior/Exterior low sheen. 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 88-1 10 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi- Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Superpaint Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel A88 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.

D. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior

enamel.

1. Benjamin Moore; Irnpervex Enamel No. 309: Applied at a dry film thickness of

M&A PAINTING


not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 414 Line Super Kote 5000 Acrylic High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux InteriorIExterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1680 Dura-Poxy Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Kwal Paint; 8400 Ambassador 100% Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 51 Line Brilliant Reflections InteriorIExterior Latex Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W201: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

2.08 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. 2. Coronado; none required. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; none required. 4. Kelly-Moore; none required. 5. Kwal Paint; none required. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. 8. Sherwin-Williams; none recommended.

B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Coronado; 69-27 Oil Penetrating Wood Stain. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1700-XXX Woodpride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing Stain. 4. Kelly-Moore; McCloskey Stain. 5. Kwal Paint; 8709 Woodkraft Semi-Transparent Stain. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series.

C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413. 2. Coronado; 8 1-10 Dual Seal. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 2 164 E Z Sand Alkyd Q. D. Sealer. 5. Kwal Paint; 4048 Woodkraft SealerIFinish Satin. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and finish.

M&A PAINTING


7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43.

D. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear varnish.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre No. 435. 2. Coronado; 15 1-1 00 Alkyd Clear Satin Varnish. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 2050 Kel--Aqua Stain Base. 5. Kwal Paint; 4039 Woodkraft Satin Varnish. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series.

E. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated clear satin acrylic-based

polyurethane varnish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin. 2. Coronado; 70-1 00 Aqua-Plastic Urethane Clear Satin. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1802-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Satin Varnish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 2097 Kel-Thane I1 Clear Acrylic Urethane--Satin. 5. Kwal Paint; McCloskey Waterborne Polyurethane Satin. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin, A68 Series.

F. Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Varnish: Factory-formulated clear gloss acrylic-based

polyurethane varnish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes High Gloss No. 428. 2. Coronado; 70- 10 Aqua-Plastic Urethane Clear Gloss. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1808-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Gloss Varnish. 4. Kelly-Moore; 2096 Kel-Thane I1 Clear Acrylic Urethane--Gloss. 5. Kwal Paint; McCloskey Waterborne Polyurethane Gloss. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-45 Rez Full-Gloss Acrylic Clear Polyurethane.

7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Gloss, A68 Series PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for paint application.

B. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

M&A PAINTING


C. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions

within a particular area.

D. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

E. Notify District Representative about anticipated problems when using the materials specified

over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,

lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items

removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of

substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to

manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement

plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint

manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing

appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove

M&A PAINTING


acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,

mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of

white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other

wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat

of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been

shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer

and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment

wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been

damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based

solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's

written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free

of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

M&A PAINTING


E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shad to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats or match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators

and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or

conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in

fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior and interior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.

10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of

application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or

M&A PAINTING


feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

5. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other

applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of

appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as

recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as

recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block and Dur-rock panels at a

rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as

recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a

smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

H. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface

film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

I. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave

no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,

refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to

items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces

M&A PAINTING


L. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Un-insulated metal piping. 2. Un-insulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable

jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

M. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards.

3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.


A. District Representative reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any

time and as often as District Representative deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: District Representative may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the non-complying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove non-complying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other

discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove

spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by

painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

M&A PAINTING


B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore

damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete unit

masonry: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Provide the following finish systems over exterior gypsum soffit board:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over an exterior alkyd- or alkali-resistant primer. a. Primer: Exterior gypsum soffit board primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.

C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items.

1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coat: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint. c. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.

D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces:

1. Low-Luster Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coat: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete

masonry: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.

M&A PAINTING


a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 3. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel. 4. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.

C. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood

surfaces :

1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semi-gloss alkyd-enamel

finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.

a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semi-gloss alkyd-enamel finishes.

b. Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel. 3. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood primer. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semi-gloss alkyd-enamel

finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.

D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:

M&A PAINTING


1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel. 3. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.

E. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces:

1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer

a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss acrylic enamel. 3. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.

3.09 INTERTOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork:

1. Waterborne Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and waterborne interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.

a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. c. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish.

B. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork:

M&A PAINTING


1. Waterborne Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish

over a sanding sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. c. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish.


BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 1

SECTION 220000 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the, General and Supplementary Conditions, Division-1 Conditions specification sections apply to the Division 22 specifications and drawings.

B. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 22 and Division 22 drawings. Refer to Division 26 specification section and Division 26 drawings.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for plumbing installations and includes requirements common to more than one (1) section of Division 22. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1 and Division 22.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and restart-up, flushing and filling both new and existing systems.

C. Coordinate all services shutdown with the Owner, provide temporary services as shown on the drawings.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance operation and servicing of all new plumbing systems which are to be used by the Owner during the time of any occupancy and use of any areas within the construction limitations before final completion or acceptance of the systems. A written record of maintenance, operation and servicing shall be turned over to the Owner prior to final acceptance.


A. The Contractor shall be required to attend a mandatory pre-bid walk-thru and shall make themselves familiar with the existing conditions. No additional costs to the Owner shall be accepted for additional work for these existing conditions.

B. Field verify all existing conditions prior to submitting bids.

C. Report any existing damaged equipment or systems to the Owner prior to any work.

D. Protect all plumbing and electrical work against theft, injury or damage from all causes until it has been tested and accepted.

E. Be responsible for all damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other contractors during the construction and guarantee period. Repair or replace any part of the Work which


may show defect during one (1) year from the final acceptance of all work. Provided such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not due to the Owner’s carelessness or improper use.

1.4 INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS

A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a State of Colorado Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. The General Contractor shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of Colorado and shall supply the General Contractor Project Manager with names and license numbers. Plumbing Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.

1.5 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.

B. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents, motors, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to Division 1 for access door specification.

C. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be removed or 24-inch x 24-inch if used for service only, unless size is indicated on Drawings.

D. Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be built, in ample time for building-in as the work progresses. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc., to permit use of minimum number of access doors within a given room or space.

E. Factory manufactured doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish in which they are to be installed.

F. Access doors in fire-rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating.

1.6 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided equipment for rough-in requirements.


1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Refer to Division 1.

B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations of NFPA, EPA, OSHA and ASHRAE.

C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated.

D. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with U.S. EPA, state and local regulations.

E. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.

1.8 PERMITS AND FEES


B. Owner shall pay all tap, development, meter, etc., fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities.

C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all permits, inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the Work.

1.9 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required offset, valve, fitting, etc.

B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both.

C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurement, take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.

D. Before any Work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that required piping grades can be maintained and that ductwork can be run as contemplated without interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the work of other trades.

E. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

F. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for plumbing installations.

G. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.


H. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

I. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of plumbing equipment and materials.

J. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install plumbing piping and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

K. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

L. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities, services and Division 33. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. General:1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of Plumbing Work in

accordance with Division 1.2. In general, follow all regulations of OSHA as specified in Part 1926, Subpart P,

"Excavations, Trenching and Shoring". Follow specifications of Division 22 as they refer specifically to the Plumbing Work.

B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least two (2) business days before excavation is to begin. Also, prior to starting excavation, brief employees on marking and color codes and train employees on excavation and safety procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by carefully probing and hand digging.

C. Provide all necessary pumping, cribbing and shoring.

D. Walls of all trenches shall be a minimum of 6-inch clearance from the side of the nearest mechanical work. Install pipes with a minimum of 6-inch clearance between them when located in same trench.

E. Pipe Trenching:1. Dig trenches to depth, width, configuration, and grade appropriate to the piping being

installed. Dig trenches to 6-inches below the level of the bottom of the pipe to be installed. Install 6-inch bed of pea gravel or squeegee, mechanically tamp to provide a firm bed for piping, true to line and grade without irregularity. Provide depressions only at hubs, couplings, flanges, or other normal pipe protrusions.

F. Backfilling shall not be started until all work has been inspected, tested and accepted. All backfill material shall be reviewed by the Soils Engineer. In no case shall lumber, metal or other debris be buried in with backfill.


G. Trench Backfill:1. Backfill to 12-inches above top of piping with pea gravel or squeegee, the same as used

for piping bed, compact properly.2. Continue backfill to finish grade, using friable material free of rock and other debris.

Install in 6-inch layers, each properly moistened and mechanically compacted prior to installation of ensuing layer. Compaction by hydraulic jetting is not permissible.

H. After backfilling and compacting, any settling shall be refilled, tamped, and refinished at this Contractor's expense.

I. This Contractor shall repair and pay for any damage to finished surfaces.

J. Complete the backfilling near manholes using pea gravel or squeegee, installing it in 6-inch lifts and mechanically tamping to achieve 95 percent compaction.

K. Use suitable excavated material to complete the backfill, installed in 6-inch lifts and mechanically compacted to seal against water infiltration. Compact to 95 percent for the upper 30-inches below paving and slabs and 90 percent elsewhere.

1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

B. Refer to Division 1.

C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.

D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of plumbing installations.

E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.

F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work;2. Remove and replace defective work;3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents;4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing;5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures;6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore work to provide for

Architect observation of concealed work.

G. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected plumbing equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of plumbing piping, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other plumbing items made obsolete by the new work.

H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.


I. Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

J. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical, plumbing and electrical services passing through remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover.


A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and Division 1, "PRODUCTS, OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTION".

1.13 PLUMBING SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1 and AIA Document A201 (1987) Edition, "SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES".

B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes in construction required by their use shall be borne by Contractor.

C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or Local Energy Conservation Standards.

D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted by and stamped by the Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect will not be processed unless prior written approval is obtained by the Contractor.

E. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Division concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

F. If more than two (2) submittals (either for shop drawings or for as-built drawings) are made by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor.

G. Before starting Work, prepare and submit to the Architect all shop drawings and descriptive equipment data required for the project. Unless each item is identified with specification section and sufficient data to identify its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the item will be returned without action or "Revise and Resubmit". Continue to submit shop drawings after each Engineer's action, until a "Reviewed" action is received. The Contractor shall submit the total number of sets as called for in Division 1 to the Architect for final distribution. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any materials not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 22 which follow.1. Sanitary drainage piping, fittings and joining materials2. Domestic water piping, fittings and joining materials3. Valves, including pressure relief and pressure regulating


4. Supports, anchors and seals5. Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's installation

instructions

H. Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by plumbing trades.

I. Identify each item with equipment tag with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with the specifications.

J. Electronic submittals shall be packaged as a bookmarked multi-page single PDF file and shall not be over 5MB. Electronic Submittals over 5MB will not be accepted and will be returned un-reviewed.

1.14 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A. All “Requests for Information” submitted by the Contractor shall include a proposed solution and an estimated cost/schedule impact. Any RFI’s that do not contain this required information will be sent back to the Contractor unanswered.

1.15 PRODUCT LISTING

A. Prepare listing of major plumbing equipment and materials for the project, within two (2) weeks of signing the Contract Documents and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice.

C. Provide all information requested.

D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1, "PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION".

E. When two (2) or more items of same material or equipment are required (plumbing fixtures, pumps, valves, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated.

F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.


1.16 NAMEPLATE DATA

A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of plumbing equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.



B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust and moisture.

D. Coordinate deliveries of plumbing materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

E. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for hub-and-spigot and no-hub pipe. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

F. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

G. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

1.18 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Keep a complete set of record document prints or electrical mark-ups in custody during entire period of construction at the construction site.

C. Mark drawing prints to indicate revisions to piping, size and location both exterior and interior; including locations of control devices and units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); RFI's; change orders; concealed control system devices. Changes to be noted on the drawings shall include final location of any piping relocated more than 1'-0" from where shown on the drawings.


D. Mark Equipment Schedules on the drawings with changes to Manufacturer, Model Number, and data based on reviewed shop drawings.

E. At the completion of the project, mark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn these drawings over to the General Contractor for his submission to the Architect. This Contract will not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received and reviewed by the Architect.

1.19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for maintenance data, include the following information:1. Description of plumbing equipment, function, normal operating characteristics and

limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.5. Manufacturer's service manuals for all plumbing equipment provided under this Contract.6. Include the valve tag list.7. Name, Address and Telephone Number of party to be contacted for twenty-four (24) hour

service for each item of equipment.8. Starting, stopping, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment clearly

indicated for each piece of equipment.9. Complete parts list.10. Plumbing warranties.

C. This Contract will not be considered completed, nor will final payment be made, until all specified material is received in this Operating and Maintenance Report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect.

1.20 WARRANTIES

A. Refer to Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In any case, the entire mechanical system shall be warranted no less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance by the Owner.

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 22, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three-ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date or beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.


1.21 CLEANING


B. Refer to other sections of Division 22, for requirements cleaning strainers and disinfection of plumbing systems prior to final acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION - 220000

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This Section includes potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water valves within the building to a point 5-feet outside the building. This section includes the following:1. Valves


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:1. Comply with ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for Dimension and Design Criteria.2. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for products that contact drinking water. 3. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements.4. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual.5. Safe Drinking Water Act – Public Law No. 111-380.

1.3 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a State of Colorado Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. Contractors shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of Colorado and shall supply the Project Manager with names and license numbers. Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


B. Test Reports.

C. Valve schedule listing valve designation number, valve type, size, location, and function of all valves.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. General:1. Valves shall be NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372 compliant for potable-water service.

Valves for domestic water shall be 3rd Party Certified.2. Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual".3. Sizes: Provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.4. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to

allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation.5. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.

B. Ball Valves:1. 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: MSS-SP-110, 150 PSI SWP, 600 PSI WOG, two-piece ASTM

B-584 lead-free cast bronze body, full port, chrome plated brass/bronze ball, PTFE seats, anti-blowout stem, separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, extended stem, and vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded or soldered end connections. Valve shall be NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372 compliant for potable-water service. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Apollo (Conbraco) Model 77CLF (lead free) 2) Nibco 3) Milwaukee 4) Hammond

C. Drain Valve: Lead-free bronze ball valve with threaded hose end and cap with chain. Valve upstream of backflow preventer shall have vacuum breaker and cap. MSS-SP-110, 150 PSI SWP, 600 PSI WOG, two-piece ASTM B-584 lead-free cast bronze body, full port, chrome plated brass/bronze ball, PTFE seats, anti-blowout stem, separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, extended stem, and vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded or soldered end connections. Valve shall be NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372 compliant for potable-water service.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Apollo 70LF-100/200-HC (lead-free)b. Nibcoc. Milwaukeed. Hammond

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVES

A. Installation:1. Use gate valves only on domestic water service entrances as specified by the Authority

Having Jurisdiction.2. Use ball or butterfly valves for isolation valves unless noted otherwise.3. Use ball valves for throttling or water meter bypass.


4. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and stops on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated.

5. Drain Valves: Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping system.

6. Check Valves: Install check valves on discharge side of each pump, each side of reduced pressure backflow preventers and elsewhere as indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

END OF SECTION 220523

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Extent of Supports and Anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 sections.

B. Types of Supports and Anchors specified in this section include the following:1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports2. Vertical-Piping Clamps3. Hanger-Rod Attachments4. Building Attachments

C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.

B. Codes and Standards:1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Plumbing Codes pertaining to product

materials and installation of supports and anchors.2. MSS Standard Compliance:

a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.

C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements.


D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.b. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.c. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Division Figgie Internationald. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.e. Elcen Metal Products Companyf. Erico/Caddyg. Unistrut Metal Framing Systemsh. Hubbard Enterprises (Supports for domestic water piping)i. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.j. Anvil

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that

will not have field-applied finish.2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 11. Steel Pipe, size 3/8-inch thru 12-inch, B-Line B31002. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3104CT3. Cast Iron Pipe, size 4-inch thru 24-inch, B-Line B3100

C. Adjustable Swivel Ring: MSS Type 101. Steel Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 2-inch, B-Line B3170NF2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3170CT

D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 81. Steel Pipe, size 3/4-inch thru 20-inch, B-Line B33732. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3373CT

E. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.

F. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe:1. 1/2-Inch thru 3-1/2 Inch: Steel offset hook.


2. 4-Inch and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

G. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel or Copper Coated riser clamp.

H. Upper Attachments:1. Beam Clamps:

a. All thread rod sized 3/8-inch and ½-inch, B-Line B3034b. All thread rod sizes 5/8-inch, B-Line B3033c. All thread rod sizes ¾-inch and up, B-Line B3055

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS

A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 and tables in this section. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

B. New Construction:1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced

concrete beams wherever practicable.2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete

for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inch.3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.4. Use drop-in anchors for concrete structures.5. Use beam clamps for steel structures.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of


horizontal piping to be supported together on field fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.

B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories.

C. Support fire-water piping independently from other piping systems.

D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.

E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units and within 1'-0" of each horizontal elbow.

F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.

H. Install horizontal water distribution piping with the following maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod sizes:

Nom. Pipe Size - Inches

Steel Pipe Max. Span - Feet

Copper Tube and DWV Copper

Max. Span - Feet

Min. Rod Diameter - Inches

Up to 1/2 6 6 3/83/4 & 1 8 6 3/81-1/4 10 6 3/81-1/2 10 6 3/8

2 10 10 3/82-1/2 10 10 1/2

3 10 10 1/24 10 10 5/8 5 10 10 5/8 6 10 10 3/4 8 10 10 3/4

I. Install sanitary drainage and vent systems with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

Pipe Size CAST IRON PIPE – HUB AND SPIGOT


AND NO-HUB

Maximum Hanger

Spacing (ft.)

Maximum Vertical

Spacing (ft.)

Minimum Rod Size

(in.)

1-1/4" to 2” 5 15 3/8

2-1/2" to 5” 5 15 1/2

6" 5 15 5/8

8" to 12” 5 15 3/4

14" to 16” 5 15 1Based on MSS-69 & IPC.Provide midstory guides for piping 2 inches and smaller.

J. Support horizontal cast iron pipe as follows:1. Hub and Spigot: All sizes - One (1) hanger to each joint.2. No-Hub: All sizes.

a. With ASTM C 1540 stainless steel couplings: One (1) hanger to each joint.b. With all other stainless steel band type couplings: One (1) hanger to each side of

joint.c. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18-inches of each joint and with 5-feet

maximum spacing between hangers, except that pipe exceeding 5-feet in length shall be supported at intervals no greater than 10-feet.

d. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical hub and spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical no-hub pipe so that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the support.

K. Provide copper or copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

L. Place a hanger within 1-foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow.

M. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) minimum after piping is erected.

N. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15-foot intervals for steel and 10-feet for copper.

O. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze hangers.

P. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

Q. All insulated pipes ( 2"d) shall have thermal shield insert at all support points. All piping shall have thermal shield inserts at each penetration through wall, floor and roof.

R. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides shall be securely anchored to the building structure.


S. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, waste/vent piping or brackets connected to studs. Wires or straps will not be permitted.1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the studs or by

a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping.2. Prevent copper tubes from making contact with steel brackets using fire retardant

polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material.3. Place supports every 10-feet on vertical pipe and every 5-feet on horizontal pipe.

T. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the following:1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is

considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice the actual load.

2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than six (6) inches) in undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly installed, the Contractor shall test load any fifty (50) successively driven fasteners. If 10 percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Hangers for piping shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks with steel plates and bolted rod conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span the number of floor deck attachments required.

4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to control movement to compensators.

D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.


HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220533 - 1

SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Extent of Electric Heating Cable Work is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified herein.

B. Applications for Electric Heating Cables required for the project include the following:1. Heat-Tracing

C. Refer to Division 26 sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways, boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with electric heating cables; not work of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for electric heating cables.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of electric heating cables including, but not necessarily limited to, layout, locations, elevations, wall and floor penetrations, and connections.

C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed piping, and compressed air systems products; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electric heating cables showing layout, including grid networks and cable runs, of heating cables and associated devices. Include requirements for proper spacing between cables, and show locations of connectors and connections to electrical power feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed and portions that are field-installed.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for compressed air systems materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, record drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.



A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric heating cables, of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least two (2) years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electric heating cable work similar to that required for this project.

C. Codes and Standards:1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements

of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electric heating cables.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable torquing requirements of UL Standard 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors". Provide electric heating cables and components which are UL listed and labeled.

3. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable recommended installation practices of IEEE Standard 241, "Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings", pertaining to electric heating cables.

4. NEMA Compliance: Provide electric heating cables and accessories which comply with NEMA standards.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver electric heating cables in factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings, which properly protect cables from damage.

B. Store electric heating cables in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping.

C. Handle electric heating cables carefully to prevent physical damage to cables and components. Do not install damaged cables; remove from site and replace damaged cables with new.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric heating cables of one of the following (for each type of cable):1. Raychem Corporation

2.2 ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES

A. Pipe Freeze Protection Heating Cables: Provide self-regulating heat-tracing electric heating cable and components which are suitable for freeze protection of metal or plastic piping. Select heater consisting of 2-16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires parallel embedded in a radiation cross-linked conductive polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature along its


length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself without overheating, to be cut to length in the field, and to be used directly on plastic pipe. Cover heater with a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin dielectric jacket. Provide heater with a self-regulating factor of greater than 90 percent to conserve energy and to prevent overheating. Self-regulation factor is defined as the percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output ranging from 40 degree F (4 degree C) pipe temperature operation to 150 degree F (65 degree C) pipe temperature operation. Heat trace routed to below grade shall route back up and terminate above grade.

B. Electric Heating System Controls: Provide ambient temperature sensor, Raychem Model AMC-F5.

C. Electric Heating System Accessories: Provide heating system accessories including, but not limited to, tapes, cable ties, warning labels, end seals and splices, and installation clips for the application indicated and for a complete system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which electric heating cables are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Ensure that surfaces, and pipes to which electric heating cables are to be installed are free of burrs and sharp protrusions and that pipes have been pressure tested for leakage. Also ensure that surfaces and substrates where cables are installed are plumb and level. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES

A. Install electric heating cables including components as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, applicable portions of NEC, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that units fulfill requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NECA's "Standard of Installation".

B. Coordinate with other work including flooring, concrete, roofing, insulation, finish work, and electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electric heating cables with other work.

C. Protect installed electric heating cables, including leads, from damage and crushing by construction work.

D. Connect electrical power, fasten end-seals, and accomplish splicing of electric heating cables properly in accordance with requirements.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B.


3.3 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for electric heating cables as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Prior to energizing electrical power circuitry, test installed electric heating cabling, including splice and tee connections, for electrical continuity.

B. After applying initial plaster, concrete coat, or thermal insulation, test cables for continuity and insulation resistance of 10 megohms, or greater, measured to ground. Where leakage is detected, remove cabling and replace with new and proceed with retesting to demonstrate compliance.

C. After attaching electric heating cables to pipe, roof, or wire mesh, test cables for continuity and insulation resistance of 10 megohms, or greater, measured to ground. Where leakage detected, remove cabling and replace with new and proceed with retesting to demonstrate compliance.

D. Subsequent to wire and cable installation, energize electric heating cables and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.


PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes:1. Piping Insulation, Jackets and Accessories2. Equipment Insulation and Covering

B. Refer to other Division 22 sections for Shields, Inserts, and Mechanical Identification.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.

C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulating cements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and schedule listing materials, thickness, K-value, density, and furnished accessories for each service or equipment specified.


A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of manufacturer, and brand.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:1. Insulation:


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (flexible elastomeric)b. Johns-Manville Products Corp. (fiberglass, calcium silicate)c. Knauf Fiber Glass (fiberglass)d. Manson Insulation Co. (fiberglass, calcium silicate)e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (fiberglass)f. Rubatex Corp. (flexible elastomeric)g. Aeroflex (flexible elastomeric)

2. Jacketing, Coatings, Adhesives, Sealants and Covering Products:a. Childersb. Fosterc. Ceel-Co.d. Johns-Manville Products Corp.e. Knauf Fiber Glassf. Venture Tape Corporationg. Design Polymetrics

2.2 PIPING INSULATION

A. Glass Fiber: ASTM C 547, Type 1, rigid molded, noncombustible, 0.23 "K" value at 100

degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 850 degree F, moisture sorption less than 0.2% by volume. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).

B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C 1136, 45lbs/in tensile strength (ASTM D 828), or beach puncture 50 oz in/in tear minimum (ASTM D 781). White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.

C. Connections: Tacks, pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape, Perma-Weld adhesive.

D. Tie Wire: 16-Gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers.

E. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C 534, Type I, flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded, 0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 220 degree F, water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm-inch, 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).

F. Field Applied Fittings and Jackets:1. PVC Plastic:

a. One-piece, gloss white, molded fitting covers with factory installed fiberglass insulation inserts.

b. 20 Mil (30 mil for exterior applications) cut and curled gloss white jacketing material. Composite 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 90A).

c. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.2. Canvas: UL Listed fabric, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire

retardant lagging adhesive. Foster 30-36, Childers CP-50AMV1 or Duct Mate Lag it.3. Aluminum: 0.016-Inch thick sheet with factory applied moisture barrier, smooth,

embossed finish with longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die shaped fitting covers.4. Stainless Steel: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010-inch.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions where mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

A. Cold Piping:1. Applications:

a. Potable and non-potable cold water.b. Sanitary sewer piping exposed in crawl space.

2. Insulation:a. Fiberglass or Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2-Inch thickness up to 1-1/4 inch pipe size,

1-inch thickness for 1-1/2 inch pipe size and larger.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. Install insulation after piping system tests and heat trace installation have been completed.

B. Clean piping to remove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation.

C. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes, and recognized industry standards.

D. Omit insulation on exposed chrome-plated piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

E. Secure longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips according to manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Firmly rub lap and butt strips to pressurize seam and ensure positive closure.

G. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use scraps.

H. Apply insulation to piping with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids.

I. Apply insulation on cold surfaces with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, and anchors that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.

J. Extend surface finishes to protect all surfaces, end, and raw edges of insulation.

K. Protect vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation from puncture or other damage. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier coating.


L. Cover valves, fittings and similar items with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded or job fabricated covers (at Installer's option). Coat all below ambient valves, fittings and similar items with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh before application of PVC covers.

M. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where fire-stopping materials are required.

N. Apply adhesives, mastics and coatings at manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage per gallon.

O. Replace all damaged insulation in whole; Repair of damaged insulation will not be accepted.

P. Insulate fittings and valves with PVC insulated fitting covers and insulation inserts per manufacturer's recommendations.

Q. Install PVC jacket on piping in crawl space.1. Install PVC jackets by overlapping and sealing all joints with solvent-welding adhesive

per the manufacturers recommended installation procedures. Locate longitudinal seams at the bottom of piping.


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5-feet outside the building. This section includes the following:1. Pipe and Tube Materials:

a. Above Grade, inside buildings.b. Below Grade, inside buildings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Water Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building or on the premises, which conveys water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage.

B. Water Service Piping: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the water distributing system of the building served.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products and installation. Safety

valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.2. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualification" for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators.3. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.4. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements.5. Comply with NSF 61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections

1 through 9," For Potable Domestic Water Piping and Components; NSF 61 Annex G or NSF 372.

6. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual.7. Safe Water Drinking Act – Including Public Law 111-380 – Cited as the “Reduction of

Lead in Drinking Water Act”.

B. All piping systems shall be installed to manufacturer's standards and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall demonstrate prior to installation of any piping that joining methods and procedures are acceptable to the Engineer and/or Owner with the Factory Representative present. During the installation of the piping system, the Contractor shall be required to provide joint coupons as requested by the Owner or Engineer and repair and/or replace system if joints are deemed unsatisfactory.


1.4 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS

A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a State of Colorado Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. The General Contractor shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of Colorado Plumbing Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




B. Test Reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS

A. Above Grade Inside Buildings:1. Pipe 4-Inch and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type L lead-free hard drawn copper tube.

a. Fittings:1) Lead-Free Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22.2) Lead-Free Cast Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18.3) Lead-Free Cast Copper Alloy Flanges Class 150 and 300, Flat-Face Type:

ASME B16.24.4) Contractor Option: Mechanical Pressure-Seal Fittings as manufac-tured by

Viega or Nibco. System shall be lead-free. Fitting shall be press type with EPDM sealing elements. Contractor shall order valves and other components that are compatible with this press system. Solder joints are acceptable where press system is not the appropriate application.

b. Joining Material:1) Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32; minimum tensile strength of 5,900 psi.

Solder shall be certified to meet NSF 61 Annex G or NSF 372.

c. Fluxes:1) ASTM B813, Lead-Free Water Soluble, Liquid or Paste Type and be

certified to meet NSF 61 Annex G or NSF 372.

B. Below Grade Inside Buildings:1. Pipe 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type K lead-free soft copper or Type K lead-

free annealed copper tube.a. Fittings:

1) Lead-Free Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.


2) Lead-Free Cast Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18.b. Joining Material:

1) Brazing: ANSI/AWS A5.8.2) Lead-free.3) Brazing rods containing cadmium shall not be used.

c. Fluxes:1) ANSI/AWS A5.31, Type FB3-A or FB3-C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices to achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/ replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16-inch misalignment tolerance.

B. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed.

C. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

D. Install piping straight, plumb, level and at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Install piping free of sags or bends and allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of insulation and servicing of valves.

H. Install means to drain the system at all low points in mains, risers, and branch lines.

I. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Maintain the fire and smoke rated integrity where pipes pass through fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.

J. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Use steel pipe for sleeves 6-inch and smaller. Use sheet metal for pipe sleeves 6-inch and larger.

K. Coordinate foundation and all other structural penetrations with Structural Engineer.


3.2 UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Clean fittings, nipples and other field joints thoroughly before coating.

B. Cast Iron Pipe:1. Protect gray and ductile cast iron pipe installed below grade with polyethylene

encasement applied in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5.2. Install ductile iron pipe below grade as prescribed by AWWA C600.

C. Provide and install concrete thrust block and 3/4-inch steel threaded tie bar at each direction change on underground pressure pipe. Embed tie bar in thrust block and connect to upstream fitting. Paint tie bar with two (2) coats of Bitumastic #50 paint.

D. Bury all outside water piping minimum 5'-0" below grade to top of pipe.


A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has

been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction,

at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official.a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before

concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the Plumbing Official to

observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code.

3. Reinspections: Whenever the Plumbing Official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the Plumbing Official.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.

B. Piping Tests:1. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test

piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.

2. Test piping that is to be concealed before being permanently enclosed.3. As soon as work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance

with specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required.4. Give a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance

test will be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of Agency Having Jurisdiction or his representative. Submit three (3) copies of successful tests to the Engineer for his review. Report shall state system tested and date of successful test.

5. Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with regulations of Agencies Having Jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until such certificates have been delivered.


6. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor.7. System Tests:

a. Hydrostatic Test: Pressurize the system to 100psig or 150 percent of system pressure, whichever is greater. Maintain pressure until the entire system has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four (4) hours.

b. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior to any testing. For tests of this type, subject the piping system to the gas pressure indicated for that specific system. Maintain the test pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint. The air test is not allowed on CPVC piping systems.

c. Repair failed piping sections by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.

d. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.


A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have

been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Clean and replace strainers.2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the Authority Having

Jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear

at the points of outlet.b. Fill the system or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or part thereof, and allow to stand for twenty-four (24) hours or fill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for three (3) hours.

c. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section specifies the following:1. Pipe and Tube Materials:

a. Sanitary Drainage, Vents

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer to a point 5'-0" outside the building wall.

B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal.

C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.

D. Vent System: Pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the International and

Local Plumbing Code.2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials,

products, and installation of soil and waste systems.3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to materials,

products, and installation of soil and waste systems.


4. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable ASTM Standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.

5. CISPI Compliance: Comply with applicable CISPI Standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.

6. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste systems.

7. PVC, PP and ABS Pipe: Only Contractor's personnel which have received training in the installation of this material and meet the manufacturer's qualifications shall do the assembly of such material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENTS

A. Above Grade:1. Pipe 1-1/2 Inch to 10-Inch: Service class hubless cast iron soil pipe: CISPI 301, ASTM

A888. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NSF International.a. Fittings: CISPI 301, NSF International, hubless cast iron, long sweep bends.b. Joining Material: For ASTM A888 pipe, CISPI 310 coupling, assembly of

stainless steel shield and clamp with ASTM C564 elastomeric sealing sleeve. Coupling shall be certified by NSF for CISPI 310 testing and manufactured in the USA.

2. Pipe 1-1/4 Inch to 4-Inch: DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306.a. Fittings:

1) Cast Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23.2) Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29.

b. Joining Material:1) Solder: Lead-free ASTM B32, Solder shall be certified to meet NSF 61

Annex G and/or NSF 372. c. Fluxes:

1) Lead-free ASTM B813 liquid or paste type. 3. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):

a. Tyler Pipeb. AB&Ic. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry

B. Below Grade:1. Pipe 2-Inch to 15-Inch: Service class cast iron hub-and-spigot soil pipe, ASTM A74.

Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NSF International.a. Fittings: ASTM A74 cast iron service class, hub and spigot compression joint,

long sweep bends.b. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.

2. Pipe 2-Inch to 16-Inch: Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Solid Wall Schedule 40 DWV.a. Manufactured from virgin Type 1, Grade 1 PVC 1120 (Cell Class 12454-B) per

ASTM D-1784.


b. Meet the dimensional, physical properties, and tolerances of ASTM D-1785 and ASTM D-2665.

c. Mark pipe with ASTM D-2665, nominal pipe size, and the symbols PVC and DWV at 5-foot intervals.

d. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC, solvent cement with long sweep bends. Injection molded conforming to National Sanitation Standard 14.

e. Joining Material:1) Solvent cement suitable for type and size of pipe installed as recommended

by the pipe manufacturer.2) Make solvent cement joints from a two-step process with ASTM F656

primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564.

3. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):a. Tyler Pipeb. AB&Ic. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Install piping in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.

C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.

D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.

E. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

F. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.

G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing drainage piping with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) downward slope in direction of drain for piping 3-inch and smaller, and 1/8-inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4-inch and larger.


B. Install 1-inch thick extruded polystyrene over underground drainage piping above frost line and not under building. Provide width to extend minimum of 12-inch beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over pipe, centered on pipe centerline.

C. Provide thrust restraints consisting of bracing to structure and rodded joints at branches and changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5-inches and larger suspended within the building and for all changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes.

D. Provide sway bracing to prevent shear at joints on cast iron piping suspended in excess of 18-inches on single rod hangers.

E. Provide rigid support sway bracing at all changes in direction greater than 45 degrees for all suspended cast iron piping for pipe sizes 4-inch and larger.

F. Suspended PVC piping shall be installed using the same requirements as cast iron piping for thrust and sway bracing as indicated in the articles above. Hanger spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and code.

G. Install underground cast iron drain piping to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. PVC piping shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321 and the plumbing code.

H. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.

I. Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream.

J. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.

K. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout the length of the pipe.

L. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes shall be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.

M. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom 1/4 of the circumference of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.

N. Minimum size of waste and vent piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2-inches.

3.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Before commencing work, check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.


3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the Plumbing Code.

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.


A. Inspections:1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has

been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction,

at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official.a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before

concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified and

to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code.3. Re-Inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the

required corrections, and arrange for re-inspection.4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.

B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows.1. Subject all waste and vent piping, including building drain, and building sewer to a water

test.2. Tightly close all openings in the piping system except the highest opening, and fill the

system with water to the point of overflow.3. Maintain water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen (15) minutes

before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with less than a 10-foot head of water.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping shall not be left open ended during construction.


C. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two (2) coats of water-based latex paint. Color selected by Architect.


BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Description: Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The Work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems.

B. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other Sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner. When this is the case, the extent, source and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specifications.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.

B. Latest editions of the following:1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (as adopted and amended by the Denver

Building Code).2. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.3. NECA - Standard of Installation.4. Other references as listed elsewhere in these specifications.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. "Provide": To furnish or supply, install and connect up complete and ready for safe and regular operation of particular work unless specifically otherwise noted.


B. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.

C. "Furnish" or "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.

D. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required for proper and complete installation.

E. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.

F. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry, concrete or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures.

G. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.

H. "Indicated," "Shown" or "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on drawings or specifications.

I. "Similar" or "Equal": Equal in materials, weight, size, design, construction, capacity, performance, and efficiency of specified product.

J. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory," "Accepted," or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or directed by or to Engineer.

K. "Related Work" includes, but is not necessarily limited to, mentioned work associated with, or affected by, the work specified.

L. Refer to Article 100 of the currently adopted National Electrical Code for other definitions as applicable to this project.

1.6 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 where applicable.

1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, recircuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as planning can determine, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Trailer Manufacturer and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings.

B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs.

C. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications, or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the


attention of the Engineer in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Engineer is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Engineer.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Prior to fabrication or installation of any electrical work, participate in detailed coordination planning meetings with all other building utilities system trades, under the direction of the General Contractor, so as to completely establish routings, elevations, space requirements, and coordination of access, layout, and suspension requirements in relationship to the building structure and the work of all other trades.

1.9 SUBMITTALS (Refer to Division 1)

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Division 1.

B. Prior to submission, shop drawings, material lists and catalog cuts or manufacturer's printed data shall be thoroughly checked for compliance with contract requirements, compatibility with equipment being furnished by the Contractor or Owner, accuracy of dimensions, coordination with work of other trades, and conformance with sound and safe practice as to erection of installation. Each submittal shall bear Contractor's signed statement evidencing such checking.

C. Clearly mark each shop drawing as follows for purposes of identification:1. Shop Drawing2. Equipment Identification Used on Contract Drawings3. Date4. Name of Project5. Branch of Work6. Engineer's Name7. Contractor's Name

D. Clearly mark printed material, catalog cuts, pamphlets or specification sheets, and shop drawings with the same designation shown on the contract document schedules. Identify specific item proposed, showing catalog number, recess openings, dimensions, capacities, electrical characteristics, etc. Submittals which are incomplete will be returned to the Contractor without review.

E. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that the Contractor demonstrates this understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction, and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal.


G. Maintain one copy of shop drawings at the project field office until completion of the project, and make this copy available, upon request, to representatives of the Engineer and Owner.

H. No equipment or materials shall be installed or stored at the jobsite until submittals for such equipment or materials have been given review action permitting their use.

I. Shop drawings and manufacturer's published data shall be submitted for:1. Wire and Cables2. Grounding and Bonding3. Identification4. Wiring devices5. Fuses6. Enclosed switches7. Panelboard Pedestal8. Fire alarm system

1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain a contract set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes, discoveries and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Engineer at all times. Upon completion of the contract, this set of record drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer. Record documents to be provided by the Contractor shall clearly and accurately show the following:1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of

control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to those editions of the following as currently adopted by the local code enforcement authority:1. ANSI/NFPA 70.2. ANSI/IEEE C2.3. Denver Building Code, and applicable requirements of the Fire Prevention Bureau.4. Comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to

this installation.5. Other requirements as listed elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Obtain electrical permits, plan review, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction in accordance with Division 1.


C. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent than, or conflict with the drawings and specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended, except where more stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents.

B. Compatibility with Available Space: Equipment layouts shown are based on use of equipment as specified. If the Contractor chooses equipment available from any other manufacturer listed as an acceptable manufacturer, or offers equipment under the provision for substitutions, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for first ascertaining that the offered equipment can be installed in the space available with ample clearances for maintenance. Include coordination drawings, as specified herein, when required.

C. All equipment and materials installed shall be new, unless otherwise specified.

D. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer or Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities.

F. All major equipment components shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number permanently attached in a conspicuous location.

2.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

C. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.

2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards.


B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers without a Provision for Substitutions: Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions allowed.

2.4 PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 30 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major products required for submittal under these specifications, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS


2.6 GUARANTEE

A. The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working order. Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any work, materials, or equipment which evidences defects in design, construction, or workmanship within one year, or as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications, from date of final acceptance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install work using procedures defined in NECA Standard of Installation.

B. Workmanship shall conform to highest industry standards for each trade involved in erection of the work.

C. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved.

D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where details or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.

E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition.


F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes.

3.2 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or welding as required for the proper support, concealment, installation or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as approved by the Engineer.

B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated.

C. All penetrations required through completed concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Engineer before proceeding with drilling.

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. If equipment of a different size is furnished by the Contractor, the Contractor shall furnish and install the proper motor starter, fuses, circuit breaker, disconnect switch, wire and conduit required for the equipment furnished, at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be approved by the Owner.

3.4 PROGRESS OF WORK

A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor.

3.5 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications and as herein specified.

B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots, bottom of trenches must be compacted.

C. After installation of electrical work, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair.


3.6 ELECTRICAL COMPLETION

A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists: Deliver three (3) complete operating & maintenance manuals and parts lists to the Owner at the time of the above required indoctrination. As a minimum, manual shall include a copy of submittal materials (samples excluded) corrected to record status. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. 1. The operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists shall give complete information as

to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts. Include address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within 24 hours after requested.

2. Include electronic version of submittal materials (AutoCAD, PDF, etc.).

B. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified below and elsewhere in these specifications. Submit three copies of a typewritten test report to the Engineer for his approval.1. For a seven-day period after building has been placed into normal service, record the full

load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and submit to the Engineer.2. Perform a careful inspection of the switchboard bus structure and cable connections to

verify that all connections are torqued to manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Clean-Up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation, and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, luminaires, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean-up of the site will be charged against the Contractor.

D. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract.

E. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment.


ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510 - 1

SECTION 260510 – ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Electrical remodeling.


A. Division 1: Alteration project procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and Equipment for Patching and Extending Work: As specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field verify measurements and circuiting arrangements.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Maintain electrical continuity to remaining wiring and equipment.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall include in his bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing conduits, wires, devices, luminaires, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new and existing electrical systems to all other work required on this project.

D. Beginning of removal means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.

B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510 - 2

C. Existing Electrical Service and Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing systems in service during modifications to existing systems. Disable systems only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 36 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 REMOVAL AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Divisions 1 and 2, and this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Provide modifications to assure that circuits or systems wiring shall not pass through outlet or junction boxes which may be rendered inaccessible by changes made to the building.

D. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

E. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.

F. Connect new work to existing work in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc. as required to install or remove electrical equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be performed so as to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plastering, or the structures which are to be reused, resurfaced, plastered, or painted under another division of these specifications.

B. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling work, cutting and patching, etc. performed by other trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits, wires, devices, luminaires, and other equipment as necessary.


BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Building Wire and Cable.

B. Wiring Connections and Terminations


A. Section 260532 - Conduit

B. Section 260534 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings.

C. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices and Seals

D. Section 260553- Electrical Identification

E. Section 260800-Commissioning of Electrical Systems



B. NEMA WC 3 – Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

C. NEMA WC 5 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 260500.



A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Conductor sizes are based on copper.

C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is appropriate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.

D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 260500.

B. Determine required separation between wiring and other work.

C. Determine routing to avoid interference with other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.

B. Rubber-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC3.

C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 4 AWG to 250 kcmil: Copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, 75° C, THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW.

D. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW. 6 and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, solid conductor.

E. Feeders and Branch Circuits 250 kcmil and Larger: Copper stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, 75° C, THHN, XHHW, THW, THWN.

F. Control Circuits: Copper, #14 AWG, 19/25 stranding, THHN, 90° C, 600 volt. Multiconductor control cables are allowed where more than three conductors are used between common terminations. Minimum of two spare control conductors in each cable.

G. Wiring: #12 AWG solid, minimum, with full size ground conductors unless specifically noted otherwise for certain limited applications.

H. 600 volt cross-linked polyethylene or thermoplastic insulated copper, 98% conductivity, single conductor.

I. Aluminum conductors are prohibited in any application other than feeders furnished and installed by the power utility.


2.2 NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE

A. Nonmetallic (NM) sheathed cable is prohibited.

2.3 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE

A. Underground feeder and branch circuit cable is prohibited.

2.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE

A. Service Entrance (SE, USE) cable is not permitted.

2.5 ARMORED CABLE

A. Armored cable (AC) is not permitted.

2.6 METAL CLAD CABLE OR MODULAR WIRING SYSTEMS

A. Metal clad (MC) cable or modular wiring systems are not permitted.

2.7 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE

A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, rated 75° C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with interlocked aluminum armor.

B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75° C, individual conductors twisted together shielded, and covered with a non-metallic jacket; UL listed and labeled as CL2, CL3, CL2R, CL3R, or PLTC.

C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 75° C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums and labeled as CL2P or CL3P.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS

A. Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than No. 14 AWG for control wiring.

B. Use No. 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 150 feet. Beyond these


conditions, voltage drop shall be less than 3% total service to end use so conductors shall be upsized accordingly.

C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.

D. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes.

E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. Make temporary connections to panelboard devices with sufficient slack conductor to facilitate reconnections required for balancing loads between phases.

F. Damaged conductors during installation shall be replaced.

G. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Make conductor lengths equal for parallel circuits.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS

A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant rated for - 20ºF for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wires.

B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.

C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

B. Coordinate cable runs with other trades.

C. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.

D. Support cables above accessible ceilings at four to six foot maximum intervals. Do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use hangar rods to support cables from structure. See Data, Communications, and Alarm Diagram for support details.

3.4 WIRING CONNECTION AND TERMINATIONS

A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.

B. For No. 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.

C. Use U.L. listed connectors (Ilsco Clear Tap Products, or equal) for wire splices and taps, Ilsco Clear Tap or Burndy Hi Press #8-500 KCMIL.


D. Tape or heat shrink un-insulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor.

E. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

F. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.

G. Terminate up to #10 AWG spare conductors with wire nuts. Use electrical tape for spare conductor #8 AWG and larger.

H. Use only corrosion resistant connectors listed for terminations in wet locations.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1 and Section 260800.

B. Individual single pole breakers with handle ties shall be prohibited.

C. Dedicated neutral for single phase to neutral loads only.

D. Control and signal cables passing through fire rated construction: In sleeves; conform to Division 07 Fire and Smoke Protection.

E. Provide sleeves for fire alarm, paging, data, telecommunications, and CATV.

3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.

B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.

C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways.

D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.

E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.

F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.

3.7 WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODING

A. For all wire sizes – full/length; factory applied:

120/208 Volts 277/480 Volts Low Voltage A = Black A = Brown Lighting Controls = Yellow B = Red B = OrangeC = Blue C = Yellow


Neutral = White Neutral = GrayGround = Green Ground = Green

B. For neutral conductors, provide colored stripe to indicate which phase it is associated to.

C. Maintain the color coding throughout the system from panel to the last device on the branch circuit.


GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526- 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Power System Grounding

B. Communication System Grounding

C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding


A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

B. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 "Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment," and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment," pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, require compliance with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors". Grounding and bonding products which are to be UL-listed and labeled for their intended usage.

D. IEEE Compliance: Applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest metallic cold water pipe 2-inch diameter or building steel and where present to the referenced ground bar as shown on drawings.

B. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, potable cold water supply, fire sprinkler main, natural gas lines, and plumbing systems.

C. All neutrals and grounds to comply with NEC via continuous conductor.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 260500.

B. Indicate location and layout of grounding electrodes (metallic cold water service, building steel, ground ring, ground rods, UFER, etc.) location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors.

C. Submit all field test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Ground Rods: Copper or copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter, minimum length 10 feet.

B. Mechanical Grounding Connectors: For all grounding connections above grade.1. Manufacturer: Burndy Electrical2. Material: Copper.3. Compression Type: Irreversible.4. UL listed under Standard UL467.

C. Wire:1. Material: Copper.2. Size: As indicated on the drawings. When size is not indicated, size per Article 250 of

NEC requirements.

D. Grounding Connection Accessories:1. Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding

straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type service required.

2.2 Field Welding: Exothermic welded connections are required where grounding conductors connect to underground grounding conductors and to underground grounding electrodes, and for bonding to steel. All underground connection shall be exothermic welded.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor (sized per NEC 250.122) in feeder and branch circuits. Feeders require steel ground bushing, all ends. 1. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus or bushing.2. Ground to all boxes unless otherwise specified.

B. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.


Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, connections are to be tightened to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

C. Provide code-sized ground cable bonding jumpers, installed with ground clamps, across all conduit expansion couplings and fittings.

D. Route grounding connections, conductors to ground, and grounding conductors to protective devices in the shortest and straightest paths possible to minimize transient voltage rises.

E. Provide a corrosion-resistant finish to field connections, buried metallic bonding products, and where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, where subject to corrosive action.

F. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits.

G. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metallic conduits.

H. Grounding conductor in feeders and branch circuits extend ground conductor to switches, receptacle, equipment enclosures, equipment, and panels etc. and ground as required.

I. Ground each separately derived system neutral as required per NEC, i.e. steel structure;1. Provide Burndy QGFL34B1 termination.

J. The electrode should be terminated to XO before bonding to the transformer case.

K. Use conduit grounding bushings on feeder circuits, flex conduits to transformers, services, and panels.1. Motors:

a. Both ends all splice and pull boxesb. Provide steel bonding bushings on feeders all ends, including motors, motor

controls, disconnect for SPD and VFD drives.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, the ground resistance shall be tested with an earth ground resistance tester in accordance with IEEE 81, "Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System". Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over values in Table 1 below, Contractor shall take appropriate action to reduce resistance to the values in Table 1, by driving additional ground rods; and then retest to demonstrate compliance. All results shall be recorded and submitted.

Table 1Earth GroundResistance toEquipment Equipment (Ohms)

Secondary Neutrals and Other Ground 10

SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529- SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Conduit and equipment supports.

B. Fastening hardware.

C. Wall and floor seals.


A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.


A. Division 3 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete equipment pads.

B. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Division 3.

C. Refer to Section 260500 for coordination requirements.




A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. Fasten supports directly to structure.

B. Drilling or other modification of structural steel members is prohibited without specific written permission from the structural engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel for non-corrosive environment.

B. Conduit Supports1. Clamps, straps, supports: Steel or malleable iron.2. Galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers or bolted split stamped

galvanized hangers.3. Perforated pipe strap is prohibited.4. Wire of any type is prohibited.

C. Hardware: Corrosion-resistant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, or preset inserts. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.

B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.

C. Powder-actuated anchors are prohibited without specific written permission.

D. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

E. Do not drill structural steel members.

F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance.

G. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install all free-standing electrical equipment on a 4-inch concrete housekeeping pad.

I. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Align tops of all adjacent cabinets.

J. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.

K. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls, concrete and/or masonry walls and floors, it shall be sleeved. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound or as otherwise specified by Division 01.


L. Where conduit penetrates waterproofed floors or exterior walls subject to entry of moisture, provide pipe sleeves two sizes larger than conduit, suitably flashed or sealed where appropriate. Seal annular space around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound or as otherwise specified by Division 01.

M. No suspended conduit or box supports shall be less than 1/4-inch diameter steel rod. Rod used as pedestal support is not acceptable. The contractor shall not use tie wire or wire of any type to support conduits, junction boxes or pull boxes.

N. No more than five (5) 1/2-inch conduits, three (3) 3/4-inch conduits or two (2) 1-inch conduits shall be supported on a single 1/4-inch diameter steel rod.

O. All conduits shall be supported by approved hangers. Supports installed and used by other trades such as duct hangers, pipe hangers, ceiling hangers, etc. shall not be used for conduit support. No conduit shall be hung from air handling duct or piping of any type. Electrical conduit systems "shall stand alone."

P. Concrete anchors shall not be used to suspend heavy electrical loads such as electrical switch panels or four-inch and larger conduits. Anchors shall be designed to support conduits and cable tray when full fitted to maximum capacity with cables.

Q. Conduit supports:1. Arrange to prevent distortion or misalignment from wire pulling.2. Spacing:

a. Per NEC.b. In no case more than 2 feet from panels, boxes, conduit bodies.c. 8 feet on center.

3.2 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Provide equipment pad bases of concrete type, construction, and finish as herein specified. Bases shall be of dimensions indicated or, where not specifically indicated or specified, dimensions shall be 4 inches height with width and length providing 4 inches of projection of base beyond outline dimension of supported equipment.1. Concrete shall be Class 3000, prepared in conformity with ACI 301, ASTM C 33, and

ASTM C 94, as applicable. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping, using equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. Perform consolidation so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combinations thereof, as directed or approved.

2. Provide oiled wood forms for concrete placement, adequately braced to ensure straight and vertical sides for bases. Finished bases shall provide a 3/4-inch chamfer at all exposed edges. Except where vibration attenuating base mountings are specified, provide No. 4 dowels (conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60), grouted into place, for anchorage of bases to substrate for all applications for which imposed strains or dynamic forces produced by equipment operation introduce the possibility of displacement of bases. Spacing of dowels shall be not less than 24 inches o.c., with a minimum of 4 dowels for each base.


3. Bases where indicated shall be reinforced by installation of 6 x 6 No. 8 AWG welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A 185. Apply measures, during concrete placement, to ensure that fabric remains vertically centered in bases.

4. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Float finish surfaces and provide steel trowel final finish.

B. For all equipment to be installed on concrete bases or other concrete construction, provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories as required. When installing equipment, set equipment into final position, shim equipment bases, skids or rails for level positioning, and install non-shrink grout for uniform support, and securely bolt into final position.


CONDUIT 260532 - 1

SECTION 260532 - CONDUIT

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Metal Conduit

B. Flexible Metal Conduit

C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing

E. Nonmetallic Conduit

F. Fittings and Conduit Bodies


A. Division 1 - Cutting and Patching.

B. Division 2 - Trenching: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities on site.

C. Division 3 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations.

D. Division 7 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

E. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding

F. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices and Seals

G. Section 260534 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings

H. Section 260553 - Electrical Identification

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.

B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.

CONDUIT 260532 - 2

C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. NECA - "Standard of Installation".

F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Intermediate Metal Conduit.

G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).

H. NEMA TC 3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 260500.

B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than two (2) inches or larger, regardless of location (i.e., above ceiling, below grade, etc.). Dimension from building columns or site landmarks.

C. Accurately record actual routing of all conduits installed under the slab on grade. Dimension from the building columns.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 260500 and Division 1.

B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system and to coordinate with the work of other trades.

CONDUIT 260532 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size, unless otherwise specified:1. Homeruns:

a. 3/4-Inch above accessible ceilings.b. 3/4-Inch above unaccessible ceilings.c. 1-Inch below grade and below slab on grade.

B. Branch Circuits after the first junction point: 1/2-Inch C unless otherwise specified. Flexible metal conduit fixture whips may be 3/8 inch.

C. Size conduit for installed conductor type or for type THW conductors, whichever is larger.

D. Underground Installations:1. More than 5-Feet from Foundation Wall:

a. Rigid Metal Conduit.b. Intermediate Metal Conduit.c. Plastic coated rigid steel conduit.d. Schedule 40 PVC conduit, with 90 degree plastic coated rigid steel conduit where

it protrudes out of the earth.2. Within 5-Feet from Foundation Wall or under concrete slab on grade:

a. Rigid Metal Conduit1) Transition between PVC and metal conduit below grade. Must use PVC

coated GRC 90’s to transition above grade.b. Intermediate Metal Conduitc. Plastic coated rigid steel conduitd. Schedule 40 PVC conduit, with 90 degree plastic coated rigid steel conduit where

it protrudes out of the earth.3. Minimum Size: 1-Inch.

E. Outdoor Locations, Exposed Above Grade: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC) or Intermediate Metal Conduit: 0 to 4 feet above finshed

floor.2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Greater than 4 feet above finished floor.

F. Wet and Damp Interior Locations1. Rigid Metal Conduit or Intermediate Metal Conduit: 0 to 4 feet above grade.2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Greater than 4 feet above grade.

G. Dry Interior Locations:1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing.2. Exposed: Use Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC) or Intermediate Metal Conduit from 0 to 4

feet above finished floor, and electrical metallic tubing greater than 4 feet above finished floor.

H. Restrictions:1. Attachment of conduit and tubing to any exterior part of the building envelope is

prohibited without the approval of Jefferson County School District, R-1.

CONDUIT 260532 - 4

2. Horizontal conduit runs within concrete slabs are prohibited.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel (Metal) Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Use is not permitted.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit.

2.3 PVC EXTERNALLY COATED METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick and internal galvanized surface.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.

2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Rigid galvanized steel.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit.

2.5 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.

B. Restrictions:1. Use only at fixture whips and part of a listed assembly.2. All other locations prohibited.

C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.

D. Length:1. 6 feet maximum except where fished and approved by NEC and Jefferson County School

District, R-1.

2.6 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; waterproof material to match conduit.

C. Length:1. 6 feet maximum or as required by NEC.

CONDUIT 260532 - 5

2.7 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings: 1. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 2. Set Screw: High quality, insulated throat, steel.3. Die cast fittings are prohibited.4. Compression Fittings: High quality, steel.

a. Compression fittings are required on surface work in kitchens, greenhouses, and other areas where waterproof fittings are required by NEC.

C. Conduit Bodies:1. Aluminum, steel or malleable iron.2. PVC is prohibited.

2.8 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

C. Restrictions:1. Shall not be used above grade.2. Prohibited for exposed or concealed applications in stud and masonry walls or ceiling

plenum.

2.9 NONMETALLIC TUBING AND FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Use of nonmetallic tubing and flexible nonmetallic conduit is prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".

B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel with conduit straps or clamps, provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 260529.

CONDUIT 260532 - 6

G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire or other methods used for temporary supports before pulling conductors.

H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

J. Conceal conduit to the greatest extent possible.

K. Route exposed and concealed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls, ceilings, and piping. Coordinate exposed and surface mounted runs with Architect prior to rough-in.

L. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to building elements and walls.

M. Install horizontal runs of conduit to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches above ceiling grid assembly where possible.

N. Exposed or concealed interior locations: Raceway, cables, boxes installed under metal-corrugated sheet roof decking shall be installed and supported to maintain a minimum of 3- inches clearance from the lowest surface of the roof decking to the top of the raceway, cable, or box.

O. Route conduit under slab on grade from point-to-point. Dimension from building columns.

P. Routing conduits in the slab is prohibited.

Q. Maintain 6” minimum clearance between conduit and piping.

R. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, pipes, and heating appliance, and any surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.

S. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.

T. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

U. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty (20) minutes, minimum.

V. In damp or wet locations, use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes and to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes.

W. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate or factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.

X. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

Y. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints.

CONDUIT 260532 - 7

Z. PVC expansion couplings shall be used at transition between grade and building surface, and as required by NEC.

AA. Provide suitable pull string ("jetline") with at pull strength of 200 pounds or greater in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.

BB. Use PVC coated rigid steel factory elbows:1. For bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet.2. In plastic conduit runs which have more than 2 bends, regardless of length

CC. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

DD. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 260526.

EE. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 260553.

FF. Transition from underground nonmetallic conduit to above grade metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall be made below the slab. The transition between nonmetallic conduit and above grade conduit shall be made with a rigid steel, plastic coated elbow.

GG. Where conduit penetrates fire rated construction, provide pipe sleeves 2 sizes larger than conduit. Conform to Division 07 for fire and smoke protection.

HH. Underground and Concrete Encased Conduit:1. Install conduit 24 inches minimum below finished grade unless otherwise authorized by

Jefferson County School District, R-1.2. Minimum slope: 4%.3. For concrete encased conduits, use suitable separators and chairs spaced no more than 4

feet on center, and securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during placement of concrete. Provide minimum 3 inch concrete cover at top, bottom, and sides of conduit.

4. Seal conduits to be water tight.5. Install warning ribbon (continuous underground type plastic line marker) in trench 12

inches below grade.

II. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit as follows:1. Utilize liquidtight flexible metal conduit in damp or wet locations (motors, kitchen,

technical education shops)

JJ. Refer to Data, Communications, and Alarm Diagram on drawings.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using approved materials and methods. Refer to Division 07.

B. Roof penetrations are prohibited unless coordinated and detailed in strict compliance with Division 07.


CONDUIT 260532 - 8

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534 - 1

SECTION 260534 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes

B. Pull and Junction Boxes


A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.


A. Division 7 - Firestopping.

B. Division 8 - Access Doors: Wall and ceiling access doors.

C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Service fittings and fire-rated poke-through fittings for floor boxes.



B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

C. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).



A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.

C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10-feet of location shown. Refer to Architectural Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2-inch male luminaire studs where required.

B. Cast Boxes: Aluminum, deep type. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Restricted to specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1:1. Appleton Electric2. Bowers3. Carlton4. Lew Electric5. National Electrical Products6. Raco7. Steel City

B. Sheet Metal Boxes less than 24 inches: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.

C. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 24-Inches in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 260535.

D. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250, Type 4 and Type 6; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight.1. Material: Cast Aluminum box and cover.2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.3. Shall not be used at vehicle traffic areas.

E. Fiberglass Handholes for Underground Installations:1. Die-molded with pre-cut 6 x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side.2. Fiberglass weatherproof cover with non-skid finish.3. Traffic Rated.4. 20k rated weight minimum.5. Shall not be used at vehicle traffic areas such as parking lots and drives.

F. Underground Pull Boxes in vehicle traffic areas:


1. Restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1: a. Amcor 3 x 3 precast PB 3030-30; #0300720.

1) Pre-cast concrete open-bottom.2) Steel traffic rated lid stamped “ELECTRICAL”.3) Bonded to equipment ground4) Traffic Rated to 20K minimum.

b. Approved equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.

C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only to allow access. Under such conditions where such accessible ceilings or unfinished areas are not available, coordinate with Architect and other trades for location and size of access doors or access panels.

D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Division 7.

F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other.

G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.

H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inch separation. Provide minimum 24-inch separation between back-to-back boxes in acoustic or fire-rated walls.

I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet box.

M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.


N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two (2) rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

O. Use gang box where more than one (1) device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet exterior and interior locations.

R. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.

S. Minimum junction and pull box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/4".

T. Minimum outlet box size 4" x 4" x 1-1/2".

U. Minimum junction box size for fire alarm pull stations, control module, monitor module, 4" x 4" x 2-3/4". Provide plaster ring at all pull station locations.

V. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.

W. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for products furnished under other sections.

B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Division 8.

C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

B. Install knockout closure in unused box openings.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Buried and Duct Bank Warnings

B. Electrical Power, Control and Communication Conductors and Conduit

C. Operational Instructions and Warnings

D. Danger Signs

E. Equipment/System Identification Signs

F. Nameplates, wire markers, or labels are required at each and every component of the electrical system.


A. Division 9 - Painting.




A. ANSI Compliance: Applicable requirements of ANSI A13.1, "Piping and Piping Systems".

B. FS Compliance: Applicable requirements of FS L-P-387 "Plastic Sheet, Laminated, Thermosetting (for designation plates)".

C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems," pertaining to electrical identification systems.


D. NEMA Compliance: Applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Nos. WC-1 and WC-2 pertaining to identification of power and control conductors.

E. Comply with "OSHA" sign standards for danger, caution, warning, etc.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.

B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule for all specified applications of electrical identification.

C. Samples: Provided for each form of identification material as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: The manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required are to be used for each application.

B. Fonts for all identification shall be Sans Serif typeface such as Helvetica.

C. Underground Type Plastic Line Marker:1. Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape,

intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6-inches wide x 4 mils thick. Printing is required on tape, which most accurately indicates type of service.

2. Color: Yellow

D. Wire and Cable Markers:1. Permanently printed split sleeve tube type adhesive backed circumferential.2. Brady, or approved equivalent.

E. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs (Nameplates):1. Engraved stock melamine three-layer plastic laminate, UV resistant, complying with FS

L-P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with letter sizes and wording indicated, Black face and White core (White letters on a Black background), punched for mechanical fastening with a minimum of two (2) screws, rivets.

2. Thickness: 1/16-Inch, for units up to 20 square inches or 8-inch length; 1/8-inch for larger units.

3. Fasteners: Mechanically mounted – screws, rivets.4. Distribution and control equipment:

a. Identify equipment and loads served.b. 1/4-Inch lettering for distribution and control equipment.c. 1/8-Inch lettering for individual switches and loads served.

5. Panelboards and Switchboards:a. 1/4-Inch lettering to identify equipment designation.b. 1/8-Inch lettering to identify voltage rating and source.

6. Individual Circuit Breakers and Switches in Panelboards and Switchboards:


a. 1/8-Inch lettering to identify circuit and load served, including location.7. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Disconnect Switches, and Motor Starters:

a. 1/8 inch lettering to identify load served and circuit designation.8. Transformers:

a. 1/4 inch lettering to identify equipment designation.b. 1/8 inch lettering to identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and

secondary load and location.9. Main Grounds:

a. 1/4 inch lettering "Do Not Disconnect". 1/4 inch lettering to identify type of ground.

F. Lettering and Graphics:1. Names, abbreviations and other designations used in electric identification work are to be

coordinated with corresponding designation shown, specified or scheduled. Numbers, lettering and wording as required or as recommended by manufacturer or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.

G. Adhesive Marking Tape for Device Cover Plates:1. Avery-type or equal with 3/8-inch minimum height letters. Labels shall have black

letters on clear or white labels for “Normal” and white letters on red labels for “Emergency” and fire alarm devices. White characters on green background for “Ground”. Self-adhesive, thermal transfer tape.Embossed Dymo-Tape labels are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements:1. Regulations: Governing regulations and requests of governing authorities are to be

complied with for identification of electrical work.2. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels.3. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines.

a. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivetsb. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.

B. Underground Conduit and Ductbank Identification:1. During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground conduit and ductbank

(concrete encased conduit), a continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over conduit or ductbank at 12-inches below finished grade or 4-inches below paving, shall be provided.

C. Wire and Cable Identification:1. The application of cable/conductor identification, with branch circuit or feeder number,

on each cable/conductor in each switchboard, panelboard gutter, pull box, outlet and junction box, individual circuit breaker or switch, enclosure, and load connection. The identification is to match the marking system used in switchboards, panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project's electrical work.


D. Junction Box and Pull Box Identification:1. On the Cover of each junction box and pull box: The circuit or bus switch number(s) and

source equipment identifier (i.e. panelboard or switchboard name) of the enclosed conductors are to be legibly written with a Black permanent ink broad tip marking pen and the system identified for FA (Fire Alarm) EM (Emergency) PA (Public Address), S (Security) TC (Temperature Control).

2. Covers for emergency system junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted Red.3. Covers for the Fire Alarm System junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted Red.

E. Equipment/System Identification:1. An engraved plastic-laminated sign (Nameplate) is to be provided on each major unit of

electrical equipment in the building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/control/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, letter height as specified, white lettering on black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. The sign shall include unit designation, source circuit number, circuit voltage, and other data specifically indicated. Also, the sign shall indicate normal source circuit number ("Fed from . . .") and emergency source circuit number when the equipment is a transfer switch or fed directly from a transfer switch. Include signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:a. Switchboards, panelboards (include main bus voltage on sign), electrical cabinets

and enclosures.b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities.c. Disconnect switch.d. “Grounding Electrode Conductor” and “Main Bonding Jumper”e. Telephone cabinets and switching equipment. (Circuit number and voltage not

required on sign.)a. Fire Alarm Control Panel.

2. The installation of signs are required at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. The sign shall be secured to the substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.

F. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules (label all spares and spaces in pencil) with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.

G. Provide tape labels for identification of individual receptacles and switches, control device stations. Locate tape on front of plate and indicate associated source panelboard and circuit number. Indicate source panelboard and circuit number in indelible ink on the back of the plate and with indelible ink on the device/junction box. Provide tape labels for Electrical Disconnects above ceilings and other semi-concealed spaces.

H. Provide engraved nylon trim plates for gym lighting control and boxes three (3) gang and larger.

I. Systems Identification:1. Provide arc flash labeling on all equipment including disconnects per NFPA 70E.2. Label outlets and switches in front with printed labels, back of plate use indelible ink.


J. Framed graphic map of one line diagram of the electrical system, mounted in the main electrical room. These shall be extracted from the close out documents. Include room numbers for all electrical panel locations and arc flash calculations on one line. 1. Also included updates when any changes are made to one line diagram. 2. One-line diagrams shall be installed in a protective cover and frame.


COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800- 1

SECTION 260800 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. See Division 27 for testing requirements of communication and alarm systems.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work in this section is open to any product meeting the requirements of this Technical Guideline.

B. Testing is required for all Division 26 equipment, wiring, devices, etc. to assure that electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and conforms to the contract documents.


A. In the absence of other information, standards of the following organizations apply:1. National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. - NETA.2. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies - AEIC.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Documentation of Testing Agency accreditation:1. Required.

B. Written Test Reports:1. Required:

a. Preliminary.b. Certified final test reports.

C. Three Electronic copies to the District of all testing and procedures.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include test data indicated in this Section and all Division 26 specification Sections.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Acceptable Testers:


1. Any independent testing laboratory meeting federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907. Membership in the National Electrical Testing Association constitutes proof of meeting such criteria.

2. Electrical subcontractor unless otherwise noted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. All instruments used to evaluate electrical performance shall meet NETA's Specifications for Test Instruments.1. The Contractor shall have a calibration program which maintains each applicable test

instrument within its rated accuracy.

B. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:1. Field instruments - 6 months maximum.2. Laboratory instruments - 12 months.3. Leased specialty equipment - 12 months.

C. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

D. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction for each test instrument.

E. Maintain up-to-date documentation showing date and results of instrument calibration and testing.

3.2 TESTING SCHEDULE

A. Cables - Low Voltage (600 Volts and less – Electrical Systems Only)1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

a. Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with the engineer’s single line diagram.

b. Torque test each feeder cable connection to the manufacturer's recommended value.

c. Branch circuits excluded.2. Electrical Tests

a. Prior to final wire termination perform an insulation resistance test on each feeder cable (branch circuit wires are excluded) with respect to ground and adjacent cables.

b. Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection. Verify proper phasing connections.

c. Test Values:1) Insulation resistance tests shall be performed at 1000 volts D.C. for 30

seconds. 2) Minimum resistance value: 250,000 ohms.


B. Circuit breakers - low voltage1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

a. Check each circuit breaker for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation.

b. Operate each circuit breaker to insure smooth operation. c. Inspect each case for cracks or other defects. d. Check tightness of each connection with torque wrench in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Grounding Systems1. By independent testing laboratory only2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

a. Inspect ground system for compliance with plans and specifications.

D. Electrical Test: By independent testing laboratory only.1. Infrared test of all electrical switchgear, lugs, switchboards, generator, ATS, power and

light panelboards under full load.2. Infrared test at 11 month walk, of all electrical switchgear, lugs, switchboards, generator,

ATS, power and light panelboards under full load. 3. Provide written results to District Project Manager. 4. Submit written results with Operation and Maintenance Data.


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Weather-resistant receptacles.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 1 – Owner Furnished Products, Additional information of Mechanical/Electrical

Coordination.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. SPD: Surge Protective Device.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include configurations, finishes, and dimensions.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. Devices shall be reviewed and approved prior to procurement and installation.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Prior to beginning work obtain the HVAC Equipment Schedule from Division 23 to determine the related electrical data required to wire each equipment item.

B. Refer to Coordination Schedule in Division 01 for additional information on Mechanical/Electrical coordination.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers' Names (restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1): 1. Arrow Hart, Eagle - Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc.

(Cooper).2. Bryant - Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

B. District approved or District approved equal:1. Basis of design:

a. Leviton G5362 Series.

C. Weather and Tamper Resistant Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.1. Description: Specification grade - Heavy duty industrial grade, straight blade, feed -

through type, high strength UV resistant nylon flat faced and brass heavy duty grounding straps. Indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. Metal self-grounding mounting strap equipped with a green hex-head grounding screw. Side screw wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid conductors.


2.2 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact nylon 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick in

all locations unless otherwise noted.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof While-In-Use Covers: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Device Color:1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.


D. Device Installation:1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show

signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length (for ease of future service).5. Use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals only. Wrap solid conductor tightly

clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. Use of back of device (quick) push-in wire connectors is prohibited.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.10. The use of devices with prefabricated wiring termination is not permitted.11. Drill opening for poke-through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

E. Receptacle Orientation:1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the left. Ground pole position shall be consistent throughout.

F. Device Plates: Install device plates on switches and receptacles in all areas. Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates unless otherwise indicated. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Oversized (jumbo sized) plates are permitted for devices in masonry walls.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles up. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."1. Receptacles and Switches: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.


2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.


FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Fuses.

B. Fuse blocks.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.

B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS1. In the absence of referenced information, the following standards apply:

a. ANSI C97.1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600 Volts or Lessb. ANSI/UL 198C - High Interrupting Capacity Limiting Class L Fusesc. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fusesd. ANSI/UL 198G - Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protectione. ANSI/UL 512 - Fuseholders

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time-current curves.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


B. Record actual fuse sizes.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

FUSES 262813 - 2

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain all project fuses and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Intermixing of fuse type and manufacturers within the same series-connected circuit is prohibited.

C. Fuse types (e.g. KRP-C & FRS-R) of the same manufacturer within the same series connected circuit is permitted and encouraged.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL and referenced standards as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide two fuse pullers.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 10% or two extra sets of three (whichever is greater) of each fuse type and rating installed on the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers (restricted to specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1):1. Bussman.2. Littelfuse.

2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

B. Class R Fuses1. Dual element time delay 250 and 600 volts AC.

FUSES 262813 - 3

2. 1/10 to 600 amperes3. Current limiting, with short circuit rating of 200,000 amperes symmetrical.4. Comply with UL standard 198E.

a. Class RK1: LPN-R or LPS-R.b. Class RK5: FRN-R or FRS-R.

2.3 FUSE BLOCK REQUIREMENTS

A. Install fuses in Class R fuse blocks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.


FUSES 262813 - 4

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Fusible Switches

B. Nonfusible Switches


A. Section 262813- Fuses.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association).

B. NEMA FU1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.

C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 260500: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.


1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers (restricted to specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1):1. Cuttler Hammer/Eaton Corporation2. General Electric3. Square-D4. Siemens

B. Enclosed switches shall be of same manufacturer as switchboards and panelboards.

2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, quick-make, quick-break, with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

B. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.

C. Switches used for service entrance shall be U.L. SE labeled.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, quick-make, quick-break, with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1.1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.2. Exterior, Weatherproof, or other NEC Required Locations: Type 3R.


B. Finish using manufacturer's standard enamel finish gray color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.

D. Bonding bushings mandatory at both ends of all feeders.

E. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 260529.

F. Height: 5 feet to operating handle.

G. Provide engraved nameplates under the provisions of Section 260553.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.


Jefferson County School District, R-1 Support Services

TECHNICAL GUIDELINES 2015

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

AUGUST 2015

Jefferson County School District, R-1 TECHNICAL GUIDELINES 2015 Division 27 – Communications

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 10 Communication Services – August 2015

• The purpose of this document is to provide guidelines, standards, and specifications for the installation of the various components of the communications cable plant for Jefferson County Colorado Public Schools District (hereinafter referred to as the District). Unless otherwise specified in writing, the contractor shall provide a warranty guaranteeing that all materials, installation, and workmanship meet specifications and are free from defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. Labor and material needed to correct errors, replace parts, or perform repair shall be done at the contractor’s expense.

• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by the District; see Section 27 05 10 for the List of Acceptable Materials. Work in District buildings is to be done only by vendors that are pre-approved by the District.

• Coordination: 1. Contract Documents must clearly define and specify responsibilities to

furnish rough-in, cable installation, and connections. Tasks shall be performed as follows:

a. Outlet boxes shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor b. Underground conduits leading into the MDF room shall be

installed by the Electrical Contractor c. Empty raceway shall be installed by Electrical Contractor d. Punch down blocks shall be installed by the Data Cable Installation

Contractor e. Equipment racks shall be installed by the Cabling Contractor f. Horizontal and riser data cable shall be installed by the Cabling

Contractor g. RJ45 jacks shall be installed by the Cabling Contractor h. Patch panels shall be installed by the Cabling Contractor i. RJ34 connectors shall be installed by the Cabling Contractor j. Type F connectors for video coaxial cable shall be installed by the

Cabling Contractor. • Project Management:

1. The District shall designate one Project Manager for each site-specific project; this District Project Manager shall be the single point of contact for the Contractor. In general, the Project Manager (PM) for larger projects shall work for the Facilities and Construction Management Department, and the Project Manager for smaller projects shall be an employee of the Information Technology Department (ITPM).

2. The contractor shall provide weekly written reports via email to the PM detailing progress.

3. Requests for access to limited access or restricted areas shall be made the work day prior to the required access.

August 2015 1


4. Information critical to the completion of the task or project shall be

communicated to the PM, as the requirement becomes known. 5. Casual information shall be passed during the scheduled progress report. 6. The vendor shall maintain the District facility in a neat and orderly manner

during the installation of the cabling system. 7. The District shall designate staging and storage areas for the contractor’s

materials. 8. At the completion of work in each area, the vendor shall perform a final

cleaning to remove any dust, debris, and trash prior to moving the installation crew to the next work area.

• Standards: 1. In the absence of other information, standards of the following

organizations apply: a. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 C 1-2, Category 6

b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 C Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Cabling Standard

c. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

d. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

e. Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

• General: 1. Twisted pair cables shall be installed with no splices.

2. RG6 and RG11 coax may be spliced in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and best-practices guidelines ONLY with written permission of the ITPM.

3. Fiber Optic cable may be spliced in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and best-practices guidelines ONLY with written permission of the ITPM.

4. The cable minimum bend radius and maximum tension specifications shall never be exceeded. If, at any time and even for a moment, either of these specifications is exceeded, the installer shall replace the cable prior to final acceptance at no additional cost to the District.

5. Each and every cable shall be carefully and legibly labeled at both ends via tape labels or an indelible ink marking pen.

6. Horizontal cable runs shall be supported at intervals of five (5) feet or less. 7. At no point shall cables rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels or any

other systems such as structure, lighting, fire alarm, fire sprinkler systems, plumbing, roofing or heating ducts.

8. The communications cable plant shall be run in its own support system.

August 2015 2


9. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be

attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware.

10. The cabling system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices.

11. Any bundle that has more than 5 cables in it shall be supported by a cable saddle or Arlington Loop.

12. Bundles with 5 or fewer cables may use bridle rings, J-hooks, or Arlington Loops.

13. Coordinate types and fire-ratings of penetrations with fire-rated assemblies identified on drawings and other divisions.

27 05 00 Responsibility Matrix – August 2015

• Following is a matrix showing the various tasks and activities along with the party responsible for each task:

Paging System

TASK IT Project Manager

District Project Manager

Commissioning Specialist

Facility Maintenance

Architect & Engineer

General Contractor

Validate Existing System Optional Required

Develop Specifications Required Required Required Required

Plan Review Required Required Required

Product Submittal Review Optional Required Required

Pre-Installation Meeting Required Required Required Required Required

Day One Install Required Optional Required

Periodic Inspection Required Required Required Required

Rough-In Required Required Required Required Required

Contractor End-to-End Test Optional Required Required Required

Final Inspection Optional Required Required

System Certification Required Optional

Agency Inspections Required

August 2015 3


Fire Alarm System






General Contractor

Validate Existing System Optional Required


Plan Review Required Required Required

Product Submittal Review Optional Required Required

Pre-Installation Meeting

Day One Install Required Optional Required

Periodic Inspection Required Required Required Required

Rough-In Required Required Required Required Required

Annunciator Final Drawings Optional Required Required


Final Inspection Optional Required Required

System Certification Required Optional

Fire Department Checkout Optional Optional Optional Required Required

Agency Inspections Required

Telecommunications – Data Systems






General Contractor

Validate Existing System Required Optional Required


Plan Review Required Required Required Required

Product Submittal Review Required Optional Required Required

Pre-Installation Meeting Required Required Required Required Required Day One Install Required Optional Required

Periodic Inspection Required Required Required Required Required

Rough-In Required Required Required Required Required Required

August 2015 4


Annunciator Final Drawings Optional Required Required


Final Inspection Required Optional Required Required

System Certification Optional Required Optional

Fire Department Checkout Optional Optional Optional Required Required Agency Inspections Required

END SECTION 27 05 00

27 05 10 List of Acceptable Materials – August 2015

• Items on this list are considered acceptable for use in District buildings wherever they meet all codes, standards, guidelines, and specifications for District Communication projects. Exceptions to these specific materials can only be made in writing by the IT Project Manager. Absent written authorization, the contractor shall use only the following specific products:

CAT 6 UTP PLENUM COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLE ADC (TE Connectivity) 219567-2 Cat 6 UTP CMP 4-Pair, White Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 219567-4 Cat 6 UTP CMP 4-Pair, Gray Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 219567-6 Cat 6 UTP CMP 4-Pair, Blue Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 219567-8 Cat 6 UTP CMP 4-Pair, Yellow Color FACEPLATES & INSERTS ADC (TE Connectivity) 83935-1 4-Port Double Gang Faceplate Almond

Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 2111011-1 4-Port Single Gang Faceplate Almond

Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 1339123-1 62.5/125 ST Connector Insert for Module ADC (TE Connectivity) 558106-2 Flex-Mode Faceplate Almond Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 1339119-1 Dual Gang SL Faceplate Almond Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 1339118-1 Single Gang SL Faceplate Almond Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 1499855-1 F-Connector Insert for Module ADC (TE Connectivity) 1116412-1 Blank Insert for Module Almond Color Semtron 10EA5P Honed Stainless Steel Wall Phone

Faceplate CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR COMPONENTS RapidRun® Multi-Format Runner Cable - Plenum CMP-Rated RapidRun® Single Gang Integrated VGA+ HDMI+3.5 mm audio RapidRun® 1.5 ft.VGA + HDMI + 3.5mm Audio Flying Lead

August 2015 5


BACKBONE RISER UTP PLENUM RATED COPPER CABLE ADC (TE Connectivity) 1499418-3 Cat 6 25-Pair Blue Color FIBER OPTIC COMPONENTS ADC (TE Connectivity) 1-1777117-7 62.5/125 MultiMode Armored Plenum 12-

strand, Tight Buffer ADC (TE Connectivity) 5503994-1 1-Meter 62.5/125 ST Duplex Fiber Optic

Patch Cord ADC (TE Connectivity) 5503994-3 3-Meter 62.5/125 ST Duplex Fiber Optic

Patch Cord ADC (TE Connectivity) 2-1206114-6 Fiber Enclosure, 12-port, with ST

Bulkheads ADC (TE Connectivity) 5492642-1 62.5/125 ST Fiber Connector Crimp ADC (TE Connectivity) 5503571-3 62.5/125 ST Fiber Connector Epoxy and

Polish ADC (TE Connectivity) 1339123-1 MultiMode ST Connector Insert for

Module VIDEO CABLE Belden 6339Q8 RG-6 Quad-Shield, Plenum Rated Belden 6139B8 RG-11 Plenum Rated PATCH PANELS ADC (TE Connectivity) 1375014-2 24-Port Category 6 Patch Panel ADC (TE Connectivity) 1375015-2 48-Port Category 6 Patch Panel JACKS AND CONNECTORS ADC (TE Connectivity) 1375055-6 Cat 6 Data Jack Blue Color ADC (TE Connectivity) 5-554720-3 Cat 6 Modular Plug ADC (TE Connectivity) 569875-1 RJ45 Boot Any RG-11 F-Style Coax Connector Any R G-6 F-Style Coax Connector ADC (TE Connectivity)1116409-3 2-Port Straight SL Series Module CAT 6 PATCH CORDS - All shall be straight through, NOT roll-over or cross-over. ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx02F 2-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx03F 3-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx04F 4-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx05F 5-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx06F 6-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx07F 7-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx10F 10-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx12F 12-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx14F 14-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods ADC (TE Connectivity) TCPC-6RUVB-xx25F 25-Foot Cable RJ45 Plugs No Hoods

August 2015 6


Substitute a color code in place of xx in the above part numbers as follows: GN=Green, YL= Yellow, BL= Blue, WT= White, RD= Red, BK= Black, VT= Violet MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Lucent AT90’s Wall Caddy Fasteners Caddy CAT425 Caddy Saddles Viewsonic VSD8WSP 8-Way Splitter Block Suttle SE66M1-50C Voice Punch Block Suttle 09-S89DS 89D Bracket for Punch Block any product Surface-Mount Raceway any product Surface-Mount Outlet Box any product Surface-Mount Back Box any product Open Bay Rack 19 inches by 84 inches any product Vertical Wire Management Rings 4 inch any product Horizontal Wire Management any product Wire Management Rack-mounted Powerstrip any product 12 Strand Fan-Out Kit any product Rack to Bus Bar Grounding Kit any product Ladder Rack 12 inches by 10 foot any product Ladder Rack Mounting Kit any product Ladder Rack Wall Mounting Kit any product Arlington Loop Plenum Saddles any product Bridle Rings any product J-Hooks


27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems – August 2015

• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1.

• See Data, Communications, and Alarm Diagram. • General Grounding and Bonding:

1. All District facilities shall be equipped with a bonding backbone (TBB).

2. The Electrical contractor shall supply and install all grounding to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and all Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) communications closets.

3. This backbone shall be used to ground all cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware.

4. The TBB shall be installed independent of the building’s electrical and building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 TMGB.

5. The Main Distribution Frame room in each building shall be equipped with a grounding bus bar (TGB).

August 2015 7


6. Each Intermediate Distribution Frame communications closet shall be

provided with a TGB.

7. The TGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility.

8. The TGB and TBB are to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building electrical ground system.

9. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases, cable trays, etc. entering or residing in any Communication Room shall be grounded to the respective TGB or TBB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and compression connectors.

10. Where metallic panels attached to the rack do not have sufficient metal-to-metal contact to provide an adequate path to ground, they shall be bonded to the rack using a minimum #14 AWG copper conductor.

11. The copper conductor size shall be upgraded based on the largest power conductor feeding any rack mount equipment.

12. The conductor shall be continuous. Components shall be grounded in a daisy chain fashion from top to bottom and bonded to the rack using an appropriate compression connector.

13. Insulated wires used for grounding purposes shall have green insulation.

14. Bare copper wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green electrical tape.

15. The TBB shall be designed and approved by a licensed engineer.

16. The TBB shall be installed in accordance with best industry practices.

17. A licensed electrician shall perform installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground.


27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems (Data and Voice) – August 2015

• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1 Telecommunications Department.

• Coordination 1. Empty raceway for special systems may or may not be under separate

contract. 2. See Data, Communications and Alarm Diagram. 3. Contract Documents must clearly define and specify responsibilities to

Furnish Rough-In / Install / and Connect: a. Outlet boxes – by Electrical Contractor b. Punch down blocks – by Cabling Contractor c. Equipment racks – by Cabling Contractor

August 2015 8


d. Empty raceway – by Electrical Contractor e. Cable – by Cabling Contractor f. RJ11 connectors – by Cabling Contractor g. RJ45 connectors – by Cabling Contractor h. F connectors for video connection – by Cabling Contractor

• In the absence of other information, standards of the following organizations apply: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568A-6, Category 6 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard 3. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 5. ANSI/EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications 6. Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI)

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) • Cabling

1. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) unless specifically addressed in this guideline.

2. The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded.

3. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the vendor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the District.

4. All cable shall be labeled at both ends via tape labels and/or a indelible ink marking pen and in a manner agreed upon by the District and the installer.

5. Support horizontal cables at a maximum of five-foot intervals. 6. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels or any other

support systems such as structural members, lighting, fire alarm, plumbing, or heating ducts.

7. Cable plant will be run in its own support system. 8. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached

to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. 9. The cabling system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not

obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. 10. Any bundle that has more than 5 cables in it will be supported by a cable

saddle or Arlington Loop. a. Bundles with 5 or less cables may use either bridle rings, J-hooks, or

Arlington Loop. • Submittals

1. Cable and supports: a. Product data


August 2015 9


27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems – August 2015

• Work in this section is open to any product or material meeting the requirements of this section and the requirements of Division 26 Electrical as well as any requirements of the service providers that shall be using the conduits such as Century Link or Comcast.

• Requirements of Division 26 Electrical apply • Underground Conduit:

1. Two 4-inch conduits from Century Link’s pedestal to the school’s MDF. a. 200 pound calibrated mule tape installed inside of each conduit. b. One 1.5 inch innerduct with 200 pound calibrated mule tape installed

inside of the innerduct. c. If the outside end of the conduits is open, that is, not inside closed

pedestals or boxes, it shall be capped with a suitable cover so that water and critters cannot get in to the conduit.

2. One 2-inch conduit from Comcast’s pedestal to the school’s MDF. a. 200 pound calibrated mule tape installed inside of the conduit. b. If the outside end of the conduits is open, that is, not inside closed


3. MDF to temporary modular classroom vault or pad. a. One two (2) inch conduit with 200 pound calibrated mule tape installed

inside of the conduit. b. Location to be coordinated with Division 26 Electrical c. If the outside end of the conduits is open, that is, not inside closed



27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems – August 2015

• Work in this section is open to any product or material meeting the requirements of this Technical Guideline.

• Labeling: 1. Labeling is required to clearly and legibly identify all components of the

communications system including but not limited to: Racks, punch fields, cables, patch panels, and jacks.

2. The labeling system in the closets for backbone cable shall designate the cable’s origin and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system.

3. Racks and patch panels shall be clearly and legibly labeled to identify the location within the cabling system infrastructure.

4. Horizontal cables shall be clearly and legibly labeled within 2 inches of the end of the jacket at both the patch panel end and the jack end of the cable.

August 2015 10


5. The faceplate of the jack at which horizontal cables are terminated in the

classroom, office, or work area shall be clearly and legibly labeled with the same cable number as the jack on the patch panel.

6. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents.

7. The District’s labeling standard for each cable and face plate is as follows: a. System Designation: “D” for data and “C” for video coaxial in the first

position of label.

b. The second position denotes the closet where services originate; the MDF is always “0” and “1”, “2”, “3”’ etc. represent the various IDF rooms.

c. Thus, the first data cable in the MDF would read D-0-1, the second cable would read D-0-2 and continue numerically on the patch panel. The first data cable in the third IDF would read D-3-1, the second D-3-2, etc.


27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications General Cable Testing – August 2015

• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers

that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1. • General Cable Testing

1. All cables and termination hardware shall be tested to detect defects in manufacture and installation and to verify cable performance after it has been installed.

2. The contractor shall verify that ALL conductors of EACH cable are usable prior to system acceptance.

3. Testing can be completed by the installing contractor; third party testing is not required.

4. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and jacks shall be replaced, not repaired.

5. If testing is performed by the contractor a report shall be submitted by the contractor identifying the tests performed, results of the tests, and performance data resulting from the tests, including performance data for all drops. This shall be submitted prior to the punch-list phase of the project.

• Installation Warranty: 1. The contractor shall warrant the cabling system against defects in materials,

installation methods, and workmanship for a period of no less than one year from the date of system acceptance.

2. The warranty shall cover all labor and materials necessary to correct any defective portion of the system and to demonstrate performance within the original installation specifications after repairs are completed.

• Cable Plant Warranty: 1. The contractor shall issue a warranty on the installed cable plant, which

guarantees materials, installation methods, and workmanship on all

August 2015 11


components used in the system for no less than one year from the date of acceptance.

2. The warranty shall guarantee a minimum of 350 MHz for all Cat 6 cables. 3. The warranty shall guarantee a minimum of 100 MHz for the backbone

copper cables. 4. The multimode fiber optic portions of the cabling system shall be guaranteed

to a minimum of ten (10) Gigabits per second for runs of less than 300 meters (982.4 feet). Multimode fiber optic cable runs of greater than 300 meters shall be guaranteed to run at up to one (1) Gigabit per second.

• Copper Cable Testing: 1. Testing can be completed by the installing contractor; third party testing is not

required. 2. If testing is performed by the contractor a report shall be submitted by the

contractor identifying the tests performed, results of the tests, and performance data resulting from the tests, including performance data for all drops. This shall be submitted prior to the punch-list phase of the project.

3. The continuity of each conductor of every cable shall be tested. 4. Twisted-pair cables shall be tested for continuity, cable length, proper

installation, pair reversals, shorts, opens, and data performance. 5. The test shall be recorded as pass/fail as indicated by the test set in accordance

with the manufacturers recommended procedures, and associated with the appropriate cable identification number and circuit or pair number.

6. Any faults in the wiring shall be corrected and the cable re-tested prior to final acceptance.

• Copper Data Cable Length: 1. The installed length of each Category 6 cable shall be measured from

termination point to termination point using an automated test device. 2. The length of any Category 6 cable shall be no longer than 90 meters (295.2

feet). This means the actual total overall length of each contiguous fixed cable itself, NOT the linear distance between, for example, the jack and the IDF.

3. Cable lengths shall be recorded, and associated with the cable identification number and circuit or pair number.

4. For multi-pair cables, the longest pair length shall be recorded as the length of the cable.

• Copper Performance Verification: 1. The actual performance of each cable shall be tested using an automated test

set. 2. Category 6 cable test results shall be automatically evaluated using the most

up to date criteria from the ANSI/EIA/TIA-568C 1-2 standards. 3. Test results shall be printed directly from the test unit or from a download file

using an application from the Test equipment manufacturer.- 4. The printed test results shall include all tests performed, the expected test

result and the actual test result achieved.

August 2015 12


5. If testing is performed by the contractor a report shall be submitted by the


• Fiber Optic Testing: 1. Testing can be completed by the installing contractor; third party testing is not

required 2. Multimode optical fiber terminations shall be tested in accordance with

ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.3-H. 3. Panel to panel and panel to outlet multimode fiber optic cables shall be tested

in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-C.1-2 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14, 4. All test jumpers shall be the same fiber core size and connector types as the

cable system. 5. When testing, the light source or Optical Time Domain Reflectometer must

operate in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A for multi-mode fiber optic cable.

6. If testing is performed by the contractor a report shall be submitted by the contractor identifying the tests performed, results of the tests, and performance data resulting from the tests. This shall be submitted prior to the punch-list phase of the project.

• Video Coaxial Cable Lengths and Terminations: 1. Each RG6 coax cable shall not exceed 300’ 2. Each RG11 coax cable shall not exceed 600’ 3. Do not exceed stated maximum cable lengths. 4. Terminate into 8 way splitters mounted on the wall. 5. RG11 coax cable shall be used for backbone cabling and broadcast return path

in broadcast rooms. • Video Coaxial Cable Testing:

1. Testing can be completed by the installing contractor; third party testing is not required.

2. Video coaxial cable shall be tested at 1 GHz. 3. Backbone cable; RG-11 shall not exceed a loss value of more than 4.35db per

100 ft. 4. Station cable, RG-6, and shall not exceed a loss value of 6.55db per 100 ft.

• Inspection Phases: 1. The ITPM and PM shall make periodic inspection of the project in progress.

Such inspections do not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of meeting the specifications.

2. One inspection shall be performed at the conclusion of cable pulling, prior to closing of the ceiling to inspect the method of cable routing and support, and the fire-stopping of penetrations.

August 2015 13


3. A second inspection shall be performed at completion of cable termination to

validate that cables were dressed and terminated in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA specifications for jacket removal and pair untwist, compliance with manufacturer’s minimum bend radius, and that cable ends are dressed neatly.

• Final Inspection: 1. Upon completion of the project, the PM shall perform a final inspection of the

installed cabling system with the vendor’s project foreman. This inspection does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of meeting the specifications.

2. The final inspection shall be performed to validate that all horizontal and backbone cables were installed as defined in the drawing package, and that the installation meets the aesthetic expectations of the District.

• Test Verification and System Performance: 1. If testing is performed by the contractor a report shall be submitted by the


2. Upon receipt of the test documentation, consisting of the printed test results of each cable tested, the District reserves the right to perform spot testing of a representative sample of the cabling system to validate test results and that the cable meets specifications.

3. Printed test results shall identify each cable tested and match installed cable designations.

4. If significant discrepancies are found, the vendor shall be notified for resolution.

5. During the four-week period between final inspection and delivery of the test and as-built documentation, the District may activate the cabling system to validate operation.

• Final Acceptance: 1. Final acceptance shall not occur until all of the following are complete: 2. Installation, in-progress, and final inspections are complete. 3. The District has received and verified the test and as-built documentation. 4. The cable has performed successfully for a four-week period.


27 11 00 Communications Cable and Equipment Rooms – August 2015


• General: 1. The Main Distribution Frame (MDF) room is where the Century Link and

other service provider cables from the outside connect to the inside building cable plant. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) rooms are the telephone closets inside the building. Work in this section is restricted to specific

August 2015 14


products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, IT Infrastructure Department; see Section 27 05 10 for the list of acceptable materials

• Backboards: 1. The MDF and IDF room cable termination backboards shall be solidly

attached to the walls of the room as follows: 2. New, unused, unpainted plywood. 3. Fire-retardant treated. 4. Size: ¾” x 48” x 96” 5. Provided by General Contractor.

• Racks: 1. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using ½ inch bolt

hardware. 2. Racks shall be grounded and/or bonded to the telecommunications ground bus

bar in accordance with current NEC codes, provided by Electrical Contractor. 3. Left over rack mount screws (#12-24) not used for installing fiber panels and

other hardware shall be screwed into the rack in open spaces for future use and left with the rack upon completion of the installation.

4. Termination fields shall be mounted per Data, Communications and Alarm Diagram.

• Coordination: 1. All material shall be supplied and installed by the pre-qualified vendor.

• Voice Termination: 1. Any voice communications that are VOIP carried on CAT 6 cable terminated

to a data patch panel are considered Data Cable and shall use the Data Cabling and Termination specifications below.

2. Voice cross connects for POTS lines shall be made by the District’s Telecommunications Staff. a. If 66 blocks are required, they shall be installed by the District’s

Telecommunications Staff. b. Frames shall be oriented so that backbone frames are located on the left

and horizontal frames are located on the right of the termination field when facing the backboard.

c. Cross-connects and cross-connect wire shall be provided by District’s Telecommunications Staff.

3. Where specified, RJ31x jacks shall have the following pinout:

August 2015 15


• Data Cabling and Termination: 1. Data cables in the MDF and IDFs shall terminate into rack-mounted Category

6 data patch panels. 2. Horizontal data and voice cabling shall be connected using patch cords from

the horizontal Category 6 data patch panels to the network equipment within the same or adjacent racks.

3. Horizontal data and voice patch panels shall be contained in 19” x 7’ rack(s). 4. All equipment racks shall include horizontal and vertical management

hardware, both front and rear, to properly and neatly dress horizontal cables and patch cords.

5. Patch panels shall be 24 or 48 modular jack ports, wired to T568B. 6. Patch panels shall be equipped with horizontal management panels (front) and

cable support bars (rear), to properly and neatly dress, terminate, and manage the installed cables and provided patch cords.

• Installation Requirements: 1. Copper termination and management hardware shall be installed in the

following manner: a. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed one-quarter inch for

Enhanced Category 5 connecting hardware. b. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4

times the outside diameter of the cable. c. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or

blocks. d. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and

dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. e. The cable jacket shall be as close as possible to the termination point. f. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch

panel. 2. Communications Cable Management, Data Racks and Ladder Racks:

a. The COM rooms shall have racks, ladder racks and required cable mounting hardware.

TO FIRE SYSTEM

August 2015 16


b. The MDF shall have a minimum of 2 racks. c. Each IDF shall have a minimum of 1 rack. d. Racks shall be placed in a manner that shall allow for clearance of 4 ½ feet

in the back and 3 feet in front. e. If one mounting rail of the rack is placed against a wall, the mounting rail

shall be no closer than 6 inches from the wall to allow room for vertical management.

f. Multiple racks shall be placed side by side with room for vertical wire management with 6 inches between wire management.

g. MDF and IDF layout must be reviewed and approved by ITPM at DD, CD, and pre-construction.


27 13 00 Communications Backbone Riser Cabling – August 2015


• Backbone cabling connects the MDF to the various IDF rooms, and sometimes IDF rooms to other IDF rooms. Backbone cabling is also sometimes called vertical cabling, cross-connect cabling, riser cabling, or inter-closet cabling. Backbone cabling consists of not only the cables that connect the telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms, and building entrances but also the cross-connect cables, mechanical terminations, or patch cords used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

• Backbone riser cables shall be unbroken with no splices between the MDF and the final IDF. That is, if a backbone riser cable passes through an intermediate IDF to get to its final termination IDF room, the unbroken cable shall simply pass through the intermediate IDF; it shall not be cut or spliced.

• Communications Copper Backbone Cabling: 1. The standard for voice backbone cabling shall be 24 AWG 25-pair Category 6

rated unshielded twisted pair. 2. The cable shall meet UL 1581 VW-1 fire safety standard. 3. The cable shall Meet ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.2, ISO/IEC 11801 performance

requirements. 4. Grounding shall meet the requirements as defined in J-STD-607-A, the

Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

5. The pathways and spaces to support backbone cabling shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of TIA-569-C.1-2. Care must be taken when running backbone cables to avoid sources of EMI or radio frequency interference.

6. Voice backbone cables shall be terminated in rack-mounted patch panels. • Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling:

1. One orange 62.5/125 12-strand multimode armored and plenum rated fiber optic backbone cable shall be installed from the data MDF to each of the IDFs.

August 2015 17


2. A fiber warning label shall be attached to the cable every 24 feet. 3. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber termination panel. No slack

loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panel. 4. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber termination panel. No slack

loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panel. 5. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective termination panel

by mechanical means. The cable’s strength member shall be securely attached the cable strain relief bracket in the panel.

6. Each fiber cable shall be stripped upon entering the termination panel and the individual fibers routed in the termination panel.

7. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the termination panel. Cables labeled within the bundle shall not be acceptable.

8. Dust caps shall be installed on the connectors and couplings at all times unless physically connected.

9. All individual fibers shall be terminated with ST connectors on both ends. 10. Fiber optic cables shall be terminated in the data MDF and IDFs in rack

mount patch panels. 11. providing protection to the terminated fibers. 12. The enclosures shall provide AMP (or equivalent) “ST” interfaces. Rack

mounted optical fiber enclosures shall support up to 12-ports in a one rack unit (1.75") space.

13. Each patch panel shall have a slide out tray, which slides forward to allow easy access to the fibers for maintenance and installation.

14. The District requires fiber to be installed using an armored plenum product; therefore, the use of inner-duct is not necessary.

• Communications Coaxial Backbone Cabling: 1. One RG-11 plenum rated coaxial cable shall be installed from the MDF to

each of the IDFs, and shall be jacketed as appropriate for use in a plenum environment.

2. All cable shall be plenum rated unless specifically changed in writing by the ITPM.

3. The cable distance shall not exceed 600 ft and shall have a maximum loss of 4.35 db per 100 ft when tested at 1Ghz.

4. Each end of the cable shall be terminated with F style connectors. 5. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution

cables. 6. Where cables are housed in conduit, the backbone and horizontal cables shall

be installed in separate conduit. 7. Where backbone and distribution cables are installed on a cable tray or wire

way, backbone cables shall be installed on one side of tray and distribution cable shall be placed on the other side and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution cables.


27 15 00 Horizontal Communications Cabling – August 2015

August 2015 18


• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers

that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1. 1. Horizontal cabling runs from the MDF or IDF to the classroom, office, or

work area. Horizontal cabling include the following: a. all horizontal communications cable shall be Cat 6. b. Outlet jacks in the office, classroom, or work area must be rated the same

as the cable; Cat 6 rated jacks for Cat 6 cable. c. Cable supports

• Materials: 1. Indoor plenum-rated four pair Cat 6 unshielded twisted pair, 23 AWG solid

copper-stranding cable with rip cord. The cable shall meet or exceed the following standards: a. NEC/(UL) Specification CMR b. NEC Article: 800 c. NFPA 70 d. ISO/IEC 11801 Class E performance requirements e. CMP ( NFPA 262, UL 910) f. ISO/IEC 11801 ed 2.1 (2008) Class D g. Category 6 - TIA 568.C.2 h. NEMA WC-63.1 Category 6, UL Verified to Category 6 i. UL Flame Test: UL 1666 Vertical Riser j. C(UL) and CSA Flame Test: FT4 k. IEEE Flame Test: 1202

• Cat 6 cable shall be terminated in the classroom, office, or work area telecommunication outlet to a Cat 6 rated RJ45 jack with correct matching cover plate.

• Cat 6 cable shall be terminated in the communications closet to a 24 or 48-port Cat 6 rated rack-mounted patch panel.

• Installation Requirements: 1. The cable jacket shall be as close as possible to the termination point. 2. See Section 27 05 53 for labeling requirements. 3. Both ends of the cable are to be terminated in the T568B configuration.


27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters – August 2015


• Telecommunication Outlets 1. Each Cat 6 cable in the office, classroom, or work area locations specified on

the plans or drawings shall be terminated with a Cat 6 rated RJ45 jack. 2. Each CAT 6 cable shall be terminated on an 8-position, 8-conductor CAT 6

Universal jack. 3. Each RG6 coax cable shall be terminated on both ends with the appropriate F

style connector.

August 2015 19


4. Jack faceplates shall be mounted into single or dual gang boxes. Box

eliminators, surface mount boxes and floor monuments shall be provided by the electrical sub-contractor.

• Modular Furniture Outlets: 1. The faceplate shall be the one specified by the modular furniture

manufacturer. 2. Faceplates shall be mounted in the appropriate knockouts in the furniture

channel. • Wall Outlets:

1. Wall plates shall be front loading AMP Net-Connect Series. 2. Each jack shall be labeled in accordance with Section 27 05 53. 3. The faceplate label shall be covered by a clear plastic insert. 4. AMP part numbers per Section 27 05 10.

a. Single-gang Faceplate, almond color b. Dual-gang Faceplate, almond color c. Quad-gang faceplate, almond color d. Blank, 1.5 Unit Module, almond color e. F-Connector Insert for Module f. ST Connector Insert for Module g. Blank Insert for Module

• Installation Requirements: 1. Cables shall be coiled and supported in the ceiling if adequate space is present

to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturer’s specified bend radius or cable tension.

2. No cable shall be placed on ceiling tiles. 3. No more than 12” of slack shall be stored in a wall box, modular furniture

raceway, or insulated walls. At no time shall any cable exceed the manufacturer’s specified bend radius or cable tension.

4. Excess slack may be neatly coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable.

5. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B document.

6. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed one-fourth inch for Category 6 connecting hardware.

7. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall never be less than four times the outside diameter of the cable.

8. The cable jacket shall be as close as possible to the termination point. • Communications Patch Cords, Station Cords and Cross Connect Wire:

1. See Section 27 05 10 for the list of acceptable materials 2. Patch cords used at the data rack and at the workstation shall be rated the

same as the horizontal cable, Category 6, as appropriate.

August 2015 20


3. Patch cords shall be factory-assembled by the manufacturer of the cable. 4. Each workstation shall require one Enhanced Category 6 patch cord. 5. At the patch panel, the contractor shall provide patch cords to connect

network equipment to the correct jack cable. 6. For every jack installed by the contractor, there shall be a patch cord rated the

same as the cable, Cat 6, as appropriate, with an RJ45 connector on each end supplied by the contractor. There shall be an equal number of 3, 4, and 6 foot cords provided.

7. In the workstation area, 6, 10, and 12-foot patch cords shall be provided in equal amounts of each length.

8. Vendor shall provide stock of each size patch cord.

END SECTION 27 16 00 27 16 50 Video Projector Cabling Mounting – August 2015

• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved by the District; see Section 27 05 10 for the List of Acceptable Materials. Work in this section is limited to vendors that have been pre-approved through the Audio/Video bid.

• Acceptable Installation and Wiring Methods: 1. General:

a. All are to be installed to manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Qwiktron Ceiling Mount:

a. Chief 2 x 2 ceiling plate b. Premier 2 x 1 above ceiling tile plate c. Chief Spider mount

• Qwiktron Wall-mount: 1. Epson 525w Short-Throw Projector with Arm 2. All installations shall be mounted to a District-provided, poplar backer board

with a clear coat finish. The Vendor shall install the backer board and then install the mounting plate.

3. 4 toggle bolts minimum (see anchoring parts list) for mounting plate 4. Cables from projector to wall plate (Qwiktron) either installed via fishing the

wall or Panduit (see parts list). 5. Electrical cord from projector must plug in at either a duplex outlet at 84”

AFF next to the location of the wall mount arm or below the smart board into an outlet within 24” of the device.

• Extron PoleVault Mount 1. MLC panel, CAT 6 cable, voice lift sound system with paging interrupt and

speakers. This installation is most commonly a ceiling mount installation. • Installation Requirements:

August 2015 21


1. Cables shall be coiled and supported in the ceiling if adequate space is present

to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturer’s specified bend radius.

2. No cable shall be placed on ceiling tiles or light fixtures. 3. All cable shall be supported to structure via the use of a beam clamp with an

appropriately sized saddle or Arlington loop. 4. No more than twelve inches (12”) of slack shall be stored in an in-wall box,

modular furniture raceway, or insulated walls, and the cable must never exceed the manufacturer’s specified bend radius.

5. Excess slack may be neatly coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable, but the coil may NOT rest on a light fixture.

6. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-C document, manufacturer’s recommendations, and best industry practices.

7. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed one-fourth inch (1/4”) for Category 6 connecting hardware.

8. The Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall never be less than four times the outside diameter of the cable.

9. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.

• Interactive Board Installation Height Specifications: 1. Kindergarten through 3rd Grade – The top of the board shall be 74” AFF 2. 3rd Grade through 6th Grade – The top of the board shall be 77” AFF 3. 7th Grade through 12th Grade – The top of the board shall be 80” AFF 4. Short throw assemblies (arm and projector) shall be installed 1 to 2” above the

Smart board or whiteboard leaving minimum 80” from the floor to the bottom of the projector

• Warranty: 1. The contractor shall warrant that all products, materials, and installation are

guaranteed to be free from defects in material, installation procedure, and workmanship after final acceptance of installation, for the period defined in the provisions of the District Technical Guidelines.

2. If requested, the Installer shall make up to three (3) on-site visits without additional cost to the District to make system adjustments during the first year. The first year begins on the date of final acceptance, and ends 365 days later.

3. On-premise maintenance shall be provided at no cost to the District, unless damage or failure is caused by misuse, abuse, neglect, or accidents.


27 51 13 Paging System (Mass Notification System) – August 2015

August 2015 22


Note: This section is presented in its entirety. It is suggested that the engineer cut and paste from this section to create a project specific specification section edited for each project. SECTION 27 51 13 PAGING SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL Paging system shall be defined as a mass notification system, and will be installed building wide. This system may be zoned.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1. Division 26 Sections

1.2 SUMMARY

This Section includes equipment for amplifying, distributing, and reproducing sound signals on up to nine output channels separately or as an all call.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or loudspeaker zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit selection between paths for speaker alternative program signals.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

System Functions: Include the following:

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the latest adopted version of the National Electrical Code.

2. Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal channels. 3. Paging system shall override and/or mute existing performance sound systems

such as gyms, auditorium, cafeteria, weight rooms, wrestling rooms, and other rooms as necessary.4. Communicating simultaneously to all zones regardless of zone or channel switch settings.

5. Paging by dialing an extension from any local telephone instrument and speaking into the telephone.

6. Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded over all speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed.

7. Reproducing high-quality sound that is free from noise and distortion at all loudspeakers at all times during equipment operation, including standby mode with inputs off; and output free from non-uniform coverage of amplified sound.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

August 2015 23


A. Product Data: For each type of equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location of each field connection.

1. Console layouts. 2. Control panels. 3. Rack arrangements. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and

differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Include a single-line diagram showing cabling interconnection of components. (MDF 66 block wiring diagrams with paging zone connections and IDF 66 block wiring diagrams with paging interconnecting wiring diagrams of connections to the MDF).

5. System Installation Diagrams: Showing all speaker locations, wiring routes used to each speaker, identification of cable and wiring pair used at each speaker, and end termination.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Include record of final speaker-line matching transformer-tap settings, and signal ground-resistance measurement certified by Installer. Provide certification of completion of installation and service training. Include calculations, charts and test data necessary to demonstrate that the system components deliver the specified signals and power levels at the required points and locations.

D. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

1. Four copies of complete operational instructions shall be furnished complete with record drawings.

2. Include part numbers and names, addresses and telephone numbers of parts source.


A. The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor who has had and currently maintains a locally run and operated business for at least five consecutive years.

B. The paging system must provide satisfactory sound levels in all areas of the school, inside and outside, where installed.

C. It must be capable of processing paging inputs from the school’s telephone system and from the system’s administrative phone (direct connected) installed in the school’s office area.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

August 2015 24


F. Comply with UL 50.

1.7 CAPABILITIES

A. Elementary and Middle School Systems must be capable of:

1. Paging all speakers at the same time.

2. Each of the 9 individual zones of the school (Zone Page), as identified by the District.

B. High School systems must be capable of paging all system speakers at the same time.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Paging System Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and interface with existing facility equipment, products that may be incorporated into the work shall be as manufactured by Bogen Company:

1. Paging System: Bogen PCM-2000 System to include the following: a. Power Supply: PCM-PS2, 1 each per school b. Telephone Interface Module: PCM-TIM, 1 each per school c. Central Processing Module: PCM-CPU, 1 each per school d. 1 or 3-Zone Module: PCM-ZPM, 3 each per elementary and Middle

schools, 1 for High Schools 2. Desk Set Telephone: 2500 located in office, 1 each per school with direct

connection to the paging system 3. System Amplifiers: TPU-250 a. Elementary Schools: 1 each per school b. Middle Schools: 2 each per school c. High Schools: 3 each per school 4. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS):

a. 1400 watt stand-by power – 1 each per school b. Tripplite BC Pro 1400 or Tripplite OmniPro 1400

2.2 PAGING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

A. Coordinate features to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Equipment: Modular type, using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty, unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.

C. POWER AMPLIFIERS

1. Comply with EIA SE-101-A. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted. 3. Output Power: 25Volts, 250Watts. 4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 to 12,000 Hz. 5. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, at rated output.

August 2015 25


6. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 50 to

12,000 Hz. 7. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.

D. SPEAKERS: Paging speakers: Mixture of lay-in (ceiling), speaker/clock combinations, flush-mounted paging horns, surface-mounted paging horns, and wall surface mounted speakers as required in the various locations:

1. Ceiling Lay-in speakers: Valcom Clarity S-521 (5 watt)

a. Preferred installation at existing and at all new installations where acoustical suspended ceilings occur.

2. Speaker/clock combination speakers: Bogen S86T725 a. Existing systems only

3. Surface-mounted speaker horns: Bogen SPT-15 a. Gymnasiums, Cafeterias, Auditoriums, and exterior b. Include wire-guards

5. Wall-mounted speakers: Bogen WBS8T725 a. Existing conditions and areas without suspended ceilings

6. Surface ceiling mounted speakers: Bogen MB8TSQ with rough-in can and baffle a. Existing conditions

E. SPEAKER WIRE: White, Plenum rated, 4-pair, CAT 6, solid conductor wires. Use the existing speaker wire from the existing termination blocks in the MDF room to the individual speakers, DO NOT DISCONNECT from the existing terminal blocks in the MDF. When speaker wires terminate in an IDF, extend to the MDF using 25 pair cable. Install wire labels on both ends of each wire/cable installed.

F. TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM): Arranged to accept voice signals from telephone system (extension dialing access) to automatically provide amplifier input and broadcast through paging speakers in preselected zones.

G. MOUNTING: Install as per details shown on the drawings. Wall mount amplifiers and auxiliary equipment on a plywood backboard in a neat organized manner. All cables shall be bundled, supported on the backboard, and routed in neat vertical and horizontal lines.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. System shall be capable of an all system speaker page as well as an individual zoned page for each of the paging zones identified in the drawings.

B. Paging System Wiring Method: Each speaker shall be wired in the system by a continuous homerun to the MDF or IDF in the vicinity of the speaker. Connect new paging system to building speakers using existing wiring where possible. Arrange wiring and terminations to create zones as indicated on the drawings or as directed by school personnel. Speakers will not be daisy-chained in the plenum except for speakers in Corridors. All other speakers will have their its own cable running to the closest IDF or MDF room.

August 2015 26


C. Terminate wiring from the speakers in the MDF/IDF on the A-B side of a 66 block (see

Division 27). Extend speaker wires that are first terminated in an IDF to the MDF from the C-D side of the 66 block and terminate on the A-B side of the 66 block in the MDF. Use bridge clips for connection from the A-B side of the 66 blocks to the C-D side. Connect the outputs from the paging system to the C-D side of the 66 blocks in the MDF.

D. Extend one pair of paging system wires from the paging system to each of the performance sound systems for emergency override, wherever they occur. Wires are not to be terminated at the sound systems, label each end of each pair as to their purpose.

E. Extend one Cat 6 cable from the paging system to the master clock for time/tone interface.

F. System cabling shall be supported by cable support (per Div. 27) above ceilings, where ceilings exist, and tight to structure where structure is exposed. Drop cable at speaker location. Provide conduit sleeves where cable penetrates walls, and provide fire seal for all penetrations through fire rated barriers.

G. Paging speakers shall be set for 25volt operation and adjusted or tapped as follows:.

1. Hall speakers: 1 watt 2. Room speakers: ½ watt 3. Gym speaker horns: 15 watt 4. Cafeteria speakers: 2 ½ watt 5. Outside speaker horns: 7 ½ watt 6. Install head end equipment in the MDF as shown on the drawings

H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Apply wire and cable marking tape (see Div. 26) to designate wires and cables to identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams. Provide labels for all existing cables at termination points where labels do not exist.

a. Identify and label with approved final room designations.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page material at microphone inputs, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper routing and volume levels and freedom from noise and distortion.

August 2015 27


C. Commissioning: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and

interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers.

D. Provide all required testing apparatus and factory-trained personnel specified to successfully complete the test. (Third party testing is NOT required).

E. Prior to energizing or testing the system, ensure the following:

1. All products are installed in a proper and safe manner per the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Insulation and shrink-tubing are present where required. 3. Dust, debris, etc., are removed 4. Cable is dressed, routed and labeled, connections are consistent with

requirements 5. All labeling has been provided 6. Electronic devices are properly grounded

F. 25V Speaker Test:

1. Play music or other distinctive audio signal through all speakers. 2. Walk all rooms and other speaker locations. 3. Verify that each speaker is operating and that there are no significant changes in

volume levels from one speaker to the next. 4. Verify that the extent of coverage is consistent with the areas indicated on the

drawings.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipment as specified below:

B. Provide one 2-hour session to train Owners maintenance personnel and a total of two hours - to train school staff on programming equipment for starting up and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. Include proper use of the system which covers operation using the telephone system and the administrative phone

1. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

2. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance notice.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warrant that all materials and installation shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in material and workmanship after final acceptance of installation for the period defined in the provisions of Division 01.


27 51 16 Public Address Sound Systems – August 2015

August 2015 28


• Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers and model numbers that have been previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1.

• Section Includes: 1. Public Address Rooms:

a. Independent sound system for public performances and meetings in: (1) Gymnasium (2) Multipurpose room (3) Auditorium (4) Vocal Music (5) Instrumental Music (6) Commons (7) Cafeteria

• See Data, Communications and Alarm Diagram. • In the absence of other information, standards of the following organizations

apply: 1. Electrical Components complying with applicable requirements of NFPA 70

"National Electrical Code" including, but not limited to: a. Article 250, Grounding b. Article 300, Part A., Wiring Method c. Article 310, Conductors for General Wiring d. Article 725, Remote Control, Signaling Circuits e. Article 800, Communications Systems

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 50 as applicable. • Submittals

1. Product Data: Required a. Equipment prints b. Full electronic wiring diagrams c. Specification sheets including cable types.

2. Shop Drawings: Required a. Detailed wiring diagrams for power, signal and control that clearly

differentiate between manufacturer installed wiring and field installed wiring.

b. Identify wires at termination points to facilitate installation, operation and maintenance.

c. Detail programmable electronic communications network system including but not limited to the following: (1) Detailed One Line Drawings (2) Equipment Cabinet Arrangement

d. System field wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment.

e. Manufacturer's complete service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections.

f. Riser diagram for the system showing in technically accurate detail all connections and interconnections.

g. Test Reports:

August 2015 29


(1) Include calculations, charts and test data necessary to demonstrate that

the system components deliver the specified signals and power levels at the required points and locations.

3. Certificates: a. Copy of UL listing cards for the proposed system b. A signed statement from the equipment supplier that the system has been

wired, tested and functions properly according to the specifications. 4. Manufacturer Instructions:

a. Four copies of complete operational instructions shall be furnished complete with record drawings.

b. Include part numbers and names, addresses and telephone numbers of parts source.

5. Commissioning: a. Submittals listed above, updated to record status.

6. Demonstration and training: a. Provide a factory authorized representative to present a 2-hour

demonstration on site to the school staff about the major features, common functions and routine operation of each component.

b. Present one in-depth 2-hour session of technical classroom training, on-site, by a factory trained representative of the equipment manufacturer for selected District technicians on the functions, trouble diagnosis and proper maintenance of the installed equipment.

c. Furnish each member of the class a copy of the manufacturers’ applicable training manuals.

d. Schedule the demonstration and training sessions with the District project manager at least ten days in advance.

7. Warranty a. Guarantee all materials and installation to be free of defects in material

and workmanship after final acceptance of installation for the period defined in the provisions of Division 01.

b. Provide on-the-premise maintenance at no cost for the warranty term. c. Within one year of date of acceptance, provide up to three on-site

assistance visits to adjust sound levels, reset matching transformer taps and adjust controls to suit actual occupied conditions.

• Maintenance 1. Local service by factory-trained personnel of the specified equipment from an

authorized distributor of all equipment specified under this section. • Amplifier

1. Crown Dual Channel 2. No greater than 19 inches wide, 5 inches high and 26 inches deep. 3. Audio output of a minimum of 250 watts RMS with a total harmonic

distortion of .05% maximum at 1 kHz rated power. a. Output regulation .5 dB (direct); 1.0 dB (Transformer).

4. Amplifier must meet load requirements • Mixers

1. Behringer RX1202FX 2. Complete input and mixing facilities for 8 low impedance microphone inputs

and auxiliary inputs. August 2015 30


3. Output of system is not to be mutable at either the input or output 4. Auxiliary programs input such as CD players and recorders are considered as

part of this guideline. a. Include CD player with iPod dock with remote control (IR).

(1) Product previously approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1 is Tascam CD-200iL with the IR control.

5. Complete input and mixing facilities for microphone inputs and auxiliary inputs a. Input overload circuit which permits microphone signals of up to 1 volt to

be reproduced without any discernible increase in distortion. b. Capable of reproducing microphone signal levels above 1 volt magnitude

without overloading; or rely upon a gain switch to accommodate high signals

• Signal Processor: 1. Shure DFR22EQ

a. Include all circuitry and controls necessary to provide complete system equalization for optimum sound reproduction and maximum gain before feedback. (1) Equalizer filters: 1 octave bandpass type having an individual range of

12 dB. (2) Front and back panels will have user lockout controls.

• Speakers: 1. Sound Tube HP890i, HP129a, or CM800i, or District approved equivalent.

a. Monitors: EV-SX300/MB200 or District approved equal. 2. Self-contained loud speakers manufactured by manufacturers previously

approved by Jefferson County School District, R-1. 3. Numbers of speakers used depend on the physical area to be covered. 4. All hanging speakers will have a minimum of two support cables, rated to

support 10 times the speaker weight. 5. All Elementary and Middle School Gymnasiums will utilize hanging speakers

manufactured by SoundTube; model number will depend on the area to be covered.

1. High School Gymnasiums will utilize horn-loaded speaker cabinets. Number and size of speakers used will depend on physical area to be covered.

• Microphones: 1. Handheld microphones:

a. Shure SM58LC b. With stand and 25 foot microphone cable each.

2. Wireless microphones systems: a. ATW 3000 series. b. Two (2) per stage and gymnasium.

3. Hanging microphones: a. Shure MX 202BP/C b. Three (3) per stage.

4. Microphone jacks: a. Non-latching Female XLR

(1) Switchcraft Model D3FD or approved equivalent b. Flush mounted.

August 2015 31


• Power Conditioner and Sequencer

1. Furman Model Furman CN-2400S a. Keyed off/on switches b. Standard rack mountable

• Cables 1. Speaker Circuits

a. Homerun station wiring in individually jacketed cables b. Cables 14 AWG conductors; plenum rated

2. Microphone cables: a. Minimum of 22 AWG, plenum rated and each jack homerun to sound

cabinet 3. All microphone jacks will be Switchcraft Model D3FD or District approved

equal. • Equipment Rack:

1. Acceptable products: a. Lowell L260-36/L2150-36 b. Raxxess NE13623 c. Middle Atlantic ERK-3520

2. Floor mount with front locking door 3. Louvered front and back doors

• Source Quality Control 1. Listed by Underwriter's Laboratories under UL Standard 1459. 2. All items of equipment, including wire and cable, shall function as a complete

system. 3. Experimental equipment will not be acceptable. 4. The proposed system must be demonstrable at a local customer’s facility.

• Execution Summary 1. Install system in a well-ventilated location with adequate heat rejection and in

accordance with NFPA 70, other applicable codes, and manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Provide necessary transient protection on the AC power feed to the system. 3. Install low voltage wiring within cable supports above accessible ceilings and

in raceways where Inaccessible or in exposed areas. 4. Install in conduit within inaccessible ceiling and wall spaces. 5. Use UL listed plenum cable. 6. Do not install system cabling and high voltage wiring within the same

raceway. 7. Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal

interfaces. 8. Provide matching networks where required. 9. Provide adequate length of conductors within enclosures. 10. Neatly bundle, tie and trim the conductors to terminal points with no excess. 11. Provide 12 inch minimum separation between cables to speaker-microphones

and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. 12. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal punch blocks in

junction, pull and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.

August 2015 32


13. Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to

designate wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams

14. Cable supports are mandatory where routed through plenum ceiling areas. • Grounding

1. Equipment grounding connections are required for communications network systems rack.

2. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3. Ground equipment and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest extent possible ground loops, command mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk and other impairments.

• Installation Schedule 1. Individual schools may vary depending on design and layout. 2. Typical Elementary Gym/Stage:

Quantity Component

4

SoundTube HP890i-WH Speakers (Gym)

2 SoundTube CM-800i Ceiling Speakers (Stage)

1

Behringer RX1202FX Rack Mixer 1

Crown CDi-1000 Power Amplifier

1

Shure DFR22 Signal Processor 2

Shure SM58S Microphones

3

Shure 202BP/C Microphones (for stage) 3

25’ Microphone Cables

2

Audio Technica ATW-3141 Handheld Wireless 1

Audio Technica ATW-T310 Body Pack

1

APEX 575 Microphone for ATW-T310 1

Raxxess NE1F3623 Rack

1

Raxxess NE1D36F Perforated Door 1

Raxxess ESD-2 Rack Drawer

1

Furman CN-2400S Power Sequencer 2

Round Base Mic Stand

2

Boom for mic stand 1

ART AVDIBox

1

3.5mm Cable 1

Tascam CD-200iL

1

RDL ST-VP2 Automatic Ducking Module 1

RDL PS24A Power Supply

1

RDL TX-70A Paging System Interface 4

Horizon SP-1NC3FD-L-1-0 Wall Plate (non-latching XLR wall plate)

1

Horizon Rack Panel w/4 Non-Latching XLR Jacks

1

Xantech WL85 J-Box IR Receiver 1

Xantech 789-44PS/RP Connecting Block w/PS

1

Xantech 283D Emitter

August 2015 33


3. Typical Elementary Cafeteria: Quantity

Component

4

SoundTube CM-800i Celing Speakers 1

Behringer RX1202FX Mixer

1

Crown CDi-1000 Power Amplifier 1

Shure DFR22 Signal Processor

2

Shure SM58S 3

25’ Microphone Cables

2

Audio Technica ATW-3141 Handheld Wireless

1

Audio Technica ATW-T310 Body Pack

1

APEX 575 Microphone for ATW-T310

1

Raxxess NE1F3623 Rack 1

Raxxess NE1D36F Perforated Door

1

Raxxess ESD-2 Rack Drawer 1

FurmanCN-2400S Power Sequencer

2

Round Base Mic Stand 2

Boom for Mic Stand

1

ART AVDIBox 1

3.5mm Cable

1

Tascam CD-200iL 1

RDL ST-VP2 Automatic Ducking Module

1

RDL PS24A Power Supply 1

RDL TX-70A Paging System Interface

2

Horizon SP-1NC3FD-L-1-0 Wall Plate

1

Horizon Rack Panel w/4 Non-Latching XLR

1

Xantech WL85 J-Box IR Receiver

1

Xantech 789-44PS/RP Connecting Block w/PS

1

Xantech 283D Emitter

4. Typical Middle School Gyms: Same as Elementary School Gyms with the following exceptions:

9 SoundTube HP890i-WH speakers No SoundTube CM-800i speakers No Shure MX202-BP/C Microphones

5. Middle School Cafetoriums: Same as Elementary Gyms with the following

exceptions:

5 SoundTube HP890i-WH speakers

August 2015 34


6. High School system components are designed for each facility’s needs.

Coordinate with the District Project Manager.

• Acceptable Installer 1. Installation and start up are required to be under the direct supervision of a

local contractor meeting the following criteria: a. Regularly engaged in installation, repair and maintenance of such systems. b. Established sound systems, communications and electronics contractor

that has had, and currently maintains, a locally run and operated business for at least five years.

c. Local authorized distributor of all specified equipment for a single source of responsibility and shall provide documents proving such.

d. Provide written proof that his firm is adequately staffed with factory-trained technicians for all of the specified equipment.

• Acceptable Supplier 1. Factory authorized distributor meeting the following criteria:

a. Full responsibility to honor the manufacturer's warranty. b. Show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that the supplier maintains a

fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection, training and service to the system.

c. Availability of necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied.

d. Accredited by the proposed equipment manufacturer(s) and prepared to offer a service contract for system maintenance on completion of the warranty period.

e. Provide the names, locations and cite five recent successful installations in the area.

• Field Quality Control 1. Provide the services of a factory authorized service representative to supervise

the field assembly, connection of components and the testing and adjustment of the system.

2. Check-out and final connections to the system shall be made by a factory trained technician in the employ of the manufacturer of the products installed.


27 53 13 Clock and Program Systems – August 2015

• Under Review


August 2015 35

Jefferson County School District, R-1 Support Services

TECHNICAL GUIDELINES

DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

AUGUST 2015

Jefferson County School District, R-1 TECHNICAL GUIDELINES 2015 Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security

DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Life Safety and Security – August 2015 Note: This section is presented in its entirety. It is suggested that the engineer cut and paste from this section to create a project specific specification section edited for each project. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cable Material Requirements.

B. Cable Installation Requirements.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary

General Conditions, and Division 1 – General Requirements shall apply to work of this Section.

B. At the time of bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, any variances to the contract drawing design, and any non-conformance to the operating capabilities called for in this specification, shall be listed in writing and forwarded with the submission of the bid. Any such exception, variance, or non-conformance, which was not listed at the time of bid, and is identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.


A. Division 07: Firestopping.

B. Division 26: Common Work Results for Electrical Systems.

C. Division 26: Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

D. Division 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Division 26: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Division 26: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

G. Division 26: Identification for Electrical Systems.

August 2015 1


H. Division 27: Communications.

I. Division 28: Access Control Security System.

J. Division 28: Video Surveillance Security Systems.

K. Division 28: Fire Alarm and Detection System. (New and Existing)

L. Division 28: Security Detection and Alarm Systems (New and Existing)

M. Data, Communication and Alarm Diagram (DCAD)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Division 01 – Submittal Procedures

1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data sheets showing product appearance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.

2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use, as stipulated by the product-testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up or products.

3. Exceptions: Provide a details listing of any and all exceptions, variances, and non-conformances to the specifications and contract design drawings. Failure to disclose any such items shall be grounds for immediate disapproval of submittals without comment.

4. Samples: Provide samples of the following items. a. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all security cable to be installed on

the projects. Cable samples shall be of sufficient length to identify cable marking (striping) and cable listing identification.

b. provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all cable supporting devices, metal bridle rings, metal mounting brackets, plastic plenum rated wire bushings, and other applicable cable installation equipment to be utilized on the project.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with a minimum three (3) years experience, and with service facilities within fifty (50) miles of the project.

B. Fire Alarm Installer: Installing Company shall use only NESCO level Notifier dealer or SimplexGrinnell dealer for programming and final testing. The Bidding Company must specialize in installing the products specified in this section with a minimum three (3) years documented experience. The installer shall employ NICET Level 2 trained technicians to install the products specified in this Section.

August 2015 2


C. Card Access Installer: Installing Company shall use only Identicard and HSS for programming and final testing of the Card Access System. The Bidding Company must specialize in installing the products specified in this section with a minimum three (3) years documented experience. The installer shall employ factory trained and certified technicians to install the products specified in this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS CONTROL/SECURITY AND SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volts

insulation rated 75 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a non-metallic jacket, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

B. Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 75 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a non-metallic jacket, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

C. Miscellaneous Access Control/System Circuits: Power limited fire protective signaling cable for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

D. Use #18/4 AWG minimum size stranded conductors for security device initiating loop circuits.

E. Provide wet environment exterior rated cable for underground raceway or exterior cable applications.

F. Install all remote control and signal cables in raceways, or supported every 4 to 6 feet on bridal rings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Plenum rated cable.

August 2015 3


1. Cable routing shall be perpendicular to or parallel to structural building members, and shall utilize a metal bridal ring type support system attached to structural building members only.

2. Mounting cable to other building systems (fire protection, electrical conduit, mechanical ductwork, etc.), or running cable in any fashion other than described, is strictly forbidden.

C. Do not exceed 40% fill rate in raceways and back boxes.

1. For retrofit applications, conduit and box fill shall be assessed and approved by the

Engineer and District.

D. Minimum size for back boxes shall be 4” x 4” x 2-1/8”.

E. The use of extension rings on new or retrofit construction shall be approved on a “case-by-case basis” by the Engineer and District.

F. Junction boxes for any new or retrofit construction, that have more than four (4) wire splice connections, shall utilize WAGO connectors (http://www.wago.us/products/2631.htm) , or equivalent as approved by District project manager.

G. Provide Wiremold© or Plastic surface raceway in all areas that are exposed to the Public. Paint to match existing wall or ceiling finish, unless approved by the Engineer and District. Paint to match existing wall or ceiling finish, unless approved by the Engineer or District. Knockouts are not permitted in exposed back boxes installed in public areas.

H. Support all boxes by All-thread or other approved box support device; or bolt directly to building structural members. Do not support boxes to ceiling tie-wires.

I. Provide marking paint on support hardware. Red for Fire Alarm, Green for Security and Blue for Video Surveillance systems. Do not allow paint to contaminate any wire.

J. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device.

K. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. Where wall construction is wood or steel frame, utilize Caddy telescopic bracket TSGB16/TSGB24 or approved equivalent.

L. Division 28 contractor shall make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, duct smoke detectors, smoke/fire dampers, HVAC units, and other applicable devices, furnished under other Sections.

M. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.

August 2015 4

http://www.wago.us/products/2631.htm


N. Automatic Duct Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 90A. When patching ducts, utilize steel plates secured by #8 x ½” indented slotted hex washer head type A sheet metal screws and apply mastic which is listed and labeled “181A-M” in accordance with UL 181A. Do not use tape.

3.2 OPEN (Plenum) CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Open cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, and shall be run perpendicular or parallel to building structural members. Diagonal routing of cable shall not be considered acceptable and shall cause to be removed and reinstalled.

B. Open cabling shall be routed away from other building cabling and equipment, and shall be routed to and from the device in a vertical or horizontal manner. Maintain cabling at the same level where possible, Cabling that is not dropped vertically to the device or routed horizontally straight to the device shall not be considered acceptable. Cabling that is routed through, over, under or around other equipment, when a straight horizontal or vertical path is available shall not be considered acceptable and shall cause the cable to be removed and be reinstalled.

C. Open cabling shall be supported at a minimum of every 4 to 6 feet to building structural members utilizing metal bridle rings. Cabling that is secured to sprinkler piping, HVAC ductwork, electrical conduit or other non-structural building member shall not be acceptable and shall cause the cable to be re-installed and re-supported in a proper manner.

D. Conduits and device back boxes shall have appropriate plastic plenum rated strain relief wire bushings where open cable routing occurs. Do not use Romex type connectors.

E. Conduits shall be utilized for all separation (wall, ceiling, fire separation barrier, etc.) penetrations.

F. EMT conduit shall be utilized in all wall cavities. Provide appropriate plastic plenum rated wire bushing where open cable routing occurs. Do not use Romex connectors.

G. Appropriate fire caulking or sealant shall be utilized where open cabling penetrations through fire separation barriers or building separation walls occur. Rife caulk all conduit ends where conduit sleeves penetrate fire barrier separations, after cable has been installed. Reference 07 84 00 – Firestopping.

3.3 LABELING

A. Label each initiating device with device ID address (L1-D1 format), and control module

or monitor module with device ID address and circuit function (L1-M1, Strobes format). Use Kroy lettering machine with ¼-inch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

B. Label each notification appliance with notification appliance (NAC) circuit number and

August 2015 5


device number in circuit (NAC 1:1-1, NAC 1:1-2, etc.). Label notification appliance (NAC) circuit and or line (EOL) device location on the notification appliance where the EOL is located (NAC 1:1 EOL). Use Kroy lettering machine with ¼-ingch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

C. Label each remote duct detector or beam detector test station with device ID address and associated HVAC unit or beam detector designated (L1-M1 RTU-1 format). Label location of the device associated with the test station, if the test station is not in the direst vicinity of the associated device (L1-M1 RUT-1 Classroom 201 format). Use Kroy lettering machine with ¼-inch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

D. Label each concealed device location with device ID address and circuit function (L1-M1 Door Holder format) at the adjacent ceiling tile grid T-bar. Use plastic laminate with engraved ¼-inch lettering. Laminate shall be of red on white core construction (white lettering on red background), unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

E. Label each security device with device ID address (ID # format), and motion detector, keypad, card reader, etc. with device ID address and circuit function with ¼-inch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District. All motion detectors shall also have the Contact ID Zone number on the label.

F. Contractor shall provide and install door frame placards as noted on contract documents. The door frame placards shall reflect the MAPPS room designation and shall be engraved phenolic labels matching the color of existing door frame labels, 1.75” tall by 5” wide and attached to the top right corner of the door frame (sticky back) as directed on contract documents.

3.4 ACCESS CONTROL/SECURITY WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE

A. Provide access control system conductors with insulation color coded as

1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors

a. Black, red, blue, white, green 2. Card Reader (In/Out) Circuit

a. 6/ C #20 minimum twisted pair with overall shield, stranded (Wire size will change depending on intended wire run length)

b. White jacket with green striping 3. Motion Detector Circuit

a. 4/C twisted pair, stranded i. Run wires to each device on the polling loop. No individual wire run

may exceed the lengths given in the table to follow. In addition, no more than 64mA may be drawn on any individual wire run. When a star configuration is used, the total length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed 4000 ft (2000 ft. if using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire). Twisted-pair is recommended for all normal wire runs.

August 2015 6


b. Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs i. Wire Gauge Max. Length ii. #22 gauge 650 feet iii. #20 gauge 950 feet iv. #18 gauge 1500 feet v. #16 gauge 2400 feet

c. When running polling loop wires, they must not be run within 6" of AC power, telephone, or intercom wiring. Since the polling loop is carrying data between the control panel and the devices, interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication. The polling loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is used.)

d. White jacket with green striping 4. RS-485 Data Circuit

a. 2-Pair #18 with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

5. Ethernet TCP/IP network cable a. Shall be CAT-5E, maximum distance based on industry standards b. White jacket with green striping

6. Door Strike Circuit a. 4/C #18 twisted pair, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

7. Request-to-Exit (RX) Motion Detector Circuit a. 6/C #20 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

8. Door Position Switch Circuit a. 4/C #22 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

9. Security Keypad Circuit a. Wiring to the Keypads

i. Determine wire gauge by referring to the wiring length/gauge chart below.

ii. Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire runs. The maximum wire run length from the control to a keypad, which is homerun back to the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the table.

a) Wire Run Length Table b) Wire Gauge Length c) #22 gauge 450 feet d) #20 gauge 700 feet e) #18 gauge 1100 feet f) #16 gauge 1750 feet

iii. The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad conductor cable is used (1000 feet if unshielded cable is run in conduit or if shielded cable issued).

August 2015 7


iv. If more than one keypad is wired to a run, then the above maximum lengths must be divided by the number of keypads on the run (e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).

v. White jacket with green striping 10. Future Data Circuit Spare to each Card Access Door (CAD)

a. Cat-5E cable b. White jacket with green striping c. Leave cable coiled in the accessible ceiling space above the RX motion

detector.

3.5 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE (specific conductor and shielding requirements will be per system manufacturer)

A. Conventional Video cameras will use unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Circuit:

1. 1 CAT5E to each camera, cable sharing shall not be permitted in original

construction. 2. White jacket with blue striping. (Recommended manufacturers current UTP distances

shall prevail) 3. Camera circuits less than 1400 ft: CAT5E with passive UTP individual balun 4. Camera circuits more than 1400 and less than 4000 ft: CAT5E with active UTP

individual balun 5. Individual baluns will be used. UTP hubs will not be permitted

B. Camera Power Circuit:

1. Interior fixed cameras: 2/C #16 with overall shield, stranded White jacket with blue striping.

2. Exterior fixed cameras: 2/C #14 with overall shield, stranded White jacket with blue striping

3. Interior and Exterior Pan-Tilt-Zoom (PTZ) cameras: 2/C #14 with overall shield, stranded White jacket with blue striping

C. Ethernet TCPIP network cable

1. CAT-5E, maximum distance based on industry standards. 2. White jacket with blue striping

3.6 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE

A. Provide Fire alarm system conductors with insulation color codes as:

1. SLC wire shall be RED(+)/Black(-). (FPLP jacket with preprinted SLC) 2. IDC wire shall be RED(+)/Black(-). (FPLP jacket with Brown stripe) 3. 24 VDC Power Circuit; #14/2 Solid, Red with Purple Stripe

August 2015 8


4. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): #14/2 or 14/4 Solid, Red w/Green Stripe a. NAC Strobe only wire shall be RED(+)/Black(-). Red w/Green Stripe b. NAC Horn\Speaker only wire shall be RED(+)Black(-) Red w/Blue Stripe

5. Miscellaneous Fire Circuit: #18/4 Solid, Red w/Yellow Stripe 6. Conductor sizing and numbers subject to equipment manufacturer recommendations.

B. Wire size shall be as follows:

1. NAC strobe wire shall be 14AWG. 2. NAC speaker wire shall be 14AWG TW. Shield as required by manufacturer. 3. SLC wire shall be 16AWG. 4. IDC wire shall be 16AWG 5. HVAC wire shall be 16AWG. 6. Network audio shall be 16AWG. 7. All 120VAC shall meet NEC standards. 8. Conductor sizing and numbers subject to equipment manufacturer recommendations.


A. Access Control/Security System

1. Test in accordance with District requirements 2. Provide forty-eight (48) hours prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for

rough inspection, prior to installing ceiling tiles or drywall. 3. Provide seven (7) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for

scheduled contractor pre-testing of the Security and Safety alarm system. 4. Provide two (2) detailed record of the pre-testing of the system; one for the District

and one for the facility’s Security System logbook. Pre-testing record must contain a minimum of the device ID, proper device description, proper functionality of the device (panel notification, door unlock, etc.), and date of the testing. Utilize the standard District form available on the District website, or provide Contractor equivalent form approved by the District in advance of the system pre-test.

5. Access Control/Security System Contractor shall sub-contract the Services of a current Identicard Authorized Factory Partner Level Dealer to provide the access control/security system equipment, panel and device terminations, and system programming.

B. Fire Alarm System

1. Test in accordance with NFPA 72, District, State, and Authority Having Jurisdiction

(AHJ) fire department requirements. Use District Record of Completion and Pretesting forms included in section 283100.

2. Provide forty-eight (48) hours prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for rough inspection, prior to installing ceiling tiles, devices or drywall.

3. Provide seven (7) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for scheduled contractor pre-testing of the system.

August 2015 9


4. Provide three (3) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for the scheduled Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) testing of the system.

5. Provide three (3) original copies of the NFPA 72 - Certificate of Completion Form. a. One for the District, one for the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and one

for the facility’s Fire Alarm System Logbook. b. Voltage and current values must be true measured values not estimates. c. Provide a table list of each Horn location with actual measured dB per NFPA

6. Provide two (2) detailed records of the pre-testing of the system. a. One for the District and one for the facility’s Fire Alarm System logbook. b. Pre-testing record must contain a minimum of the device ID, proper

annunciator description, proper functionality of the device (audible/visual signaling, shutdown, etc.), and date of the testing.

c. Utilize the standard District form available on the District website, or provide Contractor equivalent form approved by the District in advance of the system pre-test.

7. Fire and Security Alarm Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and employing the Controls Contractor to accomplish programming required between Fire and Security Alarm system and Metasys system as well as connection of all interface circuits.

3.8 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems.

B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final

connections, and system testing.

C. Provide two (2) hard copies and two (2) electronic copies in CD ROM or flash drive format of the final system programming. One set to be delivered to the District Project Manager for the District Central Reporting System programming, and one set to be left at the facility.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.

3.10 TRAINING

A. Provide the services of a factory-certified service representative to demonstrate the system and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below.

1. On-Site Training: Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of on-site training of the

facility’s school staffing in the basic operations and functionality of the access control / security system panel, and field devices. Review field panel locations, typically device locations, and 120vAC power locations (panels, breakers, and circuits). Demonstrate the various system responses to the field off-normal conditions.

August 2015 10


Simulate card access conditions, supervisory conditions, security conditions, trouble conditions, and ground fault conditions of the various field devices. Demonstrate how to reset various building systems (HVAC units, fire doors, security gates, etc.). Provide written instructions of basic system operating instructions in Fire Alarm Log Book, located adjacent to the fire alarm control panel.

a. On-Site System Training shall be completed with in six (6) days of completion of the system and Owner Acceptance of the system.

b. Schedule on-site training with the District at least three (3) days in advance.

END OF SECTION 28 05 00 28 13 00 Access Control Security System – August 2015 This Technical Guidelines Section is not open to the public. Contact the District Project Manager for access to this information.

END OF SECTION 28 13 00 28 16 00 Security Detection and Alarm Systems – August 2015 This Technical Guidelines Section is not open to the public. Contact the District Project Manager for access to this information.


August 2015 11


28 31 00 Fire Alarm & Detection System – August 2015 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements shall apply to work of this Section.

B. At the time of bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, any variances to the

contract drawing design, and any nonconformance to the operating capabilities called for in this specification, shall be listed in writing and forwarded with the submission of the bid. Any such exception, variance, or nonconformance, which was not listed at the time of bid, and is identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.

C. Fire Alarm manufacturer shall be required to provide Jefferson County Public Schools a

licensed copy of any software required to download, modify and maintain the system. Programming access codes shall not be given to the District until after the warranty period.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and services to furnish and install a complete fire alarm security and detection system of the zoned, non-coded general alarm type. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software, and memory specifically tailored for this installation. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Fire Alarm control panels. 2. Annunciator panels. 3. Addressable manual fire alarm stations. 4. Analog/Addressable automatic initiating devices. 5. Fire alarm signaling devices. 6. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment and connections.


A. Section 07 80 00: Firestopping B. Section 21 10 00: Water Based Fire Suppression Systems

Note: This section is presented in its entirety. It is suggested that the engineer cut and paste from this section to create a project specific specification section edited for each project.

August 2015 12


C. Section 23 33 00: Air Duct Accessories D. Section 26 05 00: Common Work Results For Electrical Systems E. Section 26 05 19: Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables F. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems G. Section 26 05 29: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems H. Section 26 05 33: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems I. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems J. Division 27: Communications K. Jefferson County PS DCAD Details L. Division 28 05 00 Common Work Results For Electronic Life Safety and Security

1.4 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards, publications, or Regulations referenced in this Section, and with the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:

1. All equipment shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, under the

following standards: a. Signaling Systems – 1994 b. UL 228 – Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors

1997. c. UL 639 – Intrusion – Detection units – 1993. d. UL 268 – Smoke Detectors of Fire Protective Signaling Systems – 1996. e. UL 268A – Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications – 1997. f. UL 464 – Audible Signal Applications – 1996. g. UL 521 – Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems – 1994. h. UL 864 – Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems – 1994. i. UL 1076 – Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems – 1995. j. UL 1971 – Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired – 1997. k. FM P7825a – Approval Guide Fire Protection l. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Current Version adopted By Colorado. m. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code Current Version adopted By Colorado. n. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems 1996. o. IFC - International Fire Code. Current Version adopted By Colorado p. IBC International Building Code. Current Version adopted By Colorado q. IMC – International Mechanical Code. Current Version adopted By Colorado r. ANSI S3.41 – Audible Emergency Evacuation Signals. s. EIA ANSI/EIA/TIA2323 – Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and

Data Circuit Terminating Equipment employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.

t. IEEE C6.41 – Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits – 1991. u. Division 1 – Jefferson County Public Schools Technical Guidelines. v. Local AHJ shall enforce State of Colorado Requirements only State of

Colorado Requirements.

August 2015 13


w. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of Annunciator map graphic layout and system wiring diagrams showing all equipment, device placement, and wiring connection required. Drawings include one-line riser diagrams, device ID numbers and zone schedules, operational matrix, and location of all end0of0line (EOL) devices. Each initiating device and notification appliance device shall include signaling loop circuit or notification appliance circuit number and device ID numbers.

2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data sheets showing product appearance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.

3. Load Calculations: Provide load calculations for all visual appliance circuits, audible notification appliance circuits, audible/visual notification appliance circuits, system power supplies, and battery standby systems.

4. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use, as stipulated by the product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of products.

5. Exceptions: Provide a detailed listing of any and all exceptions, variances, and non-conformances to the specifications and contract design drawings. Failure to disclose any such items shall be grounds for immediate disapproval of submittals without comment.

6. Samples: Provide samples of various items, when requested. a. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all fire alarm cable to be installed

on the projects. Cable samples shall be of sufficient length to identify cable marking (striping) and cable listing identification.

b. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all cable supporting devices, metal bridle rings, metal mounting brackets, plastic plenum rated wire bushings, and other applicable cable installation equipment to be utilized on the project.


A. Reference 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

B. Record Drawings

1. Record “as-built” locations of all system components, initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end-of-line devices. Include “as-built” conduit routing and wire counts. The design engineer and Jefferson County representative shall walk through the building and spot check 5-10% of device locations against the as-builts. If devices are not as shown, drawings will be rejected for a redraw. Upon resubmittal, another spot check will be performed. If deficiencies are found on the second check, an independent audit to the system by the system manufacturer shall be required. The

August 2015 14


contractor shall bear the cost of any such audit. 2. As-Built drawings shall consist of two hard copy bond sets and one electronic

AutoCAD file copy on CD or flash drive format. 3. As-Built system load and battery calculations shall consist of one full size and one

half full size hard copy bond sets and one electronic copy on CD or flash drive format. Load calculations shall include all audible, visual, and audible/visual notification appliance circuits with calculated voltage drop levels, calculated maximum circuit distance measurements, actual recorded circuit length distance measurements, and actual measured voltage drop levels.

4. Provide two (2) hard copies of all system programming (software). 5. Provide two (2) electronic copies of all system programming (software); on CD ROM

or flash drive format. 6. Provide Contractor redline construction drawing set, with mark-ups. 7. Provide one (1) full size hard copy bond set of As-Built record drawing set. 8. Provide one (1) half size hard copy bond set of As Built record drawing set. 9. Provide one (1) electronic copy of As-Built record drawing sets; on CD or flash drive

format. 10. Provide all special test equipment, filters, test leads, cords, etc. required to test the

system. 11. Record document box shall be located adjacent to FACP and shall contain contractor

working set (actual field set – not cleaned up version) along with electronic copies as indicated above.

C. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

1. Operational Data: Provide operating instructions, detailed for the specific project. 2. Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance and repair procedures for each type of

equipment provided, as applicable. Include any specific requirements particular to the project.

3. Equipment Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets or catalog sheets for each type of equipment provided.

4. Spare Parts Data: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list, including quantity, and any equipment replaced schedules, as applicable.

5. Supplier Data: Provide system manufacturer and local service organization information. Include contact, phone numbers, and addresses, as applicable.

6. Warranty Data: Provide system warranty information, including all material and/or labor terms.

D. Warranty

1. The manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment for a minimum period of one

(1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. Any additional warranty periods shall be listed in the Operation and Maintenance Data manuals. Any defective equipment, material, or software shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner during this warranty period.

2. The installing contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from

August 2015 15


inherent mechanical or electrical defects for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. Any defective material and/or labor shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.

E. Maintenance Service

1. Furnish warranty service and maintenance of the fire alarm system for one (1) year

from the date of final acceptance of the system, as follows: a. Basic Services: Systematic, routine maintenance visits, as required; at times

coordinated with the Owner. In addition, respond to service calls within 24 hours of notification of system trouble. Adjust and replace defective parts, components, and supplies.

b. Additional Services: Perform services within the above two (2) year period, not classified as routine maintenance or as warranty work, when authorized in writing by the Owner. Compensation for additional services shall be agreed upon in writing, prior to performing and additional services.

F. Spare Parts

1. Provide extra materials, as follows: a. Provide 5% analog/addressable manual stations minimum 1. b. Provide 5% of each type of automatic smoke or heat detector minimum 1. c. Provide 5% of each type of smoke or heat detector base minimum 1. d. Provide 5% of each type of audible, audible/visual, or visual notification

appliance minimum 1 of each. e. Provide 5% of each type of addressable monitor module minimum 1. f. Provide 5% of each type of addressable control module minimum 1. g. Provide six (6) of each type of key.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with a minimum three (3) years’ experience, and with service facilities within fifty (50) miles of the project.

B. Project Engineer: Company shall employ an engineer of record with a registered P.E. in

fire protection engineering, or a registered P.E. in a related engineering discipline, with a minimum of four (4) years’ experience in fire protection and alarm engineering, or a minimum NICET Level 3 project engineer.

C. Installer: Installing Company shall use only NESCO level Notifier dealer or SimplexGrinnell dealer for programming and final testing. The Bidding Company must specialize in installing the products specified in this section with a minimum three (3) years documented experience. The installer shall employ NICET Level 2 trained technicians to install the products specified in this Section.

August 2015 16


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products of the following

manufacturers shall be acceptable: 1. Base Bid: Shall be based upon Simplex 4100U. 2. Alternate Bid: Shall be based upon Notifier 3030. 3. Substitutions: No substitutions allowed.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

1. The fire alarm control panel shall incorporate all control electronics, relays, necessary

modules, and components in a semi-flush mounted cabinet. The operating controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall be located for the Fire Department and other authorized operating personnel. The fire alarm control panel shall consist of a base panel, system power supply, and battery charger, with optional modules suitable to meet the requirements of these specifications.

2. The fire alarm control panel shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design with expansion modules to provide analog addressable loop modules as required. Allow for 20% spare on both detector and modules. The expansion modules be configurable to either Class A or Class B wiring.

3. The fire alarm control panel shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in nonvolatile memory, and shall survive a complete power failure intact. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of automatic system operation with support of alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp test and reset common controls. The fire alarm control panel shall allow downloading of job specific custom programming, and shall support programming of any input point to any output point, or using initiating events to start actions and sequences.

4. The fire alarm control panel shall utilize full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop detectors and modules for proper operation. The fire alarm control panel shall have a UL Listed Detector Sensitivity test feature, and shall support 100% of all remote detectors, remote alarm indicators and modules in alarm at any time.

5. The fire alarm control panel shall supervise all system modules for placement, and shall have a digital display for reporting system status and abnormal conditions. The fire alarm control panel shall provide common control indicators (normal, alarm, monitor, ground fault, supervisory, trouble), common control switches (reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, and drill), and zone alarm and trouble LEDs, as required for the system zoning requirements. The fire alarm control panel shall provide system function keys for status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program and test.

6. Provide a District approved Fire Alarm Document Enclosure adjacent to the FACP. 7. Provide a wall mounted 3 ring binder holder for District provided Fire Alarm Log

Book adjacent to the FACP.

August 2015 17


B. Power Supplies:

1. The fire alarm power supply shall be switch mode type with line monitoring to automatically switch to batteries upon power failure or brown out conditions, and shall be adequate to service all control panel modules, all fire alarm system powered smoke sensors and modules, remote annunciators, control relays, and all fire alarm signaling appliances. The fire alarm power supply shall contain an integral battery charger capable of recharging the standby batteries per NFPA 72 requirements, and shall provide battery supervision for placement and low voltage.

2. Provide booster power supply panels as required, to meet project requirements. The booster power supply shall activate via dry contact from the fire alarm control panel. The booster power supply shall generate a fault condition at the main fire alarm control panel, when any fault condition occurs on circuits connected to the booster power supply, or a trouble condition occurs at the booster power supply panel. The booster power supply shall contain an integral battery charger capable of recharging the standby batteries per NFPA 72 requirements, and shall provide battery supervision for placement and low voltage.

3. Multiple power supplies may share monitor and control modules ONLY if they are mounted in the same room, not to exceed 3 power supplies per monitor point. Activation of a power supply from another power supply is not permitted.

4. Provide a dedicated booster power supply for 24VDC magnetic door holders. Configure power supply for control only. Do not monitor this power supply and do not provide batteries as magnetic door holders are fail safe.

5. Provide a dedicated booster power supply for NAC modular classroom NAC circuits.

C. Standby Batteries: The secondary power source shall be standby batteries. Batteries shall be sealed lead acid type, with a minimum life expectancy of five years, and shall provide twenty four (24) hours of normal standby operation and five (5) minutes of normal alarm condition at the end of the standby period. System can use four (4) hour battery system if the site has an Automatic-starting, engine-driven generator serving the dedicated branch circuit of the fire alarm system arranged in accordance with NFPA 72 10.5.10.3.1

1. Batteries shall be dated with month and year of installation in the system. 2. Dedicated battery cabinets (when required) shall be located below the fire alarm

control panel. Do not locate these panels above finished ceilings.

D. System Design Parameters:

1. Design the fire alarm system such that each power supply, initiating device (IDC) circuit, device initiating signaling loop (SLC) circuit, audible/visual notification appliance (NAC) circuit, power supply, and standby battery system shall have a minimum 20% spare capacity included.

2. Design the fire alarm system such that each analog/addressable device initiating loop (SLC) circuit shall have a minimum 20% spare capacity included.

3. Fire Alarm Loop Fault Isolation: Design the fire alarm system such that each analog/addressable device initiating loop (SLC) circuit shall incorporate isolation

August 2015 18


detector bases and/or loop fault isolation modules, placed at any location where the SLC leaves the building or enters a wet locations.

4. Fire Alarm Class B Device Initiating Loop (SLC) Circuits: The analog/addressable device loop (SLC) circuit shall be power limited, electronically supervised and shall be monitored for active (short), trouble (open), and ground fault conditions. The analog/ addressable loop (SLC) circuit shall provide all power, signaling and polling communications to the analog detectors and addressable modules connected to it, and shall monitor all sensors for their analog values, environmental compensation levels, and maintenance conditions. The analog/ addressable device loop (SLC) circuit shall monitor all devices for trouble and alarm conditions, and shall place the circuit in trouble mode; but shall not disable any device from initiating an alarm of trouble signal to the fire alarm control panel. The analog/ addressable device loop circuit shall be Class B (Style 4) type.

5. Class B Notification Appliance (NAC) Circuits: The notification appliance (NAC) circuits shall be power limited, electronically supervised, and shall be monitored for trouble (open and/or short) and ground fault conditions. Occurrence of a single ground condition shall place the circuit in trouble mode, but shall not disable that circuit from signaling the alarm condition (audible or visual) to the field notification appliances. The alarm notification appliance circuits shall provide all power for the audible, visual, and audible/visual notification appliances, and shall by Style Y (Class B).

6. Audible and Visual (NAC) Appliance Circuits: Provide audible and visual notification appliance (NAC) circuits, such that the visual notification appliances continue to flash until the fire alarm control panel has been reset, even though the audible notification appliances have been silenced.

7. Design the fire alarm system such that the Beam and Duct smoke detectors are intelligent/analog devices. Conventional devices shall not be used without written permission from the engineer and District Project Manager. If conventional devices are approved, a separate 24vDC power source that is resettable from the fire alarm control panel must be installed, as applicable.

8. Jeffco Fire Alarm System Design Criteria shall be used to provide supplemental coverage. This section shall be printed on the front page of all Fire Alarm Plans submitted to Local AHJ’s. It is intended to help local AHJ’s understand how the District applies additional selective coverage.

August 2015 19


Jefferson County Public Schools FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA

The fire alarm system design is based upon the following regulations and codes:

1. Latest adopted versions of the following:

a. International Building Code (IBC) b. International Mechanical Code (IMC) c. National Electrical Code (NEC) d. National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) e. Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA

90A) f. Elevator Safety Code (ANSI A17.1) g. Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) h. State of Colorado Requirements i. Jefferson County Public Schools Division 28 Technical Guidelines

In addition to the state and code requirements, the fire alarm system design incorporates the following additional design criteria: Smoke Detection:

1. Smoke detectors shall be located in all electrical rooms, air handling equipment rooms, and other similar code required areas.

2. Smoke detectors shall be located throughout all common corridors, gyms, cafeterias, and libraries.

3. Smoke detectors shall be located in all MDF, IDF and other communication type rooms. 4. Smoke detectors shall be located at the fire alarm control panel. 5. Smoke detectors shall be located at all fire alarm remote power supply panels. 6. Smoke detectors shall be located in all kindergarten classrooms. 7. Smoke detectors shall be located in all special education classrooms, and other areas

where special needs students would normally be located. 8. Smoke detectors shall be located in all computer classrooms. 9. Smoke detectors shall be located in all auditoriums. 10. Smoke detectors shall be located in elevator lobbies, elevator machine room, and the top

of shaft for elevator control purposes as allowed by code. 11. Only a single smoke detector is required in each modular classroom except where full

detection is required for special needs classrooms or kindergarten classrooms. 12. In a sprinklered building, smoke detectors for door release service shall be installed in

accordance with NFPA 17.7.5.6.5. 13. Smoke detectors for fire/smoke damper and firefly release shall be located in accordance

with IBC 716.3.2.1. Contractor shall pretest fire/smoke damper and firefly function prior to start of construction and report deficiencies to JCPS.

Heat Detection:

August 2015 20


1. Heat detectors shall be located in all code required areas not suitable for smoke detection, and shall be intelligent, analog heat detectors.

2. 135°F rate of rise heat detectors shall be located in all chemical storage areas, science prep rooms, and science classrooms.

3. 135°F rate of rise heat detectors shall be located in all student use restrooms. Heat detectors shall be located outside of the airflow path of HVAC registers. Heat detectors that are required in small restrooms in which the detector must be located in the airflow path shall be programmed for fixed temperature. Heat detectors are not required for single toilet rooms with no sink.

4. 135°F fixed temperature heat detectors shall be located in modular classroom restrooms and mechanical closets.

5. 135°F fixed temperature heat detectors shall be located in kitchen areas. 6. Heat detectors set at the highest programmable fixed temperature possible shall be

located in yard equipment storage rooms unless storage is detached from the main school building.

7. Heat detectors set at the highest programmable fixed temperature possible shall be located in all boiler rooms, chiller rooms, and other similar rooms unless sprinkled.

8. Heat detectors set at the highest programmable fixed temperature possible shall be located in the kiln room.

9. Heat detectors shall be located in the elevator machine room and top of shaft for elevator shunt trip purposes as required by state code.

10. 135°F rate of rise heat detectors shall be located in all teacher/staff lounges. 11. 135°F rate of rise heat detectors shall be located on all middle school and high school

stages. 12. 135°F fixed temperature heat detectors shall be located in all home economics

classrooms.

Duct Smoke Detection:

1. Duct smoke detectors shall be intelligent analog/addressable type, which shall report to the fire alarm system as a “Supervisory” type device.

2. Duct smoke detectors shall be located in the return air ductwork of all HVAC units greater than 2,000 CFM. Duct smoke detectors shall be located in the return air ductwork of all HVAC systems with a combined capacity greater than 2,000 CFM.

3. Duct smoke detectors shall be located in the return ductwork of all HVAC units greater than 15,000 CFM where return air risers serve two or more stories such smoke detectors shall be installed at each story per the IMC.

4. Duct smoke detectors shall be located within five feet of each smoke damper or fire/smoke damper used for control purposes unless an alternate method from IMC 607.3.3.2 can be applied.

Manual Pull Stations:

1. Manual pull stations shall be dual action type. 2. Manual pull stations shall be located at each double door exit from the school.

August 2015 21


3. Manual pull stations shall be located at the exit doors in gyms, modular classrooms, kitchens, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, science rooms, cafeterias, library/media centers and art rooms with direct exterior access.

4. Manual stations shall be mounted with the operating mechanism at 48” above finished floor.

Magnetic Door Holders:

1. Existing magnetic door holders shall remain in place. 2. Where existing magnetic door holders are not installed, new magnetic door holders shall

be installed at gym, cafeteria and main office doors. 3. Where standard magnetic door holders are inadequate due to accessibility constraints,

windows, door swing etc, contractor shall utilize LCN 4040SE Sentronic integral door hardware.

4. Contractor shall remove door stops at locations of new and existing magnetic door holders.

Carbon Monoxide (CO) Sensors (not used at this time): 1. Carbon monoxide (CO) sensors shall be monitored by addressable fire alarm monitor

module, and shall report to the fire alarm system as a “supervisory” type device. 2. Carbon monoxide (CO) sensors shall have three CO exposure level settings for short,

medium, and long duration periods of exposure to CO gas. 3. Carbon monoxide (CO) sensors shall have an integral audible sounder, which shall

provide a local alarm signal upon activation of any of the three CO exposure level settings.

Audible, Visual, and Audible/Visual Notification Appliances:

1. Horns and horn/strobes shall be generally located to provide a minimum of 15dB above ambient sound levels throughout all building areas.

2. Horn/strobes shall be located in all mechanical rooms, and other high-noise areas. 3. Horn/strobes shall be located in all classroom areas. 4. All horns shall be set to the lowest possible dB level or provided with a baffle. Simplex

horns in classrooms shall be installed with the optional listed sound damper (4905-9838). 5. Strobes shall be located in all common “public area” spaces, including corridors,

classrooms, restrooms, open office areas, and other areas where more than one person occupancy would be expected.

6. Strobes shall be located in all restrooms except single water closets (toilet only) without a sink specifically in kindergarten and pre-school classrooms.

7. Strobes shall be located in copy rooms, work rooms, storage rooms greater than 400 square feet, and storage rooms where high occupant usage levels are anticipated under normal conditions.

8. Strobes shall be located in clinics and conference rooms. 9. Strobes shall not be installed in single occupant offices. 10. Ceiling mounted horn/strobes are preferred over wall mounted in classrooms, restrooms,

and offices. Ceiling mounted horns, strobes, and horn/strobes shall be centered in the

August 2015 22


space as much as possible, but shall not exceed 5 feet in any direction from the center, unless approved by the engineer or AHJ.

11. When ceiling mounting is not practical, horns, strobes, and horn/strobes shall be wall mounted with the bottom of the visual signal (strobe) lens at 80” above finished floor, or with the top of the visual signal (strobe) lens at 6” below the ceiling (for low ceiling areas), whichever is lower.

12. For specific limited applications, the horns, strobes, and horn/strobes may be installed with the top of the visual signal (strobe) lens at up to 96” above finished floor. Each location must be approved in writing by the engineer or AHJ.

13. Exterior weatherproof horn/strobes shall be provided at the fire department response point and any playground areas. The horn shall be silenceable and the notification appliance shall be mounted 10 feet above grade.

END FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA

E. OFFSITE SIGNALING

1. Dialer: Provide digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT) that shall transmit all control panel off normal condition, including Alarm, Water flow, Supervisory, or Trouble. The DACT shall utilize two (2) Cat6 voice lines to comply with NFPA 72 requirements, shall utilize Contact ID type point-by-point communication format. The DACT shall be Notifier Model UDACT, Simplex Model SDACT, or District approved equivalent transmitter (DACT). The Contractor shall provide all point-by-point programming to support transmission of all control panel off normal conditions, including Alarm, Supervisory, Water flow and Trouble.

2. Network Reporting: Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide a Bosch C900v2 Capture Dialer Ethernet Module (C900v2) housed in a Bosch AE2 Enclosure per manufacturer. Install device in MDF or IDF closest to the FACP. The module shall be powered by non-resettable 24vDC power from the FACP. Refer to DCAD drawings for typical diagram.

a. Data contractor to provide a new Network drop per Division 27. C900v2 shall connect to the LAN by an Ethernet cable between the RJ45 connector and the assigned Ethernet port on the Ethernet Network equipment.

b. Data Contractor to install two CAT6 cables on 66 blocks between the C900v2 location and FACP DACT. One CAT6 cable will connect the C900v2 to the FACP DACT (D1) while the other will connect the TELCO PSTN to the FACP DACT (D2) directly.

c. Fire Alarm contractor shall install one 24 vDC power circuit between the C900v2 enclosure and FACP per Div 28 05 00 3.6.A.3

d. An eight conductor patch cord will connect the C900v2 to the FACP DACT (Fire Alarm Control Panel Digital Alarm Communications Transmitter), either internal to the FACP or external, utilizing the RJ-45 phone jack on each device. The C900v2 RJ-45 phone jack (to control panel) shall connect to the

August 2015 23


Primary or D1 of the FACP DACT via an RJ31x installed outside the AE2 Enclosure. No connection will be made to the RJ-45 phone jack of the C900v2.

e. The C900v2 is configured using a telnet session over the internet to add the network assigned addresses as provided by the JEFFCO IT Department.

f. Dip switch settings are made for Fallback Mode = ON, polling intervals = 240, handshake intervals = 1 second and hang-up options = ON. The dip switches also have to be configured for the Dialer Format of Host Alarm Panel.

g. Completion: After gathering all the information required to address, configure and assign the devices from the account location to the receiver, there should not be any unknown accounts received at Dispatch. The two LEDs on the C900v2 should both be green and flash accordingly to normal operation.

3. Ethernet Communications: Provide Ethernet topology data communications module (LAN) that shall transmit all control panel off normal condition, including Alarm, Water flow, Supervisory, or Trouble via Email. The LAN module shall utilize a Category 5E RJ45 data Ethernet connection port for interconnection to the District LAN/WAN network. The LAN module shall support remote web browsing and email alert functions.

F. SUPPORT FOR INSTALLER AND OWNER PROVISIONS:

1. The fire alarm control panel shall provide a coded “self-test” test feature, capable of audible or silent testing. The “self-test” test feature shall signal alarms and troubles during test, and shall allow receipt of alarms and programmed operations for alarms from other areas not under “self-test”.

2. The fire alarm control panel shall provide internal system diagnostics and maintenance user interface controls to display and/or report the power, communications, and general status of specific panel components, detectors, and modules. The fire alarm control panel shall provide device loop controller diagnostics to identify common alarm, trouble, ground fault, and Class A fault conditions.

3. The fire alarm control panel shall allow the user to display/report the condition of the analog/addressable detectors, with analog sensitivity reading, and shall allow the user to report history for alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble ad restore activity on the system, with time date stamp.

4. The fire alarm control panel shall allow the user to disable/enable devices, zones, actions, and sequences. The fire alarm control panel shall allow the user to activate/restore outputs, actions, and sequences. The fire alarm control panel shall allow the user to service the time and date of the system, and to change passwords for users. All these features shall be password protected.

5. The fire alarm system shall be programmed to District standards for specific general alarm functions, and other common operating functions, as defined by the District’s Fire Alarm Maintenance Group. Failure to follow District standards shall be considered cause to reprogram the system to District standards, at contractor’s

August 2015 24


expense. All panels will include a separate general alarm, NAC, HVAC\damper, Door Holder, Sprinkler and Elevator disable function. Fire Drill\Dialer disable function shall not be allowed.

2.3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Operation of any alarm initiating devices shall automatically:

1. Sound local audible signal and display red common alarm LED. 2. Sound audible notification appliances throughout the building. 3. Flash visual notification appliances throughout the building. 4. Sound/flash the exterior Fire Dept Response Point horn/strobes. 5. Indicate the device in alarm on the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator. 6. Indicate the location of alarm zone (floor and area) on fire alarm control panel and

remote annunciator. 7. Alarm signal transmitted to District central stating receiver. 8. Alarm signal transmitted to e-mail list 9. Manual acknowledgement function at the fire alarm control panel silences local

audible alarm. Visual alarm condition is displayed until alarm condition is restored and panel is reset.

B. Duct Smoke Detector Sequence of Operation: Operation of any duct smoke detector shall automatically:

1. Sound local audible signal and display yellow common supervisory LED. 2. Indicate the device in supervisory on the fire alarm control panel and remote

annunciator. 3. Indicate the location of supervisory zone (floor and area) on the fire alarm control

panel and remote annunciator. 4. Supervisory signal transmitted to District central station receiver. 5. Shutdown all HVAC unit(s) associated with the duct smoke detector zone, as required

by the AHJ. 6. Delay for 60 seconds then close smoke/fire damper(s) associated with the specific

HVAC system ductwork, as required by the AHJ. On reset allow 60 second delay of HVAC unit for dampers to open first.

7. A manual acknowledge function at the fire alarm control panel silences local audible alarm. Visual supervisory condition is displayed until supervisory condition is restored.

C. Trouble Sequence of Operation: The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect and report trouble conditions to the fire alarm panel. Any opens, grounds, disarrangement of system wiring on alarm initiating circuits, opens, shorts, grounds, or disarrangement of system wiring on alarm notification appliance circuits, or device trouble or maintenance conditions, shall automatically:

August 2015 25


1. Sound local audible signal and display yellow common trouble LED. 2. Indicate the device in trouble on the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator. 3. Indicate the location of trouble condition, as applicable, on the fire alarm annunciator. 4. Trouble signal transmitted to District central station receiver. 5. Manual acknowledgement function at the fire alarm control panel silences local

audible signal. Visual trouble condition is displayed until the trouble condition is restored.

D. Alarm Reset: System remains in alarm mode until alarm condition is restored and fire alarm system is manually reset with key-accessible reset function. System resets only if initiating circuits are out of alarm. On reset allow 60 second delayed startup of HVAC unit for dampers to open first.

E. Alarm Silence: System audible and visual notification appliances remain

sounding/flashing until the fire alarm system in manually silenced with a key-accessible alarm silence function. Visual notification appliances remain flashing until the fire alarm system is manually reset as described above. System audible and visual notification appliances shall resound/flash upon reactivation of alarm silence function.

F. Drill Switch: Shall not be allowed.

G. Lamp Test: A manual lamp test function causes alarm indication of each alarm, trouble and/or system LED at the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciators upon activa-tion of key-accessible lamp test function. Alarm indication of LEDs shall turn off upon reactivation of lamp test function, or upon automatic timeout.

August 2015 26


2.4 ANNUNCIATORS

A. Remote Annunciators

1. Alpha Numeric Annunciators: Remote alpha numeric Annunciators shall be located throughout the facility, as indicated on the plans. The annunciator shall operate from system 24vDC, be battery backed up, and shall contain a supervised, backlit, liquid crystal display (LCD) with a minimum of 4 lines with 20 character per line. Each annunciator shall be capable of supporting custom messages similar to the main fire alarm control panel display. Provide key-accessible Lexan cover for Main Entry Annunciator location only.

2.5 GRAPHIC DISPLAY MAPS

A. Graphic display maps of the system shall be located at the fire alarm control panel and at

all fire alarm annunciator panels, as shown on the plans. The graphic maps shall provide a graphical representation of the building layout with the fire alarm devices and system ID numbering indicated. The maps shall be framed behind clear Lexan glass, and shall be readily modifiable to incorporate future changes in the buildings function.

B. Laminated portable maps shall be provided adjacent to the log book on a key ring with a

grease pencil or dry erase fine point marker. Laminated maps shall include locations of power supplies, remote test switches and fire/smoke dampers/fireflys.

August 2015 27


C. Graphic Maps shall be orientated for user reference based on the location in the building and have a “You Are Here” flag for each location.

D. All graphic maps shall include:

1. Building name and address including zip code (Black, Bold, ½” text) 2. Accurate north arrow based on orientation of each map. 3. Symbol legend identifying each device as shown on graphic map. 4. “You Are Here” arrow indicator (Red, Bold, ¼” text) 5. Room Designations (Black, 1/8” text) 6. Device addresses (Blue, 1/8” text) 7. Initiating Devices (Red) 8. Supervisory Devices (Orange) 9. Water Shutoff Location (Blue) 10. Gas Shutoff Location (Green) 11. Electrical Shutoff Location (Red) 12. Fire Hydrant Locations (Red)

E. For buildings protected by automatic sprinklers, graphic maps shall include a sprinkler

zone map indicating areas of the building protected by automatic sprinklers with associated sprinkler zone labels.

2.6 INTELLIGENT ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INITIATING DEVICES

A. All initiating devices shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Use.

B. INTELLIGENT DETECTORS GENERAL:

August 2015 28


1. The system detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using polling protocol, and shall be individually addressable. The detectors shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. As a minimum, each detector shall have a flashing LED to indicate communications status, and a red LED to indicate alarm status of the detector,

2. Each detector shall be capable of providing pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to normal, trouble and need for cleaning information. Each detector shall be individually programmed to operate at any one (1) of five (5) sensitivity levels. And shall be capable of being programmed for different sensitivities during day/night periods: which allows the detector to be more sensitive during unoccupied periods, when lower ambient background conditions are expected. Each detector shall be provided with an environmental compensation feature, which will adjust the detector’s compensation value to counteract the impacts of temperature, humidity, other contaminates, as well as detector aging. The individual detector’s environmental compensation feature shall update itself, as a minimum, once every twenty-four (24) period. The detector shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value.

3. Ionization smoke detectors shall not be used in District facilities. 4. Where necessary to distinguish the locations of two or more detectors, compass

directions shall be incorporated in the device location description in programming

C. FIRE DETECTION SENSORS

1. Heat Detector, Fixed Temperature/Rate-of-Rise: provide intelligent analog/addressable combination fixed temperature/rate of rise heat detector with a nominal alarm point rating of 135 degrees F, and a rate of raise alarm point of 15 degrees F. The heat detector shall incorporate a low mass thermistor heat sensor and shall operate at a fixed temperature and at a temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag or wall mount installation. The device location description in programing shall include “R135” for this type of heat detector. The heat detector shall mount to any of the mounting bases as specified below, and shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

a. Temperature: 32 degrees F to 100 degrees F b. Humidity: 93% RH, non-condensing c. Elevation: No limit

2. Heat Detector, Fixed Temperature: Provide intelligent analog/addressable fixed temperature heat detector with a nominal alarm point rating 135 degrees F and 200 degrees F. The heat detector shall incorporate a low mass thermistor heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature. The heat detector shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to report an alarm condition, and shall be rated for ceiling or wall mount installation. The device location description in programing shall include “F” followed by the nominal alarm point rating for each heat detector of this type (F135, F200, etc.) The heat detector shall mount to any of the mounting bases as specified below, and shall be suitable for operating in the following environment:

August 2015 29


a. Temperature: 32 degrees F to 100 degrees F b. Humidity 93% RH, non-condensing c. Elevation: No limit

D. SMOKE DETECTOR SENSORS

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detector: Provide intelligent analog-addressable photoelectric

smoke detector. The photoelectric smoke detector shall utilize a light scattering type photoelectric smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings, and shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental effects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be rated for ceiling or wall mount installation, and shall be rated for operation in constant air velocities from 4,000 ft/min. The percent smoke obscuration per foot alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five (5) sensitivity settings, ranging from 1.0% to 3.5% and shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

a. Temperature: 32 degrees F to 100 degrees F b. Humidity 93% RH, non-condensing c. Elevation: No limit

2. Projected Beam Smoke Detectors: Provide intelligent addressable reflector type projected beam type smoke detector, as indicated on the plans. The unit shall be capable of covering distances up to 300 feet, and shall feature automatic gain control, which shall compensate for gradual deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses. The beam detectors shall be either ceiling mount or wall mount. Provide a key activated remote test switch/annunciator station mounted at an accessible location from a 6’ ladder above finished floor. Identify the remote test station with the associated device ID number it controls, and the associated beam detector unit identification.

3. Standard Detector Mounting Base with Trim Ring: Provide standard detector mounting base with trim ring suitable for mounting to a standard electrical box or trim ring. The standard detector base shall have the following minimum requirements:

a. Removal of the respective smoke detector shall not affect communications with the remaining other detectors.

b. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. c. The base shall be capable of supporting one (1) remote alarm LED indicator,

where shown on the drawings. 4. Relay Detector Mounting Base with Trim Ring: Provide relay detector mounting base

with trim ring suitable for mounting to a standard electrical box or trim ring. The relay detector base shall have the following minimum requirements:

a. Removal of the respective smoke detector shall not affect communications with the remaining other detectors.

b. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. c. The form “C” dry relay contacts shall have a minimum contact rating of 1

Amp at 30vDC, and be listed for “pilot duty.” d. The operation of the relay shall be controlled from its respective detector and

shall automatically de-energize when the detector is removed. 5. Isolator Detector Mounting Base with Trim Ring: Provide isolator detector mounting

August 2015 30


base with trim ring suitable for mounting to a standard electrical box or trim ring. Isolator devices shall only be used when the SLC leaves the building or enters a wet area. The isolator detector base shall have the following minimum requirements:

a. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. b. The isolator base shall operate upon a short circuit condition on the device

initiating loop circuit. c. Following a short circuit condition, each isolator/detector shall be capable of

performing an internal self-test procedure to reestablish normal operations. d. Isolator device locations shall be shown on the graphic maps.

6. Duct Detector Housing: Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to facilitate mounting an intelligent analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detector, with a standard, relay, or isolator mounting base. Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects, and provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube, which extends into the duct air stream, a minimum length of 75% of the duct width being covered. Provide air sampling inlet tube to cover duct widths up to ten (10) feet. The duct detector shall be suitable for use on ductwork with airflow velocities of 300ft3/min to 4,000 ft3/min.

a. Provide key activated remote test station, as shown on the drawings. b. Provide duct detector housing with auxiliary relay for all HVAC unit

locations, for transmission of the alarm signal to the HVAC unit DDC control panel.

c. Provide duct detector housing with auxiliary relay for all smoke/fire damper locations and Metasys interface.

d. Provide MAGNEHELIC DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE delta and date of install written on the duct above the detector housing with a BLACK SHARPIE PEN. Also document this value on the permanent Record of Completion.

7. Remote Duct\Beam Detector Test Station: Provide a remote duct detector test station to facilitate testing of intelligent duct smoke detectors programmed actions and sequences. The test station shall be key-operated, shall feature a red alarm LED, and shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring. When the key is in the “TEST” position, it shall not be possible to remove the key; the alarm LED shall light to indicate that the duct detector is in alarm, and all programmed functions shall occur. Upon system reset, the “TEST” condition shall clear and the system returns to normal. Mount remote test station in the nearest corridor location in the ceiling tile, or wall mounted at a height accessible from 6’ ladder from finished floor. Identify the remote test station with the associated device ID number it controls and the associated HVAC until identification.

8. Provide keyed override switch with four (4) hour timer for gym and auditorium beam detectors. Location to be approved by JCPS and Engineer prior to installation.

2.7 INTELLIGENT MODULES – GENERAL

A. The system modules shall be capable of full digital communications using polling

protocol, and shall be individually addressable. The modules shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. As a minimum, each module shall have a

August 2015 31


flashing LED to indicate communications status, and a red LED to indicate alarm or active control status of the module. The modules input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for opens and grounds faults, and shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

1. Temperature: 32 degrees F to 100 degrees F 2. Humidity 93% RH, non-condensing 3. Elevation: No limit 4. Do not mount intelligent modules above finished ceilings. The intelligent monitor and

control modules shall be mounted so that the LED is visible. a. Simplex modules must have Simplex listed cover plate to allow view of LED. b. Notifier Mini-modules are not allowed.

5. Multi-input modules shall not be acceptable unless each input has a distinguishable color or pulse.

B. FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

1. Intelligent modules must be mounted at a height accessible from a 6’ ladder from a finished floor.

2. Single Input Module: a. Provide intelligent addressable single input module, as applicable, The input

module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall provide one (1) supervised Class B circuit, capable of supporting the following circuit types:

i. Normally Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

ii. Normally Open Active Non-Latching (Monitors, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

iii. Normally Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches) 3. Single Input Signal Module: Provide intelligent addressable single input signal

module. The signal module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit, capable of supporting the following circuit types:

a. Audible Indicating Appliance Circuit, polarized, rated at 24vDC at 2 Amps. b. Visual Indicating Appliance Circuit, polarized, rated at 24vDC at 2 Amps. c. Supervised Control Circuit, polarized, rated at 24vDC at 2 Amps.

4. Control Relay Module: Provide intelligent addressable control relay module. The control module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall provide one (1) Form “C” dry relay contact, rated at 2 Amps at 24vDC or 0.5 Amps at 120vDC; to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay module shall be rated for “pilot duty” and releasing systems.

5. Fault Isolation Module: Provide intelligent fault isolation module whenever the SLC leaves the building or enters a wet area. The fault isolation module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault. Isolation devices shall not be installed above ceilings. Device locations shall be documented on the fire alarms graphic maps.

August 2015 32


2.8 FIRE ALARM INTEGRATED AUDIO/VISUAL EVACUATION SYSTEMS

A. All notification appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.

B. All visual notification appliances (strobes) or combination appliances with strobes shall

be capable of providing the “Equivalent Facilitation” allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibilities Guidelines (ADAAG), and shall be UL 1971 listed.

C. Strobes: Provide standard synchronized UL 1971, 24vDC red strobe unit with 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 95cd, or 115cd flash outputs, as shown on the contract documents. The strobes shall have their lens markings oriented for wall mounting or ceiling mounting, shall be provided with screw terminals for wiring interconnect, and shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring. Provide weatherproof wall box for outdoor mounting. Locate strobes per NFPA 72 and ADA guidelines.

D. HORNS & COMBINATION HORN/STROBES 1. Horns/Horn Strobes: Provide 24vDC, red electronic horn, with a selectable low or

high dBA output, capable of producing a sound rating of 97dBA, and shall have a selectable steady or temporal output. Both selectable features shall be capable of being reversed. Horns that cannot reverse these selectable settings shall not be acceptable. The horn and horn/strobes shall be provided with screw terminals for wiring interconnect, and shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring. Provide integral, 24vDC.

2. Synchronized UL 1971 strobe unit with 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 95cd, 110cd, or 115cd flash outputs, as shown on the contract documents. The horn/strobes shall have their lens markings oriented for wall mounting or ceiling mounting. Provide weatherproof device and back box, where required. Locate horns and horn/strobes per NFPA 72 and ADA guidelines.

E. FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS

1. Intelligent Manual Station: Provide intelligent addressable manual station. The

manual station shall be semi-flush mounted, non-coded, dual action type, shall be red in color, and shall be individually addressable. The manual station shall require a key to reset the station, and shall mount a standard electrical box or trim ring.

2.9 ANCILLARY DEVICES

A. Remote Relays: provide remote control relays connected to supervised ancillary circuits

for control of HVAC units, smoke/fire dampers, door releases, elevator controls, and other uses. Relay coils shall have a diode across its coil for polarity reversal purposes and SPDT contacts rated at 10 Amps at 120vAC. Provide load suppression devices, as required. Provide metal enclosure, as required.

B. Heavy Duty Remote Relays: Provide remote control relays connected to supervised

August 2015 33


ancillary circuits for control of HVAC units, smoke/fire dampers, door releases, elevator controls, and other uses. Relay coils shall have a diode across its coil for polarity reversal purposes and SPDT contacts rated for its interconnected load. Provide load suppression devices, as required. Provide metal enclosure, as required.

C. Magnetic Door Holders: Provide 24VDC magnetic door hardware as shown on the floor plans. Connect all existing magnetic door hardware to a new, dedicated remote power supply. Magnetic door hardware shall be capable of 120VAC or 24VDC power and shall have at least 40 pounds of holding power. Magnet shall be protected against transient surges up to 600 volts. Floor and wall mount models shall be available as well as surface and flush mounting options. Refer to Part 3.1 K for outlet box mounting.

D. Protective Device Wire Guards: Device wire guards shall be UL Listed with specific fire alarm device type and installation application. 1. Wire guards shall be installed on all gym and cafeteria initiating devices and

notification appliances. 2. Contractor shall reuse/reinstall existing UL listed pull station covers. 3. Protective pull station covers equipped with alarms shall be installed without batteries

unless otherwise noted on plans or in writing by the engineer or District Project Manager.

2.10 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 26 05 19.

B. Fire Alarm Initiating Device Loop (SLC) Circuits and Notification Appliance (NAC)

Circuits: as specified in Section 28 05 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install manual station with operating handle at 48 inches above finished floor.

C. Install audible and audible/visual notification devices to achieve Code required sound levels as defined in NFPA and ADA Guidelines.

D. Install ceiling mounted visual and audible/visual notification appliances in the center of the space as much as possible, but do not exceed 5 feet in any direction from the center, unless approved by the Engineer, District, or AHJ, prior to rough or installation.

August 2015 34


E. Audible/visual notification appliances shall be wall mounted in all common corridors and other areas where ceiling mounted devices are not practical.

F. Install wall mounted visual and audible/visual notification appliances with the bottom of the visual (strobe) lens at 80’ above finished floor, or with the top of the visual signal (strobe) lens at 6” below the ceiling (for low ceiling areas), whichever is lower.

G. Install ceiling mounted devices located on structural beams and joists with STI-8170 back plate or approved equivalent. Protect accessible back boxes with bell box or back box skirt or approved equivalent.

H. Install wiring with plenum rated cable. Cable routing shall be perpendicular to or parallel to structural building members, and shall utilize a metal bridle ring type support system attached to structural building members only. Mounting cable to other building systems (fire protection, electrical conduit, mechanical ductwork, etc.) or running cable in any fashion other than described, is strictly forbidden. For each device, neatly loop four feet of cable and support inside the nearest bridle ring. Route cables such that a minimum separation of ½” is maintained between Class 1 wire and power-limited fire alarm circuits. Provide separate relay (MR101C or approved equivalent) where 120VAC is required to release fire/smoke dampers, magnetic door holders, or similar. For Notifier devices, barrier CB500 may be installed in place of an additional relay. See paragraph 3.2 below. 1. For specific limited applications, the visual and audible/visual notification appliances

may be installed with the top of the visual signal (strobe) lens at up to 96” above finished floor. Each location must be approved in writing by the Engineer, District, or AHJ, prior to rough-in or installation.

2. For specific limited applications, the visual and audible/visual notification appliances may be wall mounted, when no suitable ceiling mount location is available. Each location must be approved in writing by the Engineer, District, or AHJ, prior to rough-in or installation.

I. Provide panel breaker locks for all electrical circuits for fire alarm and detection control

equipment panels. Fire alarm and detection circuit breaker locks shall be color coded red. Breaker Locks shall be Garvin Item # UBL1-RED.

J. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device.

K. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. Where wall construction is wood or steel frame, utilize Caddy telescopic bracket TSGB16/TSGB24 or approved equivalent.

L. Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, duct smoke detectors, smoke/fire dampers, HVAC units, and other applicable devices, furnished under other Sections.

August 2015 35


M. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.

N. Automatic Duct Detector Installation: Conform to IMC. When patching ducts, utilize steel plates secured by #8 x ½” indented slotted hex washer head type A sheet metal screws and apply mastic which is listed and labeled “181A-M” in accordance with UL 181A. Do not use tape.

O. Label each device as specified in Section 28 05 00.

P. Fire alarm contractor shall provide up to five (5) fire alarm system programming downloads in his base bid price, to accommodate the required phasing for the project. Fire alarm contractor shall furnish a unit price for one (1) lot of system programming and download for additional system downloads as part of his bid.

Q. Provide and install UL listed surge suppressor on 120VAC within five feet of the fire alarm control panel to provide protection to the fire alarm control panel.

R. Maintain supervision of existing sprinkler system at all times. Coordinate transfer with JCPS and engineer of record in writing.

3.2 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE

A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as specified in Section 28 05 00.


A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72, District, State, and Authority Having Jurisdiction

(AHJ) fire department requirements. Use District forms for record of completion.

B. Provide forty-eight (48) hours prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for rough Inspection, prior to installing ceiling tiles or drywall.

C. Provide seven (7) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for scheduled contractor pre-testing of the system.

D. Provide three (3) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for the scheduled Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) testing of the system.

E. Provide three (3) original copies of the District Certificate of Completion Form. One for the District, one for the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and one for the facility’s Fire Alarm System Logbook. Utilize the standard District form available on the District website

F. Provide two (2) detailed records of the pre-testing of the system: One for the District and one for the facility’s Fire Alarm System logbook. Pre-testing record must contain a

August 2015 36


minimum of the device ID, proper annunciator description, proper functionality of the device (audible/visual notification, HVAC shutdown, etc.), and date of the testing. Records must be typed in numerical order by device address and include a report generated by the fire alarm control panel. Utilize the standard District form available on the District website. Pre-testing records shall be included as part of the Record of Completion.

G. Decibel levels in every room shall be documented in a table format and a copy shall be left in the Fire Alarm Log Book. Any rooms exceeding 95dB as measured per NFPA 72 shall be adjusted by the contractor. Decibel levels shall also be recorded on the record documents.

H. Facilities with voice evacuation systems: Intelligibility CIS scores shall be documented in a table format for each acoustically distinguishable space and a copy shall be left in the Fire Alarm Log Book. Any acoustically distinguishable spaces below .8 CIS as measured per NFPA 72 shall be adjusted by the contractor. CIS scores shall also be recorded on the record documents.

3.4 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems.

B. Include services of factory trained and certified technician to supervise installation adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

C. Provide two (2) hard copies and two (2) electronic copies in CD or flash drive format of the final system programming. One set to be delivered to the District Project Manager for the District Central Reporting System (Metasys) programming, and one set to be left inside the facility’s Fire Alarm System logbook.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide the services of a factory certified service representative to demonstrate the system and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below.

1. On-Site Training: Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of onsite training of the

facility’s school staff and Maintenance personal in the basic operations and functionality of the fire alarm system panel, annunciator, and field devices. Review field panel locations, typical device locations, and 120vAC power locations (panels, breakers, and circuits). Demonstrate the various system responses to the field off-normal conditions. Simulate alarm conditions, supervisory conditions, security conditions, trouble conditions, and ground fault conditions of the various field

August 2015 37


devices. Demonstrate how to reset various building systems (HVAC units, fire doors, security gates, etc.). Provide written instructions of basic system operating instructions behind clear Lexan framed glass, located adjacent to the fire alarm control panel. DO NOT TRAIN SCHOOL STAFF ON HOW TO DISABLE ANY POINTS.

B. Onsite System training shall be completed within six (6) days of completion of the

system and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) test. Offsite System training shall be completed within thirty (30) days of completion of the system and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) test, unless the District specifically directs an alternate training schedule.

C. Schedule the onsite training with the District at least three (3) days in advance.

August 2015 38


Fire Alarm Inspection Report

Record of Completion

Contact: Date: Report To: Business:

Address: Location Inspected:

Jurisdiction: Inspector: Phone:

INSPECTION TYPE

DACT Type SYSTEM INFORMATION FACP Type

[ ] Stand Alone Dialer (verify all signal types at Dispatch Center)

Manufacturer:

[ ] Contact ID (verify all signal types at Dispatch Center) Model #: [ ] LAN Card Installed and tested IP Address Circuit Styles: [ ] Other (Specify) Number of Circuits: DACT Account Number: Software Rev: DACT Test Time: Recovery Flash Drive in Panel [ ] YES [ ] NO DACT Primary Phone # Device List in Panel [ ] YES [ ] NO

ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND CIRCUIT INFORMATION

# of Circuit style Description Manual Stations Ion Detectors Photo Detectors Duct Detectors Heat Detectors Water Flow Supervisory Tamper Supervisory DACT

ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES CIRCUITS # of Circuit Style Description Horns Strobes Horns/Strobes Other: (Specify): # of Alarm Indicating Circuits Are Circuits Supervised [ ] YES [ ] NO All Circuits tested for silence Function [ ] YES [ ] NO Water Flow Horn/Strobe Slaved to flow [ ] YES [ ] NO

SUPERVISORY SIGNAL-INITIATING DEVICES AND CIRCUIT

# of Circuit Description Fire Pump Power Fire Pump Running Fire Pump Auto Fire Pump\Controller Trouble Generator in Auto Position Generator or Controller

Trouble Switch Transfer Generator Engine Running

ANNUNCIATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST Quantity and style (See NFPA 72, Table 3-6) of

signaling line circuits connected to system Function Buttons disabled [ ] YES [ ] NO Power is non-resettable [ ] YES [ ] NO Data is Class A labeled Yellow [ ] YES [ ] NO All Lights function [ ] YES [ ] NO Back Lights function [ ] YES [ ] NO Graphic map is in place [ ] YES [ ] NO Verify Alarm and Trouble functions [ ] YES [ ] NO Knox box installed (6’ 5” AFF) [ ] YES [ ] NO Knox Box keys and 3 badges update[ ] YES [ ] NO Response Point Horn/Strobe functi [ ] YES [ ] NO

[ ] Record of Completion [ ] 22 Month Inspection [ ] 11 Month Inspection [ ] [ ] [ ] Other (Specify):

District Monitoring Center 303-232-8688

August 2015 39


PRIOR TO ANY TESTING

Notifications are made: Yes No Who Time District Monitoring Center [ ] [ ]

Building Occupants [ ] [ ] Building Management [ ] [ ]

Other (Specify) [ ] [ ] AHJ (Notified of any impairments) [ ] [ ]

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FACP Location:

Visual

Pass / Fail

Functional Pass/

Fail

Comments

Control Panel Primary Power Supply Trouble Signals Lamps/LEDs Fuses Secondary Power Supply

SECONDARY (Standby): Type of Battery

Visual Inspection Battery

#1

Battery # 2

Installation Date Battery

#1

Battery # 2

Volts/Amp-Hr. Rating Battery #1

V AHr Battery #2

V AHr

Metered Standby Current:

Amps

Metered Alarm Current: Amps

Charger Voltage Volts Comments 24 Hour Load Test Voltage

VDC Pass Fail

PRIMARY (Main): Nominal voltage Over current Protection: Type

Amps

Location: Panel Number & Breaker:

Dedicated Circuit

Y N Secured Breaker

Y N

TROUBLE SIGNALS Comments Ring Back Feature Pass Fail N/A Disconnect Switches Pass Fail N/A Other Switches Pass Fail N/A Ground-fault Each Conductor Pass Fail N/A

August 2015 40


LAMPS/LEDs Comments Check all LEDs for Illumination Pass Fail N/A FUSES Comments Remove all fuses check rating Pass Fail N/A Check all fuses for supervisory Pass Fail N/A Emergency or standby systems used as a backup to primary power supply instead of using a secondary power

supply: [ ] Emergency system described in NFPA 70, Article 700 [ ] Legally required standby described in NFPA 70, Article 701 [ ] Optional standby system described in NFPA 70, Article 702, which also meets performance requirements of Article 700/701

INITIATION & NOTIFICATION DEVICES TOTALS (MAIN FACP) DEVICE

TYPE Total # of Devices

Total # Tested

Visual Pass / Fail

Functional Pass / Fail

Comments

Photo Ion Heat Duct Pull Stations Horn Strobe Horn Strobe Outside H/S

COMMUNICATOR CONTROL PANEL

Manufacturer:

Model: Visual

Pass / Fail Functional Pass/ Fail

Comments

Control Panel Primary Power Supply Trouble Signals Lamps/LEDs Fuses Secondary Power Supply PRIMARY (Main): Nominal voltage Overcurrent Protection: Type

Amps

NOTIFICATION DEVICES (MAIN FACP) CIRCUIT

STYLE Total # of Devices

Total # Tested

Visual Pass / Fail


Circuit Rating Amps

Circuit Amps.

EOL True measured Voltage

August 2015 41


Location:

Panel Number &

Breaker:

Dedicated Circuit Y N Secured Breaker Y N TROUBLE SIGNALS Comments

Power Disconnect Switches Pass Fail N/A Other Switches Pass Fail N/A

Ground-fault Each Conductor Pass Fail N/A LAMPS/LEDs Comments

Check all LEDs for Illumination Pass Fail N/A FUSES Comments

Remove all fuses check rating Pass Fail N/A Check all fuses for supervisory Pass Fail N/A

SECONDARY (Standby): Type of Battery Visual Inspection Battery #1 Battery # 2 Installation Date Battery #2 Battery # 2 Volts/Amp-Hr. Rating Battery #1 V Ahr Battery # 2 V Amp

s Metered Standby Current: Amps Metered Alarm Current: Amps Charger Voltage Volts Comments 24 Hour Load Test Voltage VDC Pass Fail Two Different Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver Telephone Numbers Programmed Into the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. (DACT) Yes No

COMMUNICATOR CONTROL PANEL (cont) Signal Yes No N/A Comments

Alarm Received in 90 Sec.

Alarm Restore

Trouble Received in 90 Sec.

Trouble Restore

Supervisory

AC Loss

AC Restore

Low Battery

Low Battery Restore

Primary Phone Line Loss

August 2015 42


Primary Phone Line Loss Restore

Secondary Phone Line Loss

Secondary Phone Line Loss Restore

Metasys Response To Alarm

Metasys Response To Trouble

VERIFY DACT PHONE NUMBERS # 1 # 2

August 2015 43


AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

(Use one form for each panel) Power Supply Name Power Supply Location

Power Supply Control

Visual Pass /

Fail

Functional Pass/ Fail

Comments

Control Panel Primary Power Supply Trouble Signals Lamps/LEDs Fuses Secondary Power Supply

PRIMARY (Main): Nominal voltage

Over current Protection: Type

Amps

Location: Panel Number & Breaker:

Dedicated Circuit Y [ ] N [ ] Secured Breaker Y [ ] N [ ] TROUBLE SIGNALS Comments Ring Back Feature Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] Disconnect Switches Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] Other Switches Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] Ground-fault Each Conductor Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] LAMPS/LEDs Comments Check all LEDs for Illumination Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] FUSES Comments Remove all fuses check rating Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] Check all fuses for supervisory Pass [ ] Fail [ ] N/A [ ] SECONDARY (Standby): Type of Battery

Visual Inspection Battery #1

Battery # 2

Installation Date Battery #2

Battery # 2

Volts/Amp-Hr. Rating Battery #1

V AHr Battery # 2 V AHr

Metered Standby Current:

Amps

Metered Alarm Current: Amps

Charger Voltage Volts Comments

August 2015 44


24 Hour Load Test Voltage

Volts Pass [ ] Fail [ ]

COMMENTS: Recommendations: Items in need of Immediate Action:

Testing team must use Jeffco Schools Alarm Pre-testing and Device Report.XLS for inspection and testing of each device.

Notification That Testing is Complete Yes No Who Time District Dispatch Center (303-232-8688) [ ] [ ]

Building Occupants [ ] [ ] Building Management [ ] [ ]

Other (Specify) [ ] [ ] AHJ (Notified of any impairments Cleared) [ ] [ ]

The Following Did Not Operate Correctly:

System Restored to Normal Operation: Date: Time: Recommendations: Items in need of Immediate Action:

NOTIFICATION DEVICES CIRCUIT

STYLE

Total # of Devices

Total # Tested

Visual Pass / Fail


Circuit Rating Amps

Circuit Amps.

EOL True measured Voltage

August 2015 45


Inspector certifies that this system test and inspection has been performed in accordance with all NFPA standards

Name of Inspector: Date: Time: Signature: Name of Owner or Representative: Date: Time: Signature:

August 2015 46

PRINT THIS SECTION FOR PRE-TESTING REPORT Visual Inspection

Address Description % Location Label Ring Dirty Other Functional Pass Fail OK OK OK OK X

August 2015 47

Jefferson County School District, R-1 TECHNICAL GUIDELINES 2015 Issue Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security


August 2015 48


28 31 50 Fire Alarm Voice Evacuation System – August 2015 Note: This section is presented in its entirety. It is suggested that the engineer cut and paste from this section to create a project specific specification section edited for each project.

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements shall apply to work of this Section.

B. At the time of bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, any variances to the contract drawing design, and any nonconformance to the operating capabilities called for in this specification, shall be listed in writing and forwarded with the submission of the bid. Any such exception, variance, or nonconformance, which was not listed at the time of bid, and is identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.

C. Fire Alarm manufacturer shall be required to provide Jefferson County Public Schools a licensed copy of any software required to download, modify and maintain the system. Programming access codes shall not be given to the District until after the warranty period.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment, materials, and services to furnish and install a complete emergency communication system of the zoned, non-coded general alarm type. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software, and memory specifically tailored for this installation. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Digital Voice Command 2. Digital amplifiers 3. Local paging microphone 4. Telephone paging interface 5. Gymnasium sound system interface 6. Auditorium sound system interface 7. Security system message interface 8. Indoor selectable output speaker strobes and dual voltage evacuation speakers 9. Outdoor Selectable output loudspeakers.

August 2015 49



A. Section 07 80 00: Firestopping B. Section 21 10 00: Water Based Fire Suppression Systems C. Section 23 33 00: Air Duct Accessories D. Section 26 05 00: Common Work Results For Electrical Systems E. Section 26 05 19: Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables F. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems G. Section 26 05 29: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems H. Section 26 05 33: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems I. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems J. Division 27: Communications K. Jefferson County PS DCAD Details

L. Division 28 05 00 Common Work Results For Electronic Life Safety and Security M. Division 28 31 00 2013 Division – Fire Alarm And Detection Systems

1.4 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards, publications, or Regulations referenced in this Section, and with the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:

1. All equipment shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, under the following standards: a. Signaling Systems – 1994 b. UL 464 – Audible Signal Applications – 1996. c. UL 864 – Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems – 1994. d. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 2010

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. System Design Parameters: B. The Jeffco Fire Alarm System Design Criteria shall be used to provide supplemental

coverage. This section shall be printed on the front page of all Fire Alarm Plans submitted to Local AHJ’s. It is intended to help local AHJ’s understand how the District applies additional selective coverage.

C. The design criteria matrix indicating expected dBA levels and CIS scores shall be used to provide supplemental coverage and shall be printed on the front page of all fire alarm plans submitted to local AHJ’s. FIRE ALARM VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA Contractor shall provide and install new voice evacuation system in accordance with bid documents. Existing paging system shall be demolished. Strobes and horn/strobes shall

August 2015 50


be replaced with speaker/strobes with supplemental speakers to achieve intelligibility CIS scores of 0.8. Strobe only devices shall remain in individual restrooms. New voice evacuation system shall interface with security and telephone lines. END FIRE ALARM VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA

2.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Audible Alarm Notification: By voice evacuation and tone signals on loudspeakers in areas as indicated on drawings.

Automatic Voice Evacuation Sequence: a) The audio alarm signal shall consist of an alarm tone for a maximum of

five seconds followed by an automatic digital voice message. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone shall resume. This sequence shall sound continuously until the "Alarm Silence" switch is activated.

b) All audio operations shall be activated by the system software so that any required future changes can be facilitated by authorized personnel without any component rewiring or hardware additions.

B. The voice evacuation system shall a minimum of 16 pre-recorded messages and 8 custom recorded messages to be defined by Jefferson County Public Schools in a format similar to the following:

1) Fire Alarm (temporal code alert tone followed by evacuation message). Alert Tone – Two cycles of the temporal code 3 pattern, then the two times evacuation message, then two more cycles of the temporal code 3 pattern.

2) Severe Weather (distinct alert tone followed by “defend in place” message). Alert Tone – steady tone for 5 seconds. Follow the same pattern as above (Tone, tone, message, message, repeat)

3) Emergency Evacuation Alert Tone – Fast whoop sound is played for 5 seconds. Follow same pattern as above (Tone, tone, message, message, repeat).

4) Fire Evacuation: Label Identification/Color – “FIRE”/Red Alert Tone – Two cycles of the temporal code 3 pattern, then the evacuation message, then two more cycles of the temporal code 3 pattern. Message – “Attention, Attention. A fire emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building using the nearest exit, immediately.” NOTE: The temporal code 3 pattern shall only be used for fire evacuation messages.

5) Severe Weather Warning: Label Identification/Color – “SEVERE WEATHER”/Blue Alert Tone – 100kHz steady tone is played for 5 seconds.

August 2015 51


Message – “May I have your attention please. The National Weather Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area. Please move away from the windows and take shelter immediately.”

6) Force Protection Antiterrorism Threat Condition Alert: Label Identification/Color – “FPCON ALERT”/Orange Alert Tone – Fast whoop sound is played for 5 seconds. Message – “Attention, Attention. A Force Protection Antiterrorism Threat has been issued for this area. Effective immediately, we are operating under secure and lockdown procedures. All personnel should remain calm and stay where you are. Please wait for further instructions.”

7) Natural Disaster Warning Label Identification/Color – “NATURAL DISASTER”/Orange Alert Tone – Hi/Lo Alert Tone (1000/800 Hz 0.25 seconds On/Alternate) is played for 5 seconds. Message – “Attention, Attention. A Natural Disaster has occurred in the local area. Please take appropriate action and tune into the local radio or television stations for the latest updates. All personnel should remain calm and stay where you are. Please wait for further instructions.”

8) Hazardous Material Emergency Label Identification/Color – “HAZMAT EMERGENCY”/Blue Alert Tone – March Time horn is played for 5 seconds. Message – “Attention, Attention. A Hazardous Material incident or other emergency has been reported. Immediately take shelter inside a facility. Accomplish required shelter in place actions and await further instructions.”

9) Routine Test of the Mass Notification System Label Identification/Color – “AUDIO TEST”/Green Alert Tone – 1kHz tone is played for 5 seconds. Message – “May I have your attention please. This is an audio test of the Mass Notification System, take no action, this is only a test.”

10) All Clear Verbal Label Identification/Color – “ALL CLEAR”/Green Alert Tone – 3 chimes. Message – “May I have your attention please. The emergency has now ended. An “All Clear” has been given. Please resume normal duties. Thank you for your cooperation.”

11) Temporal Code dBA test tone – Label Identification/Color – “TEST TONE”/Green Alert Tone – Continuous Temporal Code

12) Security One– Label Identification/Color – “Lights Lock Out of Sight”/Blue Alert Tone – TBD Message – to be coordinated with HSS Security and recorded by the principal.

13) Security Two– Label Identification/Color – “ARM”/Dark Blue Alert Tone – TBD

August 2015 52


Message – to be coordinated with HSS Security and recorded by the principal - ARM

14) Security Three– Label Identification/Color – “SECURITY ALARM”/Light Blue Alert Tone – TBD Message – to be coordinated with HSS Security and recorded by the principal - DISARM

C. Manual Voice Paging

1) The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any speaker manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all speakers in that group.

2) The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-to-talk paging microphone over the pre-selected speakers.

3) Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an "All Call" switch.

4) Paging shall be interfaced with the building telephone system.

2.3 FIRE ALARM INTEGRATED AUDIO/VISUAL EVACUATION SYSTEMS

A. All notification appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.

B. All visual notification appliances (strobes) or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing the “Equivalent Facilitation” allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibilities Guidelines (ADAAG), and shall be UL 1971 listed.

C. Strobes: Provide standard synchronized UL 1971, 24vDC white strobe unit with 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 95cd, 115cd, 135cd, 150, 177 or 185cd flash outputs, as shown on the contract documents. The strobes shall have their lens markings oriented for wall mounting or ceiling mounting, shall be labeled “ALERT”, shall be provided with screw terminals for wiring interconnect, and shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring. Provide weatherproof wall box for wet location mounting. Locate strobes per NFPA 72 and ADA guidelines.

D. SPEAKERS & COMBINATION SPEAKER/STROBES

1. Speaker/Speaker Strobes: Provide 25.0 or 70.7 Vrms white UL 1480 speaker approved for fire protective signaling systems., with a selectable low or high dBA output, capable of producing a sound rating of 97dBA, and shall have a selectable speaker taps for 1/4W, 1/2W, 1W and 2W. Both selectable features shall be capable of being changed. Speakers that cannot modify selectable settings shall not be acceptable. The speakers and speaker/strobes shall be provided with screw terminals for wiring interconnect, and shall mount to a deep electrical box or trim ring. Provide integral, 24vDC.

2. Synchronized UL 1971 strobe unit with 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, 95cd, 110cd, or August 2015 53


115cd flash outputs, as shown on the contract documents. The horn/strobes shall have their lens markings oriented for wall mounting or ceiling mounting. Provide weatherproof device and back box, where required. Locate horns and horn/strobes per NFPA 72 and ADA guidelines.

3. The supervised horn loudspeaker shall be a STH-15S/STH-15SR or approved equal. The horn shall be weather resistant and constructed of heavy gauge, treated aluminum. The horn shall be able to operate within any ambient temperature environment ranging from 66 degrees C (150°F) to -35 degrees C (-30°F). The horn shall be a double reentrant type with a 15 watt RMS audio power rated compression driver producing a UL rated 102 dB measured at 15 watts at 10 feet. The horn shall have an impedance selection via a 7 position switch of 5000, 2500, 1300, 666, 333, 89 & 45. Power taps shall be available at 2.0, 4.0, 7.5 & 15 watts for the 100 volt line, .9, 1.8, 3.8, 7.5 & 15 watts for the 70 volt line and .48, .94, 1.8, 7.5 & 15 watts for the 25 volt line. Each power tap shall have a 3dB incremental rating. The frequency response range shall be 400 - 14000 Hz. The horn shall have a dispersion of 70 degrees. The horn assembly shall be furnished with a mounting bracket that allows adjustment on either a vertical or horizontal plane with a single locking pin and include provisions for mounting, banding or strapping. Wiring terminals shall be fully enclosed and a vandal-resistant adapter cover shall provide connection protection for cable or conduit. The horn shall be 7.875” W x 8.75” H x 9.313” D (200 x 222 x 237 mm). The horn shall be finished in gray (STH-15S) or red (STH-15SR) baked epoxy.

E. Voice Alarm: Provide an emergency communication system, integral with the FACP, including voice alarm system components, microphones, amplifiers, and tone generators. Features include:

1. Amplifiers comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Amplifiers shall provide an onboard local mode temporal coded horn tone as a default backup tone. Test switches on the amplifier shall be provided to test and observe amplifier backup switchover. Each amplifier shall communicate to the host panel amplifier and NAC circuit voltage and current levels for display on the user interface.

2. Dual alarm channels permit simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones automatically or by use of the central control microphone. All announcements are made over dedicated, supervised communication lines. All risers shall support Class B wiring for each audio channel.

3. Emergency voice communication audio controller module shall provide up to 32 minutes of message memory for digitally stored messages. Provide supervised connections for master microphone and up to 5 remote microphones.

4. Status annunciator indicating the status of the various voice alarm speaker zones and the status of fire fighter telephone two-way communication zones.

F. Distributed Module Operation: FACP shall be capable of allowing remote location of the August 2015 54


following modules; interface of such modules shall be through a Style 4 (Class B) supervised serial communications channel (SLC):

1. Amplifiers, voice and telephone control circuits 2. Addressable Signaling Line Circuits 3. Initiating Device Circuits 4. Notification Appliance Circuits 5. Auxiliary Control Circuits 6. Graphic Annunciator LED/Switch Control Modules

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install audible and audible/visual notification devices to achieve Code required sound levels as defined in NFPA and ADA Guidelines and Intelligibility levels of .8CIS.

C. Install ceiling mounted visual and audible/visual notification appliances in the center of the space as much as possible, but do not exceed 5 feet in any direction from the center, unless approved by the Engineer, District, or AHJ, prior to rough or installation.

D. Audible/visual notification appliances shall be wall mounted in all common corridors and other areas where ceiling mounted devices are not practical.

E. Install wall mounted visual and audible/visual notification appliances with the bottom of the visual (strobe) lens at 80’ above finished floor, or with the top of the visual signal (strobe) lens at 6” below the ceiling (for low ceiling areas), whichever is lower.

F. Install ceiling mounted devices located on structural beams and joists with STI-8170 back plate or approved equivalent. Protect accessible back boxes with bell box or back box skirt or approved equivalent.

1. For specific limited applications, the visual and audible/visual notification appliances may be installed with the top of the visual signal (strobe) lens at up to 96” above finished floor. Each location must be approved in writing by the Engineer, District, or AHJ, prior to rough-in or installation.

2. For specific limited applications, the visual and audible/visual notification appliances may be wall mounted, when no suitable ceiling mount location is available. Each location must be approved in writing by the Engineer, District, or AHJ, prior to rough-in or installation.

G. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device.

H. Speaker and strobe circuits shall be paired such that strobe circuit runs will have a

respective speaker circuit. August 2015 55


I. Interface the DVC with the school telephone paging system.

J. Interface the DVS with the school security system.

K. Provide two distinct paging zones:

1. Interior 2. Exterior


August 2015 56

M&A Site Preparation TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 31 11 00- 1

SECTION 31 11 00 - SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Remove and dispose according to plans all unforeseen site elements including trees, shrubs, fences, pavements, pipes, utilities, wells and structures indicated to be removed. If there is a question as to the removal of an item, contact the Architect prior to removal.

B. Clear area to be graded of plant life, grass, gravel and surface debris.

1.02 RELATED WORK

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Document, and Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect bench marks, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving, and curbs that are to remain.

B. Protect above or below grade utilities that are to remain.

C. Protect all trees to remain using a strong barrier at least ten feet from the trunk throughout construction.

D. Maintain and protect existing utilities to remain which pass through work area.

E. Protect existing and repair any damage at no cost to Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS TO BE REMOVED

A. All items within the construction area indicated to be removed and not indicated for reinstallation or removal by Owner shall become the property of the Contractor who shall remove them from the site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

M&A Site Preparation TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 31 11 00- 2

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove existing materials as indicated on plan. Where new concrete wall, concrete paving, or asphalt adjoin existing asphalt, cut existing asphalt to a straight line using a masonry saw or similar tool.

B. At areas to be graded, landscaped, or paved, clear and grub area prior to grading operations to remove all rocks, roots, stolons, seeds, vegetative and deleterious material. Contractor to remove from site.

C. Site Clearing: Limits of site clearing are as indicated on the Civil drawings. The Contractor shall repair any injury to vegetation or other objects beyond the limits of work as directed by the Owner, or replace the items without additional compensation for such repair or replacement. Complete repairs within two days after the cutting. Paint required for cut or scarred surfaces of trees or shrubs designated to remain shall be an approved asphaltum base paint prepared especially for tree surgery. 1. Cut, mow, rake, collect, haul, and dispose of all vegetation not designated to remain

within the limits of the work. The stumps of all trees, large brush (larger than 4 inches) and major roots shall be grubbed and chipped. Chips shall not have any nominal dimension larger than 4 inches in any direction. All material which cannot be chipped shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a legal manner in accordance with local regulations.

2. Use caution to prevent disturbances to the roots of existing trees that are to remain. Stumps of trees that are removed shall be ground to a depth of two feet below surface elevation, using caution to avoid damage to any utilities. Coordinate with landscape architect.

D. Conduct demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with streets, walks, and other adjacent facilities. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

E. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting, and guard rails as required by applicable regulatory requirements to protect the public and workers.

F. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate the nature and extent of the conflict and submit to the Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay.

3.03 CLEAN UP AND REPAIR

A. During the demolition operations, keep the premises free from accumulated waste material or rubbish caused by employees or work, and at the completion of the work remove rubbish, tools, and surplus material and leave the premises clean and ready for subsequent work. Promptly remove waste, rubbish or debris from site.

B. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required and all damage to remaining elements due to demolition, at no cost to the owner.


M&A Earthwork TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES 31 23 00 - 1

SECTION 31 23 00 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Subsurface drainage backfill for trenches. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 5. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and

pit for buried utility structures.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches

to support sides of pipe. 2. Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by

Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

H. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material

proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow

soil material proposed for fill and backfill.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service to establish location of utilities for area where Project

is located before any excavating. 4. Provide alternate utility service if shut down exceeds four (4) hours.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Reference Soils Report. For questionable soils not described in the report, consult a geotechnical engineer.

C. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

D. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 100 percent passing a 2-inch sieve and 0 to 30 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.


F. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

G. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

C. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf ; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50; ASTM D 4751.

D. Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30; ASTM D 4751.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage


caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.02 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3.03 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.04 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil

materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices found in Division 1. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on

surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

3.05 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.


2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.

3.06 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.

3.07 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe

below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: As indicated.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.08 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect.

3.09 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by

Architect.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line

of remaining trees.


3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

B. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on

both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.

C. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

D. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.

E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.

F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.


3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 0 to +3 percent of optimum moisture content for Subbase, Engineered Fill, Bedding, Drainage Fill, and Filter Material. For re-use of on-site soils as fill or backfill, the specific moisture content minimum shall be that at which a maximum swell of 1 percent occurs under a 150psf loading, as determined by a qualified geotechnical testing agency. This swell testing can be done as each proctor test is performed. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 3 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches, in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to Soils Report: Min. 95% of Standard Proctor (ASTM D698).

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus ½ inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.


3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as indicated on drawings. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on drainage fabric to support drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material and wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each course of filter material in lifts no greater than 8 inches.

B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each course of filter material in lifts no greater than 8 inches. 2. Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final subgrade.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade per ASTM D698 with a minimum of 90% of maximum dry density.

3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness. 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in

a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in

equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill

layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.


D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.21 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect;

reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent

work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.


M&A TWO MODULARS AT EACH OF 3 SCHOOL SITES

Asphalt Paving 32 12 00- 1

SECTION 32 12 00 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Asphalt paving surface course and asphalt base course for all on-site work.

B. Asphalt patching.

C. Asphalt surface treatments.

D. Pavement-marking paint.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The latest issue of the publications listed below and referenced to thereafter by basic designation only, forms a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto:

B. “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction”, Department of Transportation, State of Colorado, (CDOT). 1. Section 401 - Plant Mix Pavements - General. 2. Section 702 - Bituminous Material. 3. Section 703 - Aggregates.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 979 - Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 2. ASTM D 1188 - Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous

Mixtures Using Paraffin--Coated Specimens. 3. ASTM D 1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type. 4. ASTM D 1559 - Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using

Marshall Apparatus. 5. ASTM D 2172 - Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving

Mixtures. 6. ASTM D 2726 - Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using

Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens. 7. ASTM D 2950 - Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods. 8. ASTM D 3203 - Percent Air Voids in Compacted, Dense and Open Bituminous

Paving Mixture Specimens. 9. ASTM D 3405 - Joint Sealants, Hot-Poured, For Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 10. ASTM D 3549 - Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture

Specimens.


A. Perform work in accordance with CDOT Specifications.

B. Mixing Plant: Conform to CDOT Specifications.

C. Obtain materials from the same source throughout project construction.

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT



A. Do not place asphalt when subgrade surface temperature is less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit, or surface is wet or frozen.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposed mix design for approval prior to commencement of work for all different mixes to be supplied in accordance with Section 401 or (CDOT). 1. Grading SX.

a. Flow - Between 8 and 18. b. Stability - Minimum 1650. c. 50 Blow Marshall.

2. Grading S. a. Flow - Between 8 and 18. b. Stability - Minimum 1610. c. 50 Blow Marshall.

1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall notify Architect and testing agency at least 3 days prior to commencing asphalt paving work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Asphaltic Cement: Comply with Subsection 702.01, CDOT Specifications, Viscosity Grade AC-20.

B. Aggregates: 1. Use locally available materials and gradations exhibiting satisfactory record of

previous installations. 2. Bituminous Surface Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed

slag, and sharp-edged natural sand, Subsection 703.04, Grade SX, CDOT Specifications.

3. Bituminous Base Course Aggregate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slab, and sharp-edged natural sand, Subsection 703.04, Grade S, CDOT Specifications.

4. Asphalt Patching Aggregate: Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slab, and sharp-edged natural sand, Subsection 703.04, Grade SX, CDOT Specifications.

C. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, Portland Cement or other inert material complying with Subsection 703.06, CDOT Specifications.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, Grade CSS-1h complying with Subsection 702.04, CDOT Specifications.

B. Reclaimed asphalt will not be allowed.

C. Equipment used for paving shall comply with Section 401, CDOT Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of subgrade are correct.

C. Surface Preparation: 1. Provide grade and location stakes under this Section as required for asphalt

paving work. 2. Fine Grading: For areas covered by this Section, finish fine grade to accurate

levels so specified minimum thickness of paving can be maintained with accurate and uniform finish levels as indicated.

a. Scarify subgrade to eight (8) inches minimum, moisten subgrade and re-compact to requirements of Section 312300 - Earthwork.

3. Proof Rolling: Operate heavy, rubber tired front loader or dirt-filled tandem wheeled dump truck over subgrade of paved areas. Where soft spots occur, remove loose materials and replace with road base aggregate compacted to level of subgrade at Contractor’s expense.

a. Changes in weather such as freezing or precipitation occurring after subgrade is proof rolled and before asphalt paving operations begin will require reproof rolling prior to paving. b. Asphalt paving operations will begin within 24 hours after proof rolling.

4. Coordination: a. Cooperate with other trades, arrange timing to avoid damage to the work including exterior concrete, grading, utilities, and seeding. b. Before the start of paving, ascertain utility lines, lighting, wiring, piping, curb work, general grading and heavy trucking are complete so such operations will not damage paving work.

3.02 PREPARATION - TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surface or subgrade surface at a uniform rate between 0.05 gallons per square yard to 0.15 gallons per square yard of surface.

B. Apply to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and previously constructed asphalt pavements.

C. Coat surfaces of manholes and inlets frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.

D. Allow tack coat to dry until tacky to touch prior to paving.

3.03 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying tack coat.

B. Place to maximum of three (3) inch compacted thickness lifts.

C. Placing. 1. Deliver job mix with temperature above 235 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. 3. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than ten (10) feet wide, unless otherwise

acceptable to the Architect. After first strip is placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips.



4. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact surface and apply tack coat.

D. Rolling. 1. Begin rolling when mixture will bear weight without excessive displacement. 2. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas

inaccessible to rollers. 3. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following

rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.

4. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture thoroughly compacted.

5. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum density allowed.

E. Compaction Requirements 1. Bituminous Surface Course: 95 percent maximum dry density according to ASTM

D 2950 (50 Blow Marshall). 2. Bituminous Base Course: 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM

D 2950 (50 Blow Marshall).

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 0.1875 inches measured with ten (10) foot straightedge.

B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 0.125 inch.

C. Finish subgrade elevations shall vary no more than 0.10 feet in 10 feet.

D. Elevations of the base course shall be true-to-line and elevation within 0.05 foot tolerance within 10 feet straight edge.

E. Elevations of the wearing course shall be true-to-line and elevation within 3/16 inch in any 10 foot length. The finished surface shall be free of birdbaths, ridges, hollows or other irregularities.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400 - Quality Control. Testing laboratory services will be provided by the Owner.

B. Asphalt Pavements: Check compaction and compliance with design mix by cutting test plugs where directed in accordance with ASTM D 979. Patch core holes. Test for compaction minimum of 95% of Marshall design density, aggregate gradation voids, and percent asphalt. 1. One (1) test for density ASTM D 1188, ASTM D 2726, or D 2950, thickness

ASTM D 3549, and air voids ASTM D 3203 per 300 tons of asphaltic material placed.

2. One (1) test for asphalt content ASTM D 2172 and aggregate gradation per 1500 tons of asphaltic material placed.



3. All reports shall include densities to the nearest 0.1 lb per cubic foot and compaction to nearest 0.1%. If a nuclear device is used, the report shall contain the method used (back scatter or direct transmission geometry), results of the daily standardization checks and the adjusted manufacturers calibration curve. The manufacturers calibration curve shall be adjusted as required by ASTM D 2950 whenever a change in either the material to be tested or the testing equipment is made.

C. Subgrade: Compaction tests shall be taken every 2000 square feet and/or as directed by the Owner.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury until cooled and hardened.

3.07 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Project Conditions: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials, 50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type F.

C. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

D. Allow paving to age for 10 days before starting pavement marking.

E. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

F. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.



Exterior Concrete Flatwork 32 13 00- 1

SECTION 32 13 00 - EXTERIOR CONCRETE FLATWORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.


A. Exterior concrete flatwork as shown on the drawings for the following: 1. Curbs 2. Gutters 3. Cross pans 4. Sidewalks


A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Demolition 2. Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork 3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit concrete test reports as specified in Sections 01 45 00 and 03 30 00.


A. Codes and Standards: 1. For work on public right-of-way, conform to requirements of the City and County of

Denver to the extent that they are more stringent than specified herein. Obtain required permits and inspections for work on rights-of-way.

2. Except as otherwise specified or required by the City and County of Denver, conform to requirements of ACI 301.

1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Protect all concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be

caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures in compliance with ACI 306.

B. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and

strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Forms: 1. Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement

during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. a. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.

2. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface

surface of concrete.

B. Portland Cement Concrete: 1. Conform to requirements of Section 03 30 00. 2. 4500 psi

C. Fiber Reinforcement: 1. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use

in concrete paving complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116 M, Type III, 1/2” to 1-1/2” long.

D. Curing Materials: 1. Curing and sealing compound for exterior flatwork shall be linseed oil based:

Promulsion 50 AW by Con-Chem; L&M Super seal 35.

E. Expansion Joint Material: 1. 0.5” thick, closed cell polyethylene foam, Texmastic “Vinyltex 3600”, Sonneborn

“Sonoflex F”, or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify subgrades to ensure adequacy of compaction and suitability to receive exterior concrete flatwork. Start of work under this section constitutes acceptable of subgrade as suitable for exterior concrete flatwork.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Staking of Lines and Grades: 1. Provide line and grade stakes for exterior flatwork for alignment and levels.

B. Excavation: 1. Excavate to the required depth and to a width that will permit the installation and

bracing of the forms. Shape and compact subgrade to a firm even surface. Remove and replace all soft and yielding material with acceptable material.



3.03 FORMING

A. Forms: 1. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient

quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. a. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances

1) Top of forms not more than 0.125” in 10’. 2) Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 0.25” in 10’.

2. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.04 REINFORCEMENT

A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Sections, unless otherwise indicated.

3.05 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE

A. Follow requirements of section 03 30 00.

B. Do not place concrete until sub base and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten sub base if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Curbs and Gutters: 1. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor’s

option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed minimum specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified.

3.06 FINISHING

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.

B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10’ straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish.

C. Finish surfaces with a wooden or magnesium float. Plastering of surfaces is not permitted.



D. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming unless otherwise directed. Coordinate the required final finish with the Architect before application. 1. On inclined slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non-slip finish by scoring surface with a

stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

E. Edge all outside edges of the slab and all joints with a 0.25” radius edging tool.

F. Work edges of gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 0.5” radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.

G. Form Removal: 1. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form

removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect.

3.07 JOINTS

A. Curb and Gutter Expansion Joints: 1. Form expansion joints at 60 foot maximum spacing using a preformed expansion

joint filler having a thickness of 0.5”. When the curb is constructed adjacent to or on concrete pavement, locate expansion joints opposite or at expansion joints in the pavement.

2. Install expansion joints between concrete curb and any fixed structure or sidewalk. Extend expansion joint material for full depth of contact surface. Where joint sealer is indicated, stop expansion joint material not less than 0.5” and no more than 1” below finished surface. Protect top edge with metal cap.

B. Sidewalk Joints: 1. Divide the sidewalk into sections by dummy joints formed by a jointing tool or other

acceptable means as directed. Extend these dummy joints into the concrete for at least 1/3 of the depth and make approximately 0.125” wide.

2. Provide expansion joints where indicated. 3. Provide construction joints around all appurtenances such as manholes, utility poles,

pipes and other penetrations, extending into and through sidewalks. Install 0.5” thick preformed expansion in these joints. Install expansion joint filler between concrete sidewalks and any fixed structure such as a building. Extend expansion joint material for full depth of concrete except stop 0.5” below finished surface. Protect top edge of joint filler with removable material or metal cap.

3.08 CURING

A. Immediately upon completion of the finishing, moisten concrete and keep moist for three days, or cure concrete by use of membrane forming curing compounds as specified in Section 03 3900.

B. During the curing period exclude all traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular.

C. For surfaces to receive protective coating, cure by use of absorptive cover.



3.09 CLEANING

A. Sweep concrete and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt or other foreign material prior to final inspection.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TWO MODULARS FOR EACH OF THREE ...€¦ · JEFFCO PUBLIC SCHOOLS Adams...

Documents

Transcript of 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TWO MODULARS FOR EACH OF THREE ...€¦ · JEFFCO PUBLIC SCHOOLS Adams...